CWV Park Service Center Building Improvements ... - City of Mission

CITY OF MISSION
CATHOLIC WAR VETERANS PARK
SERVICE CENTER BUILDING
IMPROVEMENTS & RENOVATIONS
Bid No. 13-162-03-04
MISSION, TEXAS
ARCHITECTS - PLANNERS
Gomez Mendez Saenz, Inc.
CONSULTANT
M.E.P. Solutions 2/11/2013
SSP Design, LLC
Set No.
Rudy V. Gomez, AIA

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID
CITY OF MISSION CATHOLIC WAR VETERANS PARK
SERVICE CENTER BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS AND RENOVATIONS
BID NO. 13-162-03-04
Separate sealed Bids for the CITY OF MISSION CATHOLIC WAR VETERANS
PARK SERVICE CENTER BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS AND RENOVATIONS
BID NO. 13-162-03-04 will be received at the City of Mission, Purchasing
Department, 1201 E. 8th Street, Mission, Texas 78572, until 2:00 p.m. March 4,
2013 and then at said office publicly opened and read aloud.
The Contract Documents may be examined at the following locations: Architects
Office; Owner’s Office; AGC Offices in Harlingen, Brownsville and McAllen.
Copies of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS may be OBTAINED at the office of the
Architect, Gomez Mendez Saenz, Inc., 1150 Paredes Line Rd., Brownsville,
Texas 78521 upon deposit of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) for each set.
Any BIDDER, upon returning the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS in good condition
within ten (10) days after the deadline for submission will be refunded his
payment.
ATTENTION TO BIDDERS is directed to the provisions of House Bill No. 54,
Chapter 45, passed by the Forty-third Legislature, at its Regular Session,
requiring that not less than the general prevailing rates of per diem wages for
work of similar character in the locality where the work is performed shall be paid
all laborers, workmen and mechanics employed in the construction of public
works.
Mr. Eduardo Belmarez,
Director of Purchasing

SUPPLEMENTAL ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
CITY OF MISSION CATHOLIC WAR VETERANS PARK
SERVICE CENTER BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS AND RENOVATIONS
BID NO. 13-162-03-04
1. Sealed Bids, plainly marked on envelope, “Bid Proposal – City of Mission
Catholic War Veterans Park Service Center Building Improvements and
Renovations Bid No. 13-162-03-04” addressed to, Mr. Eduardo Belmarez,
Director of Purchasing, City of Mission, 1201 E. 8 th , Mission, Texas 78572.
Bid will be received on March 4, 2013 at 2:00 p.m. and will then be publicly
opened and read aloud for all work for each proposal in accordance with the
plans and specifications prepared by Gomez Mendez Saenz, Inc., 1150
Paredes Line Rd., Brownsville, Texas, (Telephone 956-546-0110).
2. Plans and specifications may be obtained at the office of the Architect with
a deposit of $100.00 which will be refunded upon return of complete contract
documents in good condition to the Architect within ten days after bid
opening.
3. Contract documents are available in the Architect's office for inspection by
prospective bidders. It is suggested that sub-contractors and suppliers use
AGC or McGraw Hills Construction Rooms for estimating purposes.
4. A cashier's check or certified check, or acceptable bidder's bond payable
to the Owner in the amount of not less than 5% of the largest total of the bid
submitted must accompany each bid as guarantee that, if awarded the
contract, the bidder will promptly enter into contract and execute bond in the
form provided by the Architect and the Owner.
5. Statutory bond for performance of the Contract and for payments of
mechanical and materials will be required in an amount equal to 100% of the
accepted bid, if the bid exceeds $100,000.00.
6. The Owner reserves the right to hold the bid for thirty (30) days from date
of receiving it without action on it, and to reject any or all bids and to waive all
formalities.
Mr. Eduardo Belmarez,
Director of Purchasing

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notice To Proposers
1 Pages
Instruction For Competitive Sealed Proposals
6 Pages
Ranking Evaluation & Ranking Criteria
3 Pages
Instruction To Bidders AIA Document A701, 1997 Edition
8 Pages
Bid Proposal Form
2 Pages
List Of Proposed Sub-Contractor/Suppliers
1 Page
General Conditions Of The Contract For Construction AIA Document A201,
2007 Edition 39 Pages
Supplementary Conditions To The General Conditions Of Contract For
Construction
43 Pages
Wage Rates
5 Pages
Standard Form Of Agreement Between Owner And Contractor
AIA Document A101, 2007 Edition
7 Pages
Supplementary Conditions To The Standard From Of Agreement
Between Owner And Contractor AIA Document A101-2007
2 Page
Form Of Payment Bond
1 Page
Form Of Performance Bond
1 Page
DIVISION 1 _ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 Summary of Work, Allowances 3 Pages
01340 Submittals 4 Pages
01505 Temporary Facilities 3 Pages
01605 Products and Substitutions 5 Pages
01705 Project Closeout 5 Pages
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02060 Demolition 2 Pages
02110 Site Preparation 3 Pages
02200 Earthwork 8 Pages
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03010 Concrete Work 13 Pages
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04220 Concrete Masonry Units 7 Pages
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05500 Metal Fabrications 6 Pages
DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY
06100 Rough Carpentry 4 Pages
06200 Finish Carpentry 5 Pages
06400 Architectural Woodwork 6 Pages
DIVISION 7 - MOISTURE PROTECTION
07200 Insulation 3 Pages
07201 Sound Attenuation Blankets 1 Page
07220 Roof and Deck Insulation 3 Pages
07520 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing 16 Pages
07600 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 9 Pages
07900 Joint Sealers 3 Pages

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08100 Steel Doors and Frames 5 Pages
08210 Wood Doors 4 Pages
08300 Special Doors 2 Pages
08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront 4 Pages
08520 Aluminum Windows 5 Pages
08700 Finish Hardware 6 Pages
08800 Glass & Glazing 5 Pages
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09200 Lath and Plaster 6 Pages
09250 Gypsum Drywall 9 Pages
09300 Tile 5 Pages
09400 Terrazzo 4 Pages
09510 Acoustical Ceilings 4 Pages
09650 Resilient Flooring 4 Pages
09900 Painting 7 Pages
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10410 Directories and Bulletin Boards 3 Pages
10440 Specialty Signs 3 Pages
10520 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories 2 Pages
10800 Toilet Accessories 2 Pages
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
11400 Food Service Equipment 4 Pages
11450 Residential Equipment 2 Pages

SUPPLEMENT TO INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS (A701)
ADD TO ART. 3.1.1 TWO (2) COMPLETE SETS OF BID DOCUMENTS (DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS)
may be obtained from the Architects by PRIME BIDDERS. Additional full sets (if available) may be
obtained by bonafide Bidders and Suppliers or Sub‐Contract Bidders upon receipt of actual cost of
printing which shall not be refunded.
ADD ART. 3.2.1.1 EXAMINATION OF SITE
Bidder will be held responsible to have examined the premises and become familiar with the
existing conditions under which the Contractor will be obliged to operate and that will in any
manner affect the work under this Contract. Should an error in the Drawings or specifications
become known to the Bidder, he shall so notify the Architect, in writing before opening of bids and
Architect will issue any required revisions to the Bid Documents by written Addendum as described
herein before.
ADD ART. 3.2.4.1 In the event of a conflict between the plans and specifications, which is not
resolved by addenda, the bidder is to bid the most expensive item.
ADD ART. 3.2.5 No interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications or other pre‐bid
documents will be made to any bidder orally.
ADD ART. 3.4.5 Failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not
relieve such bidder from any obligation under his bid as submitted or compliance with all items
covered in the addendum. All addenda so issued shall become part of the contract documents.
ADD TO ART. 4.1.1 Submit Bid (in triplicate) on the uniform Bid forms prepared by Architects.
Amounts, where indicated, must be stated in figures as well as words; and Bids must be signed by
Bidder, with the full name if an individual; and the Corporate name with the name of the Executive
Officer, attested by the Secretary, if a Corporation; and with the firm name and by at least one of
the partners if a Partnership.
ADD TO ART. 4.2.1 All proposals shall be accompanied by cashier or certified check or bidder's
bond in the amount of five percent (5%) payable to the Owner without recourse to the Owner.
Bids without check or bid bond inadequate amounts will not be considered.
ADD ART. 4.3.5 In case of a difference in written words and figures in a Bid, the amount stated in
written words shall govern.
ADD ART. 6.1.2 Qualification of Bidder: The Owner may make such investigations as he deems
necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish
to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner
reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such bidder
fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the

contract and to complete the work contemplated therein.
ADD ART. 6.1.3 The successful bidder shall submit with his performance and payment bonds a list
of all subcontractors and the name of the Job Superintendent and his qualifications.
ADD TO ART. 6.2 Subcontracts: The bidder is specifically advised that any person, firm or other
party to whom it is proposed to award a subcontract under this contract must be acceptable to the
Owner and to the Architect.
ADD TO ART. 7.1.1. SECURITY ‐ Acceptable security of 5% and construction security of 100% is
required as per Instructions to Bidders. To be acceptable to the Owner, Bidders Bonds shall be
from a surety listed in the latest Department of Treasury, Dept. Circular 570; 2012 Revision; listing
COMPANIES HOLDING CERTIFICATES OF AUTHORITY AS ACCEPTABLE SURETIES ON FEDERAL BONDS
AND AS ACCEPTABLE REINSURING COMPANIES, effective July 2, 2012. A copy of this Federal
Register is on hand in the Architect's Office and may be inspected upon request.
"In the event the listed bonding company is not listed in the latest Dept. Circular 570; 2012 Revision
as an acceptable surety, the following should be supplied:
The Company shall supply a certificate from the State Board of Insurance which states the amount
of the allowed capital and surplus as of the date of the last annual statutory financial statement for
the surety company for the bond for each bidder.
In the event the amount of the bond is in excess of 10% of the surety company's capital and
surplus, the surety company is to provide written certification from the State Board of Insurance
that the surety company has reinsured the portion of the risk that exceeds 10% of the surety
company's capital and surplus with one or more reinsurers who are duly authorized, accredited, or
trustee to do business in the state. The certification shall further provide that the reinsurers in
question are indeed authorized, accredited, and trustee to do business in this state."
ADD TO ART. 8.1.1The successful bidder must furnish performance and payment bonds upon the
forms which are attached hereto in the amount of 100% of the contract price from an approved
surety company holding a permit from the State of Texas to act as surety (and acceptable according
to the latest list of companies holding certificates of authority from the Secretary of Treasury of the
United States) or other surety or sureties acceptable to the Owner.
ADD TO ART. 9.1 NOTICE OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS: Attention is particularly called to those parts of
the contract documents and specifications which deal with the following:
A. Inspection and testing of materials
B. Insurance requirements
C. Stated Allowances
D. Coordination of work by others
E. Coordination of work site with others.

BID PROPOSAL FORM
(GENERAL CONTRACT)
Project:
Place:
Catholic War Veterans Park Service Center Building Improvements and
Renovations
City of Mission, 1201 E. 8 th Street, Mission, Texas
Date: February __, 2013
Time:
4:00 p.m.
1. Pursuant to and in compliance with the Invitation to Bid and the proposed Contract
Documents, prepared by Gomez Mendez Saenz, Inc. relating to the above referenced
project, the undersigned, having become thoroughly familiar with the terms and
conditions of the proposed Contract Documents and with local conditions affecting the
performance and costs of the work at the place where the work is to be completed, and
having fully inspected the site in all particulars, hereby proposes and agrees to fully
perform the work within the time stated and in strict accordance with the proposed
Contract Documents, and addenda, thereto, including furnishing of any and all labor and
materials for all General Construction and Site Work, for the following sum of money:
A: BID:
1. All labor, materials, services and equipment, necessary for completion of the
work shown on the drawings and described in the specifications for the
Catholic War Veterans Park Service Center Building Improvements and
Renovations.
_____________________________________DOLLARS ($ )
B. ALTERNATES: N/A
2. If awarded this Contract the undersigned will execute a satisfactory Construction
Contract, Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bond and proof of insurance
coverage, with the Owner for the entire work as per the Contract Documents within 10
days after notice of award. It is agreed that this proposal is subjected to the Owner's
acceptance for a period of Thirty (30) calendar days from the above date.
3. Contractor will require ___________ calendar days to complete the project.
4. Enclosed is a Certified Check or Bidders Bond in the amount of $_______________
in compliance with the specification requirements. (5% of the highest amount bid).
The above check or Bidders Bond is to become the property of the Owner in the event
the Construction Contract (when offered by the Owner) and the bonds and proof of
insurance coverage are not executed within the time set forth above.
5. The undersigned agrees to the following:
A. To furnish all materials as shown and specified in the plans and
specifications.
B. To start work 5 days after notice of award of contract.
C. To work ________ working days per week.
6. The full amount of all allowances as specified in the General Requirements, Division
Bid Proposal Form - 1

1, of the specifications, in the Base Proposal price shown.
7. Receipt is acknowledged of the following addendas:
No. Dated No. Dated
No. Dated No. Dated
No. Dated No. Dated
8. Bidder agrees that the Owner has the right to accept or reject any or all bids and to
waive all informalities.
9. A list of Sub-Contractors and Material Suppliers which are proposed to be used on
this project is included with this proposal in a separate envelope. Upon acceptance of
proposal, substitution of Sub-Contractors or Suppliers listed may be made only with
approval by the Owner.
10. By signing, bidder acknowledges that ALL ALLOWANCES have been included in
the Base Bid.
Respectfully submitted,
_________________________________
CONTRACTOR
(SEAL: - if Bid is by a Corporation)
By: _______________________________
Title: ________________________________
Address:
_______________________________________________________________
Street or Box City State Zip
Telephone ( ) ___________________
Fax: ( ) ___________________
FILL IN APPLICABLE INFORMATION:
A CORPORATION, Chartered in the STATE of
in the State of TEXAS
, authorized to do business
A PARTNERSHIP composed of: __________________________________
AN INDIVIDUAL, operating under the name of: ______________________________
Bid Proposal Form - 2

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
THE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THIS CONTRACT is The American Institute of Architects Standard
Document No. A201, GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION (Fifteenth
Edition ‐ 1997 Edition), hereinafter referred to as the “GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
FOR CONSTRUCTION.”
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to GENERAL CONDITIONS. Where
any Article of GENERAL CONDITIONS is modified or any paragraph, sub‐paragraph or clause thereof
is modified or deleted by these SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, the unaltered provisions of that
Article, paragraph, sub‐paragraph or clause shall remain in effect.
ARTICLE 1 ‐ GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents
Add the following Clause 1.2.1.1 to Subparagraph 1.2.1
1.2.1.1 Should the bidder find discrepancies, omissions or conflicts within the Contract Documents,
or be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify the Architect, who will issue written
addenda to all bidders.
In the event a conflict should occur between Contract Documents which would alter the contract
amount, the most expensive, method, material, number or process shall be included in the
contractors bid.
ARTICLE 2 ‐ OWNER
2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner
Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 and substitute with the following:
“2.2.5 The contractor will be furnished free of charge twenty (20) copies of Drawings and Project
Manuals. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of reproduction, postage and handling.”
2.4 Owner’s Right to Carry Our the Work
Add the following Clause 2.4.1.1 to Subparagraph 2.4.1
"2.4.1.1 If the Contractor continues to neglect the Work and not carry out the Work in accordance
with the Contract documents, then the Owner may, at its discretion, hold him in default and secure
another company to complete the Work. This may only be done after the Contractor has been
given notice of deficiencies in the Work as provided in this article."
ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACTOR
3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor
Add the following Clause 3.2.1.1 to Subparagraph 3.2.1

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 2
“3.2.1.1 In addition to requirements of subparagraph 3.2.1, before starting the Work the Contractor
shall have thoroughly examined the premises and become familiar with the existing conditions
under which the Contractor will be obliged to operate and to have correlated the Contractors’
personal observations and work to be performed with requirements of the Contract Documents,
and shall have included such co‐relations as part of the Work of This Contract.”
3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures
Add the following Clause 3.3.2.1 to Subparagraph 3.3.2
"3.3.2.1 Furthermore, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its trustees
and employees from all losses, claims, obligations or causes of actions of the Contractor's
employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, including legal fees and court costs."
3.4 Labor and Materials
Add the following Clause 3.4.1.1 to Subparagraph 3.4.1:
“3.4.1.1 Contractor shall comply with provisions of Article 5159A, Revised Civil Statutes of Texas
1925, commonly known as the APrevailing Wage Law.”
3.5 Warranty
Add the following Clauses 3.5.1.2, 3.5.1.3, 3.5.1.4 to Subparagraph 3.5.1:
"3.5.1.2 If the call involves an emergency situation, which requires immediate attention, the person
contacted will immediately contact a service technician and dispatch him to the designated
location. This should always be done on the same day the call is received, regardless of the time
the call is received."
"3.5.1.3 In the event of a routine complaint, (this normally would involve things such as noise or
adjustments or repairs that do not affect the heath of people or the condition of the property), the
person receiving the call will dispatch a service technician either that day or the next business day
during normal working hours."
"3.5.1.4 After warranty service, with regard to "after construction ‐ after warranty" service work,
the mechanical, electrical and roofing sub‐contractor will agree to offer service to the Owner,
both during and after the expiration of the warranty, if the Owner does not have the in‐house
expertise nor can it obtain equivalent services for the same price from local service companies. In
other words, the mechanical, electrical and roofing sub‐contractor, will insure that the Owner
receive the required service work, but only if equal service both in expertise and price is not
available from local service companies. However, to insure that the mechanical, electrical and
roofing sub‐contractor’s personnel receive proper instructions regarding this type of service, any
Owner requiring "after warranty" service must advise the mechanical, electrical and roofing
sub‐contractor of such fact in writing prior to expiration of the warranty period."
3.6 Taxes
Add the following Clause 3.6.1.1 to Subparagraph 3.6.1

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 3
"3.6.1.1 The Owner, as an exempt organization, is not required to pay the State Sales Tax. The
materials provided for this project will be EXCEMPT from the Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax
imposed by Chapter 20, Title 122 A, Taxation‐General, Revised Civil Statues of Texas. Contractor
shall obtain instructions for the issuance of an EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE from the local office of
State Comptroller of Public Accounts."
3.9 Superintendent
Add the following Clauses 3.9.1.1, 3.9.1.2 to Subparagraph 3.9.1
"3.9.1.1 The Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its trustees and employees
from all losses, claims, obligations or causes of action arising from the actions of its Superintendent,
including legal fees and court costs."
“3.9.1.2 The superintendent shall be acceptable to the Owner and shall not be changed except with
the approval of the Owner or if the superintendent leaves the employment of the Contractor.”
3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
Add the following Clause 3.12.5.1 to Subparagraph 3.12.5
"3.12.5.1 The Contractor shall submit with each submission written certification from the product
manufacturers that his product contains no asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)."
ARTICLE 4 ‐ ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.2 Architect’s Administration of the Contract
At first line of Subparagraph 4.2.7, change Aapprove” to “review and note exceptions.”
At last sentence of Subparagraph 4.2.7, change Aapproval” to “review”.
4.3 Claims and Disputes
“Delete 4.3.10, 4.3.10.1, 4.3.10.2 in its entirety.”
4.5 Mediation
Add the following Clause 4.5.2.1 to Subparagraph 4.5.2
"4.5.2.1 Rules and notices for arbitration. Any controversies between the Owner and Contractor
not resolved under Article 4.4 shall, if subject to arbitration pursuant to mutual agreement of the
parties under Subparagraph 4.5.1, be decided through rules of arbitration in accordance with the
Construction Industry Arbitration rules of the American Arbitration Association which are in effect
at the time of the dispute. Otherwise, the parties are free to pursue any other remedies available
under the law."
Add the following Clause 4.5.3.1 to Subparagraph 4.5.3
"4.5.3.1 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may not
be enforced in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof."

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 4
4.6 Arbitration
Delete in its entirety.
ARTICLE 6 ‐ CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
6.1 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts
"6.1.4 Subparagraph; Delete in its entirety."
6.2 Mutual Responsibility
"6.2.5 Subparagraph; Delete in its entirety."
ARTICLE 7 ‐ CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.2 Change Orders
Add the following Clause 7.2.1.4 to Subparagraph 7.2.1
7.2.1.4 The contingency Allowance or Betterment Fund is in addition to any cost allowance
provided for under the various sections. Expenditures from the Contingency Allowances must be
made by Change Order issued by the Architect/Engineer and approved by the Owner. Any unused
portion of the contingency Allowance will be deducted from the final payment.
Add the following clauses 7.2.2.1 to Subparagraph 7.2.2
7.2.2.1 In responding to a request for a proposed price for a change in the Work, or in submitting a
claim, the Contractor shall furnish a lump sum proposal supported by a complete breakdown as
described hereafter, indicating the estimated or actual cost to the Contractor for performance of
the changed Work, including the applicable percentage of overhead and profit described hereafter.
Any request for a time extension must be justified and presented in adequate detail, showing that
the proposed change will delay the final Contract Completion Date, to permit evaluation.
.1 The proposal for the adjustment of Work which a Subcontractor directly performs may
contain the following items:
a) Estimated cost, using any discounts to the trades, of the trades, of the materials and
supplies used, which shall be itemized completely to include unit cost quantity and total
cost.
b) Man‐hour costs for labor shall be based on “MEANS FACILITY COST DATA” as published by
R.S. Means Company and current on the date of bid opening of this project. Specifically,
the man‐hours unit shall be determined form the “MEANS FACILITY COST DATA” means
hours column. The actual cost shall then be determined by multiplying the MEANS manhour
rate times the wage rate for that trade as listed in the contract. The Contractor shall
provide the Architect and the Owner a copy of the “MEANS FACILITY COST DATA” current
on the bid date, for use in the evaluation on the Contractor’s Change Proposals.
.2 To the amount of the adjustment of Subcontractor proposal(s) as listed under paragraph

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 5
7.2.2.1.1 above, the Contractor will be allowed to add a percentage of 5% to cover all overhead
expenses and profit, including supervision, small tools, insurance and bond. It is expressly
understood that when the Contractor performs the Work with its own forces and there is no
Subcontractor involved, the Contractor will be allowed the 15% markup described hereinbefore
and the 5% markup is then not applicable. Contractor shall not include profit and overhead on
contingency/betterment fund allowance changes.
7.3 Construction Change Directive
Change Clause 7.3.3.2 to “Unit Prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed
upon which are applied to the quantities of work actually required or work estimated by the
Contractor to be required which are agreed on by the Architect.”
Add the following Clause 7.3.3.5 to Subparagraph 7.3.3
7.3.3.5 “In determining costs under the methods described in Subparagraphs 7.3.3.1 and
7.3.3.4, costs shall be limited to and itemizes into the categories as follows, with applicable
quantities, unit costs and line item totals indicated.
.1 Materials, supplies and equipment, including sales tax an delivery costs, whether
incorporated or consumed.
.2 Wages for workers performing the work (itemized to indicate trade, hourly rates, hours
and line item totals) including unskilled, semi‐skilled, skilled labor and working foremen. Cost of
field supervision and labor for supporting services such as safety provisions, layout, updating of
construction drawings and trash removal, shall be excluded from wages and shall be considered a
part of overhead. Wages shall include cost of social security, old age and unemployment insurance,
fringe benefits required by agreement or custom and workers compensation insurance.
.3 Rental value of equipment required solely for use on the changed work, including
wheeled vehicles and small tools but not including equipment which is used regularly on the job.
.4 Cost of premiums for bonds, premiums for insurance and permit fees relating to the
change.
Delete the last sentence in Subparagraph 7.3.6 and delete Clauses 7.3.6.1 through 7.3.6.5.
At 7.3.6, in the first sentence, change “a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit” to “An
allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.10 and Clauses .1
through.8 below.”
Add the following Subparagraph 7.3.10 through Clause 7.3.10.8.
“7.3.10 The allowance for the combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the
Owner under Clauses 7.3.3.1 and 7.3.3.4, to cover supervision, use of other tools and equipment,
general office and field services, interference with other work, adjustments to progress schedules,
other insurance, financing, other overhead items and profit, shall be based on the following

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 6
schedule.
.1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, 15 percent of
the cost.
.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s Subcontractor, 05 percent
of the amount due the Subcontractor.
.3 For each Subcontractor or Sub‐subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that
Subcontractor’s or Sub‐subcontractor’s own forces, 15 percent of the cost.
.4 For each Subcontractor, for work performed by the Subcontractor’s Sub‐subcontractors,
05 percent of the amount due the Sub‐subcontractor.
.5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with
Clause 7.3.3.5.
.6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except
those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspections, shall be accompanied by a complete
itemization of costs, as referred to in Clause 7.3.3.5 for both Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s
Work.
.7 A change in Contract Time attributed to changes in the Work will be allowed only upon
the Contractor’s submission and the Owner’s approval of written substantiation that the work adds
to or detracts from the time required for the critical path of scheduled progress.
.8 No increased cost for extended Contract Time allowed under conditions described in
Clause 7.3.10.7 will be allowed except for the direct cost of the Work and the Overhead and Profit
applicable to same which are referred to under Clause 7.3.3.5.
Add the following Subparagraph 7.3.11:
“7.3.11 Allow minimum two weeks for the Architect’s review and processing of quotations for cost
increases and credits.”
ARTICLE 8 ‐ TIME
8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time
Please revise Article 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time as follows: Liability ‐ The Owner will Suffer
Monetary and Non‐Monetary Damages if the Project is not Substantially Complete on the date set
forth in the Contract Documents. Contractor (and its Surety) shall be liable for and shall pay the
Owner the sum of One Thousand Dollars ($1,000.00) stipulated as fixed, agreed, and liquidated
damages for each calendar day of delay until the Work is Substantially Complete.
Add the following Subparagraph 8.3.4 to Paragraph 8.3

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 7
8.3.4: In addition to the liquidated damages outlined above, the Contractor and the Contractor’s
Surety, shall be liable for and shall pay to the Owner the sum of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) as
damages for each calendar day after this Project has been substantially complete and the Architect
and M.E.P. punch lists have not been satisfactorily complete. This penalty shall become due only if
those items on the Architect and M.E.P. punch lists have not been satisfactorily corrected within
thirty (30) days of Substantial Acceptance.
The Contractor and the Contractor’s Surety, shall be liable for and shall pay to the Owner the sum
herein stipulated as One Thousand Dollars ($1,000.00) for damages per calendar day if those items
on the Architect and M.E.P. punch lists have not been satisfactorily corrected after forty five days
(45) of Substantial Acceptance.
It is further agreed that the Contractor and the Contractor’s Surety, shall be liable and pay to the
Owner as damages the sum of One Thousand Five Hundred Dollars ($1,500.00) per day if those
items on the Architects and M.E.P. punch lists have not been satisfactorily corrected after sixty (60)
days of Substantial Acceptance, and until they are corrected.
ARTICLE 9 ‐ PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.3 Applications for Payment
At first of Subparagraph 9.3.1 change the following:
"9.3.1 Change ten days to fifteen days so that the paragraph begins "At least fifteen days‐‐‐."
9.3.1 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 9.3.1:
“The form of Application for Payment shall be a notarized original and/or electronic licensed AIA
Document G702, APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT, 1992 Edition. A maximum of ten
(10) photocopy versions with original notaries and signatures may be attached. If using electronic
licensed documents, contractor shall provide upon request AIA Document D401‐ Certification of
Documents Authenticity from the License. Contractor’s own schedule of values used for
continuation sheets may be substituted for G703 if in Form acceptable to Architect.”
Add the following Subparagraphs.
"9.3.4 At each progress payment and Substantial Completion deduct a retainage of five percent (5%
on contracts over $400,000., 10% on contracts under $400,000.) from the amount properly
allocable to completed Work and to materials and equipment suitably stored at the site in
computing the amount of each progress payment."
"9.3.5 The Architect will not issue any Certificate for Payment for any progress payment to the
Contractor subsequent to the required Date of Substantial Completion until a final Certificate of
Substantial Completion is issued."
9.6 Progress Payments
Add the following Clause 9.6.4.1 to Subparagraph 9.6.4

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 8
"9.6.4.1 Further, the Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for all claims, losses,
obligations or causes of action brought against it by any Subcontractor, its agents and employees,
for payments of money concerning labor or services provided on the Project, including legal fees
and court costs. Furthermore, the Contractor will inform all Subcontractors of the existence of the
payment bond attached to this Contract as an exhibit and from which payment to Subcontractors
may be made."
9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment
Add the following Subparagraph 9.10.6 to Paragraph 9.10:
“9.10.6 FINAL PAYMENT shall be due not earlier than THIRTY (30) DAYS following final completion
and issuance of final Certificate for Payment.”
ARTICLE 10 ‐ PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2 Safety of Persons and Property
Add the following Clause 10.2.2.1 to Subparagraph 10.2.2:
“10.2.2.1 The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Public Law 91‐596, 29 U.S.C Secs.
651 et seq., the Occupational Safety and health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and amendments thereto, and
enforce and comply with the provisions of this Act. In addition, on projects in which trench
excavation will exceed a depth of five feet, the Contractor shall comply with requirements of 29
C.F.R. Secs. 1926.652 and 1926.653, OSHA Safety and Health Standards, and shall require a pay
item classification, pursuant to paragraph 7.1, for the particular safety system to be utilized by the
Contractor. Before commencing and trench excavation which will exceed a depth of five feet,
Contractor shall provide Owner with detailed plans and specifications regarding the safety systems
to be utilized. Said plans and specifications shall include a certification from a registered
professional engineer indicating full compliance with the required OSHA provisions.”
ARTICLE 11 ‐ INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance
11.1.1.1 Delete the semicolon at the end of Clause 11.1.1.1. and add:
“, including private entities performing Work at the site and exempt from the coverage on account
of number of employees or occupation, which entities shall maintain voluntary compensation
coverage at the same limits specified for mandatory coverage for the duration of the Project;”
11.1.1.2 Delete the semicolon at the end of Clause 11.1.1.2 and add:
“or persons or entities excluded by statute from the requirements of Clause 11.1.1.1 but required
by the Contract Documents to provide the insurance required by the Clause;”
Add the following Clause 11.1.1.9:

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 9
“11.1.1.9 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive
basis including:
1. Premises Operations (including X, C, and U coverages as applicable).
2. Independent Contractor’s Protective.
3. Products and Completed Operations.
4. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion Deleted.
5. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor’s obligation.
6. Owned, non‐owned and hired motor vehicles.
7. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations.
Add the following Subparagraphs 11.1.4 and 11.1.5 to Paragraph 11.1:
“11.1.4 The Owner and Architect shall be named as “Additional Insured” on all of the policies.
11.1.5 The contractor shall require all Subcontractors and Sub‐subcontractors to carry insurance of
the same type, and with the same limits and provisions, as the Contractor is required to carry
unless specific exception is granted by the Owner.”
11.2 Owner’s Liability Insurance
Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 11.2.1:
“The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance covering the Owner’s contingent liability for
claims which may arise from operators under the Contract.”
11.4 Property Insurance
Delete the following paragraphs:
"11.4.1, 11.4.1.2"
Add the following paragraphs.
"11.4.1 The Contractor is required to purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire
work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance should include the interest of the
Owner, Contractor, subcontractors and should insure against “all‐risk" of direct physical loss. It
shall be a condition of the Contract that the Owner will have the opportunity to review the
insurance policy forms as well as amounts of insurance and deductibles prior to the issuance of the
insurance contract. The contractor will be responsible for the full amount of any deductibles which
are included in the insurance policies and any uninsured casualties. The form used is to be similar
to what is known as the A.L.S. 1967 Form of Contractor's All‐Risk Builder's Risk. There shall be no
exclusion in the policy relating to the exclusion of loss or damage directly or indirectly caused by
fault, defect, error, omission in design, plan or specification or physical damage resulting from
faulty or defective workmanship or material. The Owner shall have the opportunity to reject any
unacceptable insurance proposal and purchase the insurance through their own source at the
Contractor’s expense."
"11.4.1.2 The Contractor is required to carry Commercial General Liability, Business Automobile
Liability and Worker's Compensation including Employer's Liability which, combined with an

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 10
Umbrella Liability Policy, should provide a total limit of liability of not less than $2,000,000 per
occurrence, $2,000,000 aggregate. A certificate of Insurance indicating these limits must be
provided to the Owner prior to the commencement of any work by the Contractor.
The Commercial General Liability Policy should contain the following coverages:
(1) Premises ‐ Operation.
(2) Independent Contractors Liability.
(3) Products and Completed Operations Liability.
(4) Broad Form Property Damage.
(5) Contractual Liability.
(6) Collapse and Underground Hazard Coverage.
(7) Personal Injury With Employee Exclusion Deleted.
(8) The Owner Named as an Additional Insured, except under Workmen's Compensation.
(9) Provide Waivers of Subornation if favor of the Owner on all Worker's Compensation,
Comprehensive Automobile Liability and Builder's Risk Property Insurance.
(10) Personal Injury, Owner's Indemnity and Broad Form Property Damages without the
"XCU” exclusions; and maintain completed Operations Liability for one year after the date
of final acceptance of the work.
1. a. Workmen's Compensation ‐ Statutory
b. Employer’s Liability: $100,000.00
2. Commercial General Liability
a. Bodily & Personal Injury
Each Occurrence $1,000,000.00
Aggregate $1,000,000.00
b. Property Damage
Each Occurrence $1,000,000.00
Aggregate $1,000,000.00
3. Automobile Liability
a. Combined single limit $ 500,000.00
4. Independent Contractors Liability ‐ Same limit as #2 above.
5. Products and completed operations ‐ Same limit as #2 above for two (2) year (s),
commencing with issuance of final certificate of payment.
6. Umbrella Excess Liability ‐ $1,000,000.
a. Self Insured Retention ‐ $ 25,000.
All the above shall be indicated on the Certificate of Insurance. All of the policies should be
endorsed and the Certificate should so indicate that the Owner be given thirty (30) days written
notice of cancellation, non‐renewal or material change in the policies."

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 11
The Contractor is required to submit Proof of Worker's Compensation Coverage using the exact
language as defined in paragraph (7) of subsection (c) of 28 TAC 110, 110.
The Contractor is required to update the owner with an extension of coverage for worker's
compensation coverage, should the coverage period on the current certificate of coverage end
prior to completion of the project.
The Contractor is required to obtain and submit to the Architect a certificate of coverage for each
person providing services of the project, prior to that person beginning work on the project
The Contractor is required to obtain a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage:
a. before the end of the current coverage period, if the contractor's current
certificate of coverage shows that the coverage period ends during the duration of
the project; and
b. no later than seven days after the expiration of the coverage for each other
person providing services on the project whose current certificate shows that the
coverage period ends during the duration of the project.
11.4.3 Delete the second (last) sentence in its entirety.
11.4.4 Delete Subparagraph 11.4.4
Delete Subparagraph 11.4.6 and substitute the following:
“11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss my occur, the Contractor shall file with the Owner the two
certified copies of the policy or policies providing this Property Insurance coverage, each containing
those endorsements specifically related to the Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that
the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has
been given to the Contractor.”
11.4.9 Modify Subparagraph 11.4.9 by substituting “Contractor” for “Owner” each time the latter
word appears.
11.5 Performance Bond and Payment Bond
Add the following clause 11.5.1.1 to Subparagraph 11.5.1
11.5.1.1 ‐ Security: Acceptable security of 5% of the bid and construction security of 100% is
required as per Instructions to Bidders. To be acceptable to the Owner, Bidder's Bond shall be
from a surety listed in Department of the Treasury Department, Circular 570; 2011 Revision; listing
COMPANIES HOLDING CERTIFICATES OF AUTHORITY AS ACCEPTABLE SURETIES ON FEDERAL BONDS
AND AS ACCEPTABLE REINSURING COMPANIES, effective July 1, 2011. A copy of this Federal
Register is on hand in the Architect’s Office and may be inspected upon request.
In the event the listed bonding company is not listed in the latest Dept. Circular 570; 2009 Revision
as an acceptable surety, the following should be supplied:

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 12
The company shall supply a certificate from the State Board of Insurance which states the amount
of the allowed capital and surplus as of the date of the last annual statutory financial statement for
the surety company for the bond for each bidder.
In the event the amount of the bond is in excess of 10% of the surety company's capital and
surplus, the surety company is to provide written certification from the State Board of Insurance
that the surety company has reinsured the portion of the risk that exceeds 10% of the surety
company's capital and surplus with one or more re‐insurers who are duly authorized, accredited, or
trusted to do business in the state. The certification shall further provide that the re‐insurers in
questions are indeed authorized, accredited, and trusted to do business in this state."
.1 The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days
following the date the Agreement is entered into, or if the Work is to be commenced prior thereto
in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of the Work,
submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished.
.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney‐in‐fact who executes the required bonds on
behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.
Add the following Subparagraphs 11.5.3 through 11.5.10
"11.5.3 Contractor is required as a condition precedent to the execution of the Contract to submit a
Performance Bond and a Payment Bond pursuant to Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of
Texas in the amount of 100 percent of the Contract amount. Sample of forms included in Contract
Documents section of these specifications."
"11.5.4 The Sureties shall promptly file a signed copy of the Contract Performance and Payment
Bonds with the County Clerk's office in full compliance with TEXAS LAW, Articles 5160 (TEXAS:
THE MCGREGOR ACT). The Architect shall be notified in writing of compliance with the
requirement and be provided with a copy of the receipt."
"11.5.5 All obligations under this payment bond do not expire until all Subcontractors have been
paid and the Project has received a release of liens from all Subcontractors."
"11.5.6 The Surety providing the bonds required will be subject to the Owner's approval. The
General Contractor shall be required to secure his bonds from surety companies which meet the
approval of the Owner."
"11.5.7 The surety, in guaranteeing faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of labor
and material expenses in connection therewith, shall agree to pay, in event of forfeiture by the
Contractor, all additional expenses of the Owner and the Architect, which arise as the result of
additional administrative and supervisory work, if any, to complete the work of the contract
including travel, daily and man‐hour expenses."
"11.5.8 Bonds shall be in amounts not less than 100% of the Contract sum, for both Performance

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 13
and Payment of Labor and Materials, and shall be executed on forms which meet statutory
requirements of the State of Texas."
"11.5.9 Indemnification of Owner: The Contractor hereby agrees to indemnify, defend and hold
harmless the Owner, its Trustees, employees, and the Architect, from and against all loss and
expense including cost and attorney's fees by reason of liability imposed by law upon the Owner
for damages because of bodily injury, including death at any time arising therefrom, sustained by
any person or persons or on account of damage to property including loss of use thereof, whether
or not caused by or contributed to by said Owner or others."
In addition:
To the fullest extent permitted by law, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER,
ARCHITECT, ENGINEER and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses
and expenses including but not limited to attorney's fees arising out of or resulting from the
performance of the work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to
bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other
than the Work itself), including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in
whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the CONTRACTOR, or a Subcontractor, anyone
directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of
whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified
hereunder.
ARCHITECT, ENGINEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR'S means, methods, techniques,
sequences of procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto,
and ARCHITECT, ENGINEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR'S failure to perform the work
in accordance with the contract documents.
"11.5.10 To the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, Contractor shall and does agree to
indemnify, protect, defend and hold harmless the Owner, Owner's partners, Owner's lenders, if
any, Architect, and each of the aforementioned parties' respective affiliated companies, partners,
successors, assigns, heirs, legal representatives, devisees, trustee, officers, directors shareholders,
employees and agents (collectively, "indemnities") for, form and against all liabilities, claims,
damages, losses, liens, fines penalties, costs, causes of action, suits, judgments and expenses,
(including court costs, attorney fees and costs of investigation), of any nature, kind or description of
any person or entity, directly or indirectly arising out of, caused by, or resulting from (in whole or in
part), (1) the Work performed hereunder, or any part thereof, (2) the Contract, or (3) any act or
omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or
anyone that they control or exercise control over, (collectively, "Liabilities"). The obligations of
Contractor under this indemnification shall apply to Liabilities even if such Liabilities arise from or
are attributed to the concurrent negligence of any indemnities. The only Liabilities with respect of
which Contractor's obligation to indemnify the Indemnities does not apply is with respect to
Liabilities resulting from the sole negligence or willful misconduct of an indemnities. This
indemnification shall not be limited to damages, compensation or benefits payable under insurance
policies, workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employees benefit acts."

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 14
ARTICLE 13 ‐ MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS:
13.1 Governing Law
Add the following Subparagraphs 13.1.2, 13.1.3, 13.1.4, 13.1.5, and 13.1.6 to Paragraph 13.1
"13.1.2 The Contract Documents contain the entire agreement between Contractor and Owner,
and no oral statements or prior written matter not specifically incorporated in the Contract
Documents shall be of any force or effect. The Contract may not be modified except by a written
document executed by both parties."
"13.1.3 The parties hereto hereby agree that venue of any action under the Contract shall be
exclusively in Hidalgo County, Texas, it being understood that the Contract is performable in such
county."
"13.1.4 If any provision of the Contract is held to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable under present
or future laws, such provision shall be fully severable, and the Contract shall be construed and
enforced as if such illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision is not a part thereof, and the
remaining provisions of the Contract shall remain in full force and effect. In lieu of any illegal,
invalid or unenforceable provision of the Contract, there shall be added automatically as a part
thereof, a provision as similar in its terms to such illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision as may
be possible and be legal, valid and enforceable."
"13.1.5 The parties acknowledge that each party and, if it so chooses, its counsel have reviewed
and revised the Contract and that the normal rule of construction to the effect that any ambiguities
are to be resolved against the drafting party shall not be employed in the interpretation of the
Contract or any amendments or exhibits thereto."
"13.1.6 All section headings in the Contract are for convenience of reference only and are not part
of the Contract, and no construction or inference shall be derived therefrom. Wherever required
by the context any gender shall include the other gender, the singular shall include the plural, and
the plural shall include the singular. Each defined term herein may be used in its singular or plural
form whether or not so defined."
13.5 Tests and Inspections
Add the following Clause 13.5.1.1 to Subparagraph 13.5.1
"13.5.1.1 Testing: All costs for testing and air/fluids balancing shall be paid directly by the Owner
through the Testing Allowance. Bidders should include these costs in proposals. Any cost required
for secondary test and balancing where initial results failed to meet specifications shall be paid by
contractor. Items paid by owner include: soil and concrete testing and mechanical fluids balancing
and testing."
Add the following Paragraph 13.8 to Article 13:
13.8 Form of Contract
13.8.1 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR (AIA Doc. A101:

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 8/11 ‐ 15
1997 Edition) will be used as the Contract form on this Project.”
ARTICLE 14 ‐ TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
Add the following Clause 14.2.1.5 to Subparagraph 14.2.1:
"14.2.1.5 If the Owner does not allocate funds for the payment of the Project due to financial
exigencies."

EMPLOYEE RIGHTS
UNDER THE DAVIS-BACON ACT
fOR LABORERS AND MECHANICS
EMPLOYED ON fEDERAL OR fEDERALLY
ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION PROjECTS
THE UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF LABOR WAGE AND HOUR DIVISION
PREVAILING
WAGES
OVERTIME
ENFORCEMENT
APPRENTICES
PROPER PAY
You must be paid not less than the wage rate listed in the Davis-Bacon
Wage Decision posted with this Notice for the work you perform.
You must be paid not less than one and one-half times your basic
rate of pay for all hours worked over 40 in a work week. There are few
exceptions.
Contract payments can be withheld to ensure workers receive wages
and overtime pay due, and liquidated damages may apply if overtime
pay requirements are not met. Davis-Bacon contract clauses allow
contract termination and debarment of contractors from future federal
contracts for up to three years. A contractor who falsifies certified
payroll records or induces wage kickbacks may be subject to civil or
criminal prosecution, fines and/or imprisonment.
Apprentice rates apply only to apprentices properly registered under
approved Federal or State apprenticeship programs.
If you do not receive proper pay, or require further information on the
applicable wages, contact the Contracting Officer listed below:
or contact the U.S. Department of Labor’s Wage and Hour Division.
For additional information:
1-866-4-USWAGE
(1-866-487-9243) TTY: 1-877-889-5627
WWW.WAGEHOUR.DOL.GOV
U.S. Department of Labor Employment Standards Administration Wage and Hour Division
WH 1321(Revised April 2009)

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK:
1.1 Location: The project site for Catholic War Veterans Park Service Center
Building Improvements and Renovations is located at 115 S. Mayberry Road in
Mission, Texas.
1.2 Approval of Working Surfaces: Any contractor performing work over the work of
other contractors shall notify the Architect of any unsatisfactory condition.
Beginning of work by any contractor shall constitute the acceptance of the
previous work.
1.3 Checking Dimensions at Site: Before ordering any materials or doing any work,
verify all measurements of the building and be responsible for the correctness of
them. No extras will be allowed for variations from drawings in existing
conditions or for work performed under this contract. Any discrepancies found
shall be submitted to the Architect for instruction before proceeding. The Section
shall be enforced diligently.
1.4 Cutting & Patching: No excessive cutting will be permitted, nor shall any
structural members be cut without the approval of the Architect. Each contractor
shall leave all chases and openings straight, true and of the proper size in his
work as may be necessary for the proper installation of his and/or other
contractor's work. After such work has been installed, he shall carefully fit
around, close up, repair, patch and point up same as directed, to the entire
satisfaction of the Architect.
1.5 Cooperation: The General Contractor, all other contractors and all subcontractors
shall coordinate their work with all adjacent work and shall cooperate
with all other trades so as to facilitate the general progress of the work. Each
trade shall afford all other trades every reasonable opportunity for installation of
their work and storage of their materials.
1.6 Project Logbook: The project superintendent shall maintain a daily project
logbook, indicating which sub-contractors were on the job, time of arrival, and the
number of workers. Statements as to the daily progress shall be logged. This
log book shall be made available to the Architect and shall be kept at the job site
office.
1.7 Inspection and Tests: Architect and his representative shall at all times have
access to the work whether it is in preparation or progress. Provide proper and
safe facilities for such access and inspection. Make all inspections and test in
connection with this entire contract as required by the Architect. All material
testing shall be paid for by the Testing Allowance and be done by an
independent testing laboratory meeting the approval of the architect.
1.8 Security: Provide security fencing in all work areas. See Temporary Facilities.
2. ALLOWANCES:
See Paragraph 4.8 of the General Conditions.
2.1 Testing Allowance: A recognized, independent material testing laboratory,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1

selected by the Architect shall perform the necessary material testing services.
Only material testing costs shall be borne by this TESTING ALLOWANCE. Any
cost of retesting required due to failure of original tests to meet requirements
standard shall be borne by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. The
General Contractor is expected to furnish invoices for work preformed to the
Architect with every application and certificate for payment. Failure to do so, the
General Contractor will not receive payment for the month submitted.
TESTING ALLOWANCE: $5,000.00
2.2 Betterment Allowance: Include the sum set forth below as a Betterment
Allowance which will, if needed, be expended on Betterment to the Project, as
directed in writing by approved change orders;
BETTERMENT ALLOWANCE: $10,000.00
SECTION 0110 - BID SCHEDULE
1. BID SCHEDULE: All proposals and alternate bid items shall be subject to the
General and Special Conditions and all other related sections of the specifications and
requirements of the drawings. The Owner shall have the right to accept or reject any or
all alternates.
1.1 BASE BID: The Contractor shall state on the General Contract Bid Proposal
under the Base Bid, the amount for all work, complete in all respects in
accordance with plans and specifications, to construct Catholic War Veterans
Park Service Center Building Improvements and Renovations. The scope of
work is defined in the plans and specifications.
1.2 ALTERNATES: The Contractor shall state on his Bid Form, under each Alternate
the amount to add to his bid to perform all work, complete in all respects, in
accordance with the plans and specifications to construct work required by the
Alternates.
N/A
SECTION 0120 - AS BUILT DRAWINGS:
As the work proceeds, keep careful records of piping, electrical circuits, duct work and
other concealed work whose installed location varies from that shown on plans. Furnish
the Architect with one marked up set before final.
SECTION 0130 - REPORTS:
The Contractor will provide a written report to the Architect after each inspection
conducted by the City Inspectors concerning their findings.
SECTION 0140 - QUANTITIES & WARRANTIES:
All guarantees and warranties expressed or implied shall be provided to the Architect in
written form prior to final payment.
SECTION 0150 - PICTURES:
The Contractor will provide the Architect with sequence photographs showing the
flashing in place prior to application of roof. This is MANDATORY. Close-ups of all
flashing are required.
SECTION 0160 - CERTIFICATION OF CONSTRUCTION:
The building contractor or construction manager shall certify in writing that the facility
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3

has been constructed in accordance to the construction documents and its
specifications.
SECTION 0170 - CERTIFICATION OF NON-USE OF ASBESTOS PRODUCTS
The General Contractor shall provide the Architect with written certification letters from
all sub-contractors and suppliers that no asbestos products shall be use on this project.
SECTION 0180 - SCOPE AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
1.1 General:
Time extensions shall be submitted for review on a monthly basis.
The successful bidder shall under no circumstances leave this project unsecured or
unprotected at any time during construction. The General Contractor is to refer to
Section 01505 Temporary Facilities for any and all requirements required by this project.
The General Contractor to provide all necessary precautions and safeguards during
construction for protection of any visitor whom might visit the project site. The General
Contractor shall provide in a neat format project monthly reports with photos showing
progress of construction for their review.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3

SECTION 01340 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:
The types of submittal requirements for specified in this section including shop drawings,
product data, samples and miscellaneous work related Submittals. Individual submittal
requirements are specified in applicable sections for each unit of work. Refer to other
Division 1 sections and other contract documents for requirements of administrative
Submittals.
Definitions: Work related Submittals of this section are categorized for convenience as
follows:
Shop drawings include specially prepared technical data for this project including
drawings, diagrams; performance curves data sheets schedules, templates,
patterns, reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and similar
information not in standard printed form for general application to a range of
similar projects.
Product data includes standard printed information on manufactured products
that has not been specially prepared for this project, other than the designation of
selections from among available choices printed therein.
Samples include both fabricated and un-fabricated physical examples of
materials, products and units of work; both as complete units and as smaller
portions of units of work; either for limited visual inspection or (where indicated)
for more detailed testing and analysis.
Mock ups are special forms of samples, which are too large or otherwise
inconvenient for handling in the manner specified for transmittal of sample
Submittals.
Miscellaneous Submittals related directly to the work (non administrative) include
warranties, maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, project photographs,
survey data and reports, physical work records quality testing and certification
reports, copies of industry standards, record drawings, field measurement data,
operating and maintenance manuals, overrun stock, and similar information,
devices and materials applicable to the work and not processed as shop
drawings, product data or samples.
GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:
Scheduling: Where appropriate in administrative submittals, (listing of products,
manufacturers, suppliers and sub-contractors, and in job progress schedule), show
principal work related submittals and time requirements for coordination of submittal
activity with related work in each instance.
SUBMITTALS 01340 - 1

Listing: Prepare a separate listing; organized by related specification section number
sequence, showing principal work related submittals and their initial submittal dates as
required for coordination of the work. Submit listing within 45 days of date of
commencement of the work.
Coordination and Sequencing: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with
the performance of the work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate
and sequence different categories of submittals for same work, and for interfacing units
of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination of A/E's review with another.
Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify
project, date, Contractor, subcontractor, Submittal name, and similar information to
distinguish it from other submittals. Show Contractor’s executed review and approval
markings and provide space for the Architect/Engineer's "Action" marking. Package each
submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals which are received from
sources other than through Contractor's office will be returned by A/E "without action".
SPECIFIC CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:
General: Except as otherwise indicated in the individual work sections, comply with the
requirements specified herein for each indicated category of submittal. Provide and
process intermediate submittals, where required between initial and final, similar to initial
submittals.
Shop Drawings: Provide newly prepared information, on reproducible sheets, with
graphic information at accurate scale (except as otherwise indicated), with name of
preparer indicated (firm name). Show dimensions and not which are based on field
measurement. Identify materials and products in the work shown. Indicate compliance
with standards and special coordination requirements. Do not allow shop drawing copies
without appropriate final "Action” markings by the Architect/Engineer to be used in
connection with the work.
Initial Submittal: Provide one correctable translucent reproducible print and five blue line
or black line prints: the reproducible will be returned.
Product Data: Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system;
and mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to project.
Include manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use,
compliance with standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field
measurements which have been checked, and special coordination requirements.
Maintain one set of product data (for each submittal) at project site, available for
reference by Architect/Engineer and others.
Submittals: Do not submit product data, or allow its use on the project, until compliance
with requirements of contract documents has been confirmed by Contractor. Submittal is
for information and record, unless otherwise indicated.
Initial submittal is final submittal unless returned promptly by Architect/Engineer, marked
with an "Action” which indicates an observed non-compliance. Submit 3 copies plus 3
additional copies (which will be returned) where required for maintenance manuals.
Samples: Provide units identical with final condition of proposed materials or products for
SUBMITTALS 01340 - 2

the work. Include "range" samples (not less than 3 units) where unavoidable variations
must be expected, and described or identify variations between units of each set.
Provide full set of optional samples where Architect's/Engineer's selection is required.
Prepare samples to match Architect's/Engineer's sample where so indicated. Include
information with each sample to show generic description, source or product name and
manufacturer, limitations, and compliance with standards. Samples are submitted for
review and confirmation of color, pattern, texture and "kind" by Architect/Engineer.
Architect/Engineer will not "test" samples (except as otherwise indicated) for compliance
with other requirements, which are therefore the exclusive responsibility of Contractor.
Submittal: Provide a single set of samples for
Architect's/Engineer's review and "Action".
Mock Ups and similar samples specified in individual work sections recognized as a
special type of sample. Comply with requirements for "samples" to greatest extent
possible, and process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.
Inspection and Test Reports: Classify each as either "shop drawings" or "product data"
depending upon whether report is uniquely prepared for project, or a standard
publication of workmanship control testing at point of production and process
accordingly.
Warranties: Refer to "Products" section for specific general requirements on warranties,
product/workmanship bonds and maintenance agreements. In addition to copies desired
for the Contractor's use, furnish 2 executed copies except furnish 2 additional
(conformed) copies where required for maintenance manuals.
Closeout Submittals: Refer to section "closeout" and to individual work sections for
specific requirements on submittal of closeout information, materials, tools, and similar
items.
Record Documents Copies: Furnish one set.
Operating and Maintenance Data: Furnish 2 bound copies.
Materials and Tools: Refer to individual work sections of for required quantities of spare
parts, extra and overrun stock, maintenance tools and devices, keys, and similar
physical units to be submitted.
General Distribution: Provide additional distribution of submittals (not included in
foregoing copy submittal requirements) to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,
installers, governing authorities, and others as necessary for the proper performance of
the work. Include such additional copies in transmittal to the Architect/Engineer where
the submittals are required to receive "Action” marking before final distribution. Record
submittal distributions on transmittal forms.
ACTION ON SUBMITTALS
Architect/Engineer's Action: Where action and return is required or requested, the
Architect/Engineer will review each submittal, mark with “Action", and where possible
return within 2 weeks of receipt.
SUBMITTALS 01340 - 3

Where the submittal must be held for coordination, Contractor will be so advised by A/E
without delay.
Final Unrestricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with the contract
documents, when submittal is returned with the following:
Marking: "Accepted".
Marking: "Approved".
Final But Restricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with notations
and corrections on submittal and with contract documents, when submittal is returned
with the following:
Marking: "Accepted as Noted".
Marking: "Approved as Noted".
Returned for Resubmittal: Do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance
with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain a different action marking.
Do not allow submittals with the following marking (or unmarked submittals where a
marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the work:
Marking: "Not Accepted, Resubmit".
Marking: "Disapproved, Resubmit".
Other Action: Where the submittal is returned, for other reasons, with
Architect/Engineer's explanation included, it will be marked as follows:
Marking: "Action Not Required".
Marking: "No Action".
Action Stamp: Architect's/Engineer's action stamp, for use on submittals to be returned
to Contractor, is self explanatory as marked.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable).
END OF SECTION 01340
SUBMITTALS 01340 - 4

SECTION 01505 - -TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:
Definitions: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this
section, as extensions of provisions in General Conditions and other contract
documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated.
Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work
required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as an indication by
Architect or Engineer that such temporary activity is not required for successful
completion of the work and compliance with requirements of contract documents.
Provisions of this section are applicable to, but not by way of limitation, utility services,
construction facilities, support facilities, security/protection provisions, and support
facilities.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
General: In addition to compliance with governing regulations and rules/recommendation
of franchised utility companies, comply with specific requirements indicated and with
applicable local industry standards for construction work (published recommendations by
local consensus "building councils").
ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI Al Series standards on
construction safety, including A.10.3, A.10.4, A10.5, A10.6, A10.7, A10.8, A10.9,
A10.10, A10.11, A10.12, A10.13, A10.14, A10.15, A10.17, A10.18, A10.20, and A10.22.
NFPA Code" Comply with NFPA Code 241 "Building Construction and Demolition
Operations."
JOB CONDITIONS:
General: Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably
required for proper performance of the work. Terminate use and remove facilities at
earliest reasonable time, when no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with
authorized use, replaced the need.
Conditions of Use: Install, operate, maintain and protect temporary facilities in a manner
and at locations which will be safe, non hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons
and property, and free of deleterious effects.
PART 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION
TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES:
The types of services required include, but not by way of limitation, water, sewerage,
surface drainage, electrical power and telephones. Where possible and reasonable,
connect to existing franchised utilities for required services; and comply with service
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01505 - 1

companies' recommendations on materials and methods, or engage service companies
to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference
with construction operations.
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES:
The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but not by way of
limitation, water distribution, drainage, enclosure of work, heat, ventilation, electrical
power distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities, stairs, ladders, and roads. Provide facilities
reasonably required to perform construction operations properly and adequately.
Water Distribution: Provide hose lengths sufficient to reach entire area of construction
work, not less than 3/4" hose size. Prevent freezing of water distribution by either prompt
drainage after each use, or by suitable protection.
Electrical Power: Provide weatherproof, grounded, power distribution system sufficient to
accommodate construction operations requiring power, use of power tools, electrical
heating, lighting, and start up testing of permanent electric powered equipment prior to
its permanent connection to electrical system. Provide overload protection. Locate
multiple outlets (not less than 4 gang boxes) at each story of construction, spaced so
that entire area of construction can be reached by power tools on a single extension
cord of 100' maximum length.
Supply power for electric welding, if any, from either temporary power distribution
system or by engine driven power generator sets, at Contractor's option.
Lighting: Provide sufficient temporary lighting to ensure proper workmanship
everywhere; by combined use of daylight, general lighting, and portable plug in task
lighting. Provide general lighting with local switching which will enable energy
conservation during periods of varying activity (work in progress, traffic only security
check, lock up, etc.).
Provide uniformly spaced general lighting equivalent to not less than one 200
watt incandescent lamp per 1000 sq. ft. of floor area, and one 100 watt lamp per
50' of corridor and per flight of stairs.
Access Provisions: Provide ramps, stairs, ladders and similar temporary access
elements as reasonably required to perform the work and facilitate its inspection during
installation. Comply with reasonable requests of governing authorities performing
inspections. When permanent stairs are available for access during construction, cover
finished surfaces with sufficient protection to ensure freedom from damage and
deterioration at time of substantial completion.
SECURITY/PROTECTION PROVISION:
The types of temporary security and protection provision required include, but not by
way of limitation, fire protection, barricades, fencing (wire), warning signs/lights, and
similar provision intended to minimize property losses, personal injuries and claims for
damages at project site.
Fire Extinguishers: Provide types, sizes, numbers and locations as would be reasonably
effective in extinguishing fires during early stages, by personnel at project site. Provide
Type A extinguishers at locations of low potential for either electrical or grease oil
flammable liquids fires; provide Type ABC dry chemical extinguishers at other locations;
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01505 - 2

comply with recommendations of NFPA No. 10. Post warning and quick instructions at
each extinguisher location, and instruct proper use of extinguishers and other available
facilities at project site. Post local fire department call number on each telephone
instrument at project site.
Permanent Fire Protection: Complete each fire protection facility at earliest
reasonable date, make ready for emergency use, and instruct personnel at site
on availability and proper use.
Building Enclosure and Lockup: At earliest possible date, secure building against
unauthorized entrance at times when personnel are not working.
TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES:
The types of temporary support facilities required include, but not by way of limitation,
field offices, storage sheds, fabrication sheds, sanitary facilities, drinking water, first aid
facilities, bulletin board, private telephones, project identification signs, clean up
facilities, waste disposal service, and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may
be reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation of
personnel at the site including Owner's and Architect's/Engineer's personnel.
Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of
permanent work of the project, only when and in manner authorized by
Architect/Engineer; and, if not otherwise indicated, immediately before time of
substantial completion. Locate temporary support facilities for convenience of users, and
for minimum interference with construction activities.
Contractor's Field Offices: Provide adequate office space for field office personnel plus
one spare work station for incidental use by subcontractor's personnel, suitably finished,
furnished, equipped and conditioned.
Sanitary Facilities: At contractor's option, provide either piped (wet) toilets facilities or
self contained toilet units of type acceptable to governing authorities, adequate (at all
stages of construction) for use of personnel at job site. Provide separate facilities for
male and female personnel when both sexes are working (in any capacity) at project
site.
Project Identification Sign: At locations(s) shown on site plans provide project
identification sign complying with sketch/data sheet included at end of this section.
Engage an experienced sign painter to paint graphics on sign as indicated. Construct
sign of treated wood framing and posts, and 3/4" plywood panels of exterior type Grade
B C sanded 2 sides.
END OF SECTION 01505
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01505 - 3

SECTION 01605 - PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:
Definitions: "Products" is defined to include purchased items for incorporation into the
work, regardless of whether specifically purchased for project or taken from Contractor's
stock of previously purchased products. "Materials", is defined as products which must
be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated,
processed, installed or applied to form units of work. "Equipment" is defined as products
with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and
particularly including products with service connections (wiring, piping, etc.). Definitions
in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in contract
documents, including "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories,"
"furnishings," "special construction,” and similar terms, which are self explanatory and
have recognized meanings in the construction industry.
Substitutions: The requirements for substitutions do not apply to specified Contractor
options on products and construction methods. Revisions to contract documents, where
requested by Owner, Architect or Engineer, are "changes" not "substitutions."
Substitutions requested during bidding period, which have been accepted prior to
Contract Date, are included in contract documents and are not subject to requirements
for substitutions as specified herein. Contractor's determination of an compliance with
governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities do not constitute
"substitutions;" and do not constitute a basis for change orders, except as provided for in
contract documents. Otherwise, Contractor's requests for changes in products,
materials and methods of construction required by contract documents are considered
requests for "substitutions," and are subject to requirements hereof.
Standards: Refer to Division 1 section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability of
industry standards to products of project, and for acronyms used in text of specification
sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible, for each unit of work, provide
products, materials or equipment of a singular generic kind and from a single source.
Compatibility of Options: Where more than one choice is available as options for
Contractor's selection of a product or material, select an option which is compatible with
other products and materials already selected (which may have been from among
options for those other products and materials). Total compatibility among options is not
assured by limitations within contract documents, but must be provided by Contractor.
Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product/material selections.
SUBMITTALS:
Requests for Substitutions: Submit 3 copies, fully identified for product or method being
PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01605 -1

eplaced by substitution, including related specification section and drawing number(s),
and fully documented to show compliance with requirements for substitutions. Include
product data/drawings, description of methods, samples where applicable, Contractor's
detailed comparison of significant qualities between specified item and proposed
substitution, statement of effect on construction time and coordination with other affected
work, cost information or proposal, and Contractor's statement to the effect that
proposed substitution will result in overall work equal to or better than work originally
indicated.
PRODUCT DELIVER STORAGE HANDLING:
General: Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration,
and loss including theft. Control delivery schedules to minimize long term storage of
products at site and overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular, provide
delivery/installation coordination to ensure minimum holding or storage times for
products recognized to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to
deterioration, theft and other sources of loss.
WARRANTIES (GUARANTEES):
Categories of Specific Warranties: Warranties on the work are in several categories,
including those of General Conditions, and including (but not necessarily limited to) the
following specific categories related to individual units of work specified in sections of
Divisions 2 through 16 of these specifications:
Special Project Warranty (Guarantee): A warranty specifically written and signed by
Contractor for a defined portion of the work; and, where required, countersigned by
subcontractor, installer, manufacturer or other entity engaged by Contractor.
Specified Product Warranty: A warranty which is required by contract documents, to be
provided for a manufactured product incorporated into the work; regardless of whether
manufacturer has published a similar warranty without regard for specific incorporation
of a product into the work, or has written and executed a special product warranty as a
direct result of contract document requirements.
Coincidental Product Warranty: A warranty which is not specifically required by contract
documents (other than as specified in this Section); but which is available on a product
incorporated into the work, by virtue of the fact that manufacturer of product has
published warranty in connection with purchases and uses of product without regard for
specific applications except as otherwise limited by terms of warranty.
Refer to individual sections of Divisions 2 through 16 for the determination of units of
work which are required to be specifically or individually warranted, and for the specific
requirements and terms of those warranties (or guarantees).
General Limitations: It is recognized that specific warranties are intended primarily to
protect Owner against failure of the work to perform as required, and against deficient,
defective and faulty materials and workmanship, regardless of sources. Except as
otherwise indicated, specific warranties do not cover failures in the work which result
from: 1.) Unusual and abnormal phenomena of the elements, 2.) The Owner's misuse,
maltreatment or improper maintenance of the work, 3.) Vandalism after time of
substantial completion, or 4.) Insurrection or acts of aggression including war.
PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01605 -2

Related Damages and Losses: In connection with Contractor's correction of warranted
work which has failed, remove and replace other work of project which has been
damaged as a result of such failure, or must be removed and replaced to provide access
for correction of warranted work.
Consequential Damages: Except as otherwise indicated or required by governing
regulation, special project warranties and product warranties are not extended to cover
damage to building contents (other than work of Contract) which occurs as a result of
failure of warranted work.
Reinstatement of Warranty Period: Except as otherwise indicated, when work covered
by a special project warranty or product warranty has failed and has been corrected by
replacement or restoration, reinstate warranty by written endorsement for the following
time period, starting on date of acceptance of replaced or restored work.
A period of time is equal to original warranty period of time.
Replacement Cost, Obligations: Except as otherwise indicated, costs of replacing or
restoring failing warranted units or products is Contractor's obligation, without regard for
whether Owner has already benefited from use through a portion of anticipated useful
service lives.
Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right, at time of substantial completion or
thereafter, to reject coincidental product warranties submitted by Contractor, which in
opinion of Owner tend to detract from or confuse interpretation of requirements of
contract documents.
Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others
to purchase or sub subcontract for materials or units of work for materials or units of
work for project where a special project warranty, specified product warranty,
certification or similar commitment is required, until it has been determined that entities
required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
Specific Warranty Forms: Where a special project warranty (guarantee) or specified
project warranty is required, prepare a written document to contain terms and
appropriate identification, ready for execution by required parties. Submit draft to Owner
(through Architect/Engineer) for approval prior to final executions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
GENERAL PRODUCT COMPLIANCES:
General: The compliance requirements, for individual products as indicated in contract
documents, are multiple in nature and may include generic, descriptive, proprietary,
performance, prescriptive, compliance with standards, compliance with codes,
conformance with graphic details and other similar forms and methods of indicating
requirements, all of which must be complied with. Also "allowances" and similar
provisions of contract documents will have a bearing on selection process.
Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options for selecting products
are limited by contract document requirements, and governing regulations, and
are not controlled by industry and governing regulations, and are not controlled
PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01605-3

y industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous
construction projects.
Required procedures include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following for various
indicated methods of specifying:
Single Product/Manufacturer Name: Provide product indicated, except advice
Architect/Engineer before proceeding, where known that named product is not a feasible
or acceptable selection.
Two or More Product/Manufacturer Names: Provide one of the named products, at
Contractor's option; but excluding products which do not comply with requirements. Do
not provide or offer to provide an unnamed product, except where none of named
products comply with requirements or are a feasible selection; advise Architect/Engineer
before proceeding.
"Or Equal": Where named products in specifications text are accompanied by the term
"or equal", or other language of similar effect, comply with those contract document
provisions concerning "substitutions" for obtaining Architect/Engineer's approval (by
change order) to provide an unnamed product. This product must meet or exceed the
original specified product specifications.
"Named", except as otherwise indicated, is defined to mean manufacturer's name for
product, as recorded in published product literature, of latest issue as of date of contract
documents. Refer requests to use products of a later (or earlier) model to
Architect/Engineer's for acceptance before proceeding.
Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where only compliance with an imposed standard,
code or regulation is required, selection from among products which comply with
requirements including those standards, codes and regulations, is Contractor's option.
Performance Requirements: Provide products which comply with specific performances
indicated, and which are recommended by manufacturer (in published product literature
or by individual certification) for application indicated. Overall performance of a product
is implied where product is specified with only certain specific performance
requirements.
Prescriptive Requirements: Provide products which have been produced in accordance
with prescriptive requirements, using specified ingredients and components, and
complying with specified requirements for mixing, fabricating, curing, finishing, testing
and similar operations in manufacturing process.
SUBSTITUTIONS:
Conditions: Contractor's request for substitution will be received and considered when
extensive revisions to contract documents are not required and changes are in keeping
with general intent of contract documents; when timely, fully documented and properly
submitted; and when one or more of following conditions is satisfied, all as judged by
Architect/Engineer. Otherwise, requests will be returned without action except to record
non compliance with these requirements.
Where required product, material or method cannot be provided in a manner which is
compatible with other materials of the work, or cannot be properly coordinated therewith,
or cannot be warranted as required, or cannot be used without adversely affecting
Owner's insurance coverage on completed work, or will encounter other substantial non
compliance which are not possible to otherwise overcome except by making requested
PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01605-4

substitution, which Contractor thereby certifies to overcome such non compatibility, non
coordination, non warranty, non insurability or other non compliance as claimed.
Work Related Submittals: Contractor's submittal of (and Architect/Engineer's
acceptance of) shop drawings, product data or samples which relate to work not
complying with requirements of contract documents, does not constitute an acceptable
or valid request for a substitution, nor approval thereof.
GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS:
General: Provide products which comply with requirements, and which are undamaged
and unused at time of installation, and which are complete with accessories, trim, finish,
safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for
intended use and effect.
Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types which have
been produced and used previously and successfully on other projects and in similar
applications.
Nameplates: Except as otherwise indicated for required approval labels, and operating
data, do not permanently attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or
trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view either in
occupied spaces or on exterior of the work.
Labels: Locate required labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required
for observation after installation, on an accessible surface which, in occupied spaces, is
not conspicuous.
Equipment Nameplates: Provide permanent nameplate on each item of service
connected or poser operated equipment. Indicate manufacturer, product name, model
number, serial number, capacity, speed, ratings and similar essential operating data.
Locate nameplates on an easily accessed surface which, in occupied spaces, is not
conspicuous.
PART 3 EXECUTION (not applicable)
END OF SECTION 01605
PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01605 -5

SECTION 01705 - PROJECT CLOSEOUTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:
Definitions: Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near the end of
the Contract Time, in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination
of contract, occupancy by Owner and similar actions evidencing completion of the work.
Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Divisions 2
through 16. Time of closeout is directly related to “Substantial Completion", and
therefore may be either a single time period for entire work which have been certified as
substantially complete at different dates. That time variation (if any) shall be applicable
to other provisions of this section.
PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
General: Prior to requesting the Architect/Engineer's inspection for certification of
substantial completion, (for either the entire work or for portions thereof), complete the
following and list known exceptions in the request:
Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements,
final certifications and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner’s full, unrestricted use of the work and
access to services and utilities (where required), include occupancy permits, operating
certificates, and similar releases.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to the
Owner.
Make final changeover of locks and transmit the keys to the Owner, and advise the
Owner's personnel of change over in security provisions.
Complete start up testing of systems, and instructions of the Owner’s operating and
maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities and
services from the project site, along with construction tools and facilities, mock ups, and
similar elements.
Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touch up of painting of marred
surfaces.
Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of the Contractor's request Architect/Engineer will
either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfilled prerequisites. Following
the initial inspection, the Architect/Engineer will either prepare the certificate of
substantial completion, or will advise the Contractor of work which must be performed
prior to the issuance of certificate; and repeat the inspection when requested and when
assured that the work has been substantially completed. Results of the completed
PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01705 - 1

inspection will form the initial "punch list" for final acceptance.
PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE:
General: Prior to requesting Architect/Engineer's final inspection for certification of final
acceptance, and final payment, as required by the General Conditions, complete the
following and list known exceptions, (if any), in request.
Submit the final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not
previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and
completed operations where required.
Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the
Contract Sum.
Submit certified copy of the Architect/Engineer’s final punch list of itemized work to be
completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise
resolved for acceptance and has been endorsed and dated by the Architect.
Submit consent of surety.
Re-inspection Procedure: Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice that the work has been
completed, including punch list items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting
incomplete, items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, the Architect/Engineer
will re-inspect the work.
Upon completion of re-inspection, the Architect/Engineer will either prepare a certificate
of final acceptance, or will advise the Contractor of work that is incomplete or obligations
not fulfilled, as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated.
RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS:
General: Specific requirements for record documents are indicated in individual sections
of these specifications. Other requirements are indicated in the General Conditions.
General submittal requirements are indicated in the "Submittals" sections. Do not use
record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a
secure, fire resistive location; provide access to record documents for
Architect/Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
Record Drawings: Maintain a white print set (blue line or white prints of contract
drawings and shop drawings in a clean, undamaged condition with mark up of actual
installations which vary substantially from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever
drawing is most capable of showing the actual "field" condition fully and accurately;
however, where shop drawings are used for mark up, record a cross reference at the
corresponding location on the working drawings. Mark with red erasable pencil and,
where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories
of work. Mark up new information which is recognized to be of importance to Owner, but
was for some reason not shown on either contract drawings or shop drawings. Give
particular attention to concealed work that would be difficult to measure and record at a
later date. Note related change order numbers where applicable. Organize record
drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print
suitable titles, dates and other identification on cover of each set.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01705 - 2

Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of specifications, including addenda, change
orders and similar modifications issued in printed form during construction, and mark up
variations (of substance) in the actual work in comparison with the text of the
specifications and modifications as issued. Give particular attention to substitutions,
selection of options and similar information on work where it is concealed or cannot
otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related record
drawing information and product data, where applicable. Upon completion of mark up,
submit to Architect/Engineer for Owner’s records.
Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each product data submittal, and mark up
significant variations in actual work in performed in comparison with the submitted
information. Include both variations in product as delivered to site, and variations from
the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. Give particular
attention to concealed products and portions of the work which cannot otherwise be
readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related change orders and
mark up of record drawings and specifications. Upon completion of mark up, submit
complete set to Architect/Engineer for the Owners' records.
Record Sample Submittal: Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, the
Architect/Engineer (and including Owner's personnel where desired) will meet with
Contractor at site, and will determine which (if any) of submitted samples maintained by
Contractor during progress of the work, are to be transmitted to the Owner for record
purposes. Comply with Architect/Engineer's instruction for packaging, identification
marking, and delivery to the Owner's sample storage area.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other sections of these specifications for
requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with the
actual performance of the work. Immediately prior to the date(s) of substantial
completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified
and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the
Architect/Engineer for the Owner's records.
Maintenance Manuals: Organize maintenance and operating manual information into
suitable sets of manageable size, and bind into individual binders properly identified and
indexed (thumb tabbed). Include emergency instructions, spare parts listing, copies of
warranties, wiring diagrams, recommended "turn around" cycles, inspection procedures,
shop drawings, product data, and similar applicable information. Bind each manual of
each set of data in a heavy duty 2", 3 ring vinyl covered binder, and include pocket
folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on both front and spine of each
binder.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (not applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES:
General Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of work
requiring continuing maintenance or operation, to meet with Owner's personnel, at the
project site, to provide basic instruction needed for proper operation and maintenance of
the entire work. Include instructions by the manufacturer's representatives where
PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01705 - 3

installers are not experts in the required procedures. Review maintenance manuals,
record documentation, tools, spare parts and materials, lubricants, fuels identification
system, control sequences, hazards, cleaning and similar procedures and facilities. For
operational equipment, demonstrate start up, shut down, emergency operations, noise
and vibration adjustments, safety, economy and efficiency adjustments energy
effectiveness, and similar operations. Review maintenance and operations in relation
with applicable warranties, agreements to maintain, bonds and similar continuing
commitments.
FINAL CLEANING:
General: Special cleaning for specific units of work is specified in sections of Divisions 2
through 16. General cleaning during the progress of the work is specified in General
Conditions and as "Temporary Facilities” section of this Division. Provide final cleaning
of the work, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning each surface or unit of work to
normal “clean" condition expected for a first class building cleaning and maintenance
program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operations. The following
are examples but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels required.
Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished
condition, removing substances which are noticeable as vision obscuring materials.
Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surface finishes to a dirt free condition, free of
dust, stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as other-wise
indicated, avoid disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surface. Restore reflective
surfaces to their original reflective condition.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean, including elevator
equipment and similar equipment; remove excess lubrication and other substances.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces.
Clean concrete floors in non occupied spaces broom clean.
Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting
from water exposure.
Clean food service equipment to a condition of sanitation ready and acceptable for
intended food service use.
Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency.
Clean project site (yard and grounds), including landscape development areas, of litter
and foreign substances.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01705 - 4

Sweep paved areas to a broom clean condition; remove stains, petro chemical spills and
other foreign deposits. Rake ground which are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth,
even textured surface.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection of project
and to rid project of rodents, insects, and other pests.
Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by the
Architect/Engineer, remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were
installed during the course of the work to protect previously completed work during the
remainder of the construction period.
Compliance: Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning
operations. Do not burn waste materials at the site. Do not bury debris or excess
materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile or other harmful or
dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from site and
dispose of in a lawful manner.
Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have
become Owner’s property, dispose of these materials to the Owner's best advantage as
directed.
END OF SECTION 01705
PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01705 - 5

SECTION 02060 - DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL:
SUBMITTALS:
The procedures proposed for the accomplishment of salvage and demolition work shall be
submitted for approval. The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work, careful
removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which is
to remain undisturbed, coordination with other work in progress, and timely disconnection of
utility services. The procedures shall include a detailed description of the methods and
equipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of operations.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
The work includes demolition or removal of all construction indicated or specified. All
materials resulting from demolition work, except as indicated or specified otherwise, shall
become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the limits of the property.
Rubbish and debris shall be removed from the property daily unless otherwise directed so
as to not allow accumulation inside or outside the building. Materials that cannot be
removed daily shall be stored in areas specified by the Architect.
DUST CONTROL:
The amount of dust resulting from demolition shall be controlled to prevent the spread of
dust to occupied portions of the building and to avoid creation of a nuisance in the
surrounding area. Use of water will not be permitted when it will result in, or create,
hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding and pollution.
PROTECTION:
1. Protection of Existing Work: Before beginning any cutting or demolition work, the
Contractor shall carefully survey the existing work and examine the drawings and
specifications to determine the extent tot the work. The Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions to insure against damage to existing work to remain in place, to be reused, or to
remain the property of the owner, and any damage to such work shall be repaired or
replaced as approved by the Architect at no additional cost to the owner. The Contractor
shall carefully coordinate the work of this section with all other work and construct and
maintain shoring, bracing and supports, as required. The Contractor shall insure that
structural elements are not overloaded and be responsible for increasing structural supports
or adding new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition
work performed under any part of this contract.
2. Protection of building from the Weather: The interior of the building and all materials and
equipment shall be protected form the weather at all times.
3. Protection of Trees: Trees within the project site which might be damaged during
demolition and which is indicated to be left in place shall be protected by a 6-foot high fence.
The fence shall be securely erected a minimum of 5-feet from the trunk of individual trees of
follow the outer perimeter of branches or clumps of trees. Any tree designated to remain
that is damaged during the work under this contract shall be replaced.
4. Environmental protection: All work and Contractor operations shall comply with the
requirements of SECTION: ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION.
BURNING: The use of burning at the project site of the disposal of refuse and debris will not
be permitted.
DEMOLITION 02060 - 1

USE OF EXPLOSIVES: Use of explosives will not be permitted.
PART 2 - EXECUTION:
EXISTING FACILITIES:
1. Structural, Walls, and Partitions: Existing walls and partitions indicated shall remain.
DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL:
1. Title of Materials: Title to all materials and equipment to be demolished, excepting
owners salvage and historical items, is vested in the Contractor upon receipt of notice to
proceed. The owner will not be responsible for the condition, loss or damage to such
property after notice to proceed.
2. Material for Contractor Salvage: Material for salvage shall be stored as approved by the
Architect. Salvage materials shall be removed form Owner's property before completion of
the Contract. Material for salvage shall not be sold on the site.
CLEAN UP:
1. Debris and Rubbish: Debris created by the demolition of existing roofs shall be removed
form site and buildings.
2. Debris Control: Debris shall be removed and transported in a manner as to prevent
spillage on streets or adjacent areas.
3. Regulations: Local regulations regarding hauling and disposal apply.
END OF SECTION 02060
DEMOLITION 02060 - 2

SECTION 02110 - SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Site preparation shall include furnishing necessary equipment and labor to
remove vegetation and rubbish and the placement of approved excess
excavation in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions, and details
shown on the Contract Documents.
B. Within limits shown on the Contract Documents, or in areas where existing
grade is altered, strip existing topsoil to a depth of 6-inches and stockpile in
approved areas for subsequent replacement. Contractor to remove and
dispose of all excess materials.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02060 - Demolition
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D698-1991: Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft [600 kN-m/m]).
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Borrow. Material taken from designated areas to make up any deficit of
excavated material.
1.5 SUBMITTALS AND WORK
A. Coordinate activities with other work being performed so as not to cause any
interruption of activities being completed under other Sections of the Contract
Documents.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Work under this Section shall conform to applicable City Regulations for
disposal of debris, including safety requirements during performance of the
work.
B. Work under this Section shall be coordinated with utility companies and any
the management of any existing facilities in order to prevent any disruption in
operation and/or utility service.
C. Permits, fees, disposal charges and licenses shall be secured and paid by
Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER(S) (not used)
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor may use equipment and materials necessary to properly
complete the tasks described under this Section.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Fill:
SITE PREPARATION 02110 -1

1. Source: Obtain embankment fill from required excavation or, if
excavated material is insufficient, from borrowed areas approved by
the Geotechnical Engineer.
2. Suitability: Use the best material available from excavation or borrow.
Suitability of fill material is subject to the Geotechnical Engineer's
approval.
3. Quality: Fill material must be free of excessive silts. Do not use soil
containing brush, roots, sod or similar perishable material.
4. Excess Excavation: Use excess excavation or borrowed material with
prior approval of the Engineer. Borrow material from the approved
source and excavate. On completion of work borrowed area to be
cleaned and dressed. Reuse of material stripped from borrow site is
not allowed unless specifically indicated on the Drawings.
2.4 FABRICATION (not used)
2.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fill materials to be acquired as specified in Plans and/or by the Geotechnical
Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Verify existing plant life designated to remain and tag as such.
B. Locate, identify and protect all utilities.
C. Locate, identify and protect bench marks and existing structures.
D. Maintain surface drainage on site during construction. Remove
unsatisfactory fill material and waste vegetation from jobsite and dispose of
properly.
3.2 PRESERVATION AND RESTORATION
A. Protect trees that are to remain in the project area or in adjacent areas. Take
special care not to damage trees outside limits of construction.
B. Fill depressions made by grubbing with suitable material to make new surface
conform to the existing adjacent ground surface.
C. Final Cleanup: Level washes, ruts, depressions, and mounds to give areas
smooth finish.
3.3 CLEARING
A. Remove designated trees and shrubs along with stumps, roots, rubbish and
other objectionable material from the designated areas.
B. Remove grass and weeds to a depth of two (2) inches below existing soil line.
C. Remove stumps, roots, muck and spongy materials within the area to a depth
of eighteen (18) inches.
D. For areas where paving will be built remove stumps and roots within
pavement section to depth of two feet below finish subgrade elevation.
E. Provide demolition as required and specified in Section 02115 and the
Drawings.
SITE PREPARATION 02110 -2

3.4 REMOVING MATERIAL
A. Unless otherwise specified, cleared and grubbed material shall become
property of the Contractor and be removed from the work site or disposed of
in manner not to damage the Owner.
B. Burning of cleared and grubbed material on the Owner's property is not
permitted.
END OF SECTION
SITE PREPARATION 02110 -3

SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of earthwork is indicated on drawings.
Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements is included as part of
this work.
Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as part of this work.
Definition: "Excavation" consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade
elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable
requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and Inspection Service:
Employ, at Contractor's expense, testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection
service for quality control testing during earthwork operations.
SUBMITTALS:
Test Reports Excavating: Submit following reports directly to Architect/Engineer from
the testing services, with copy to Contractor:
Field density test reports.
One optimum moisture maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered.
Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each
strata tested.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as
representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is
expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Data are made available for convenience of
Contractor.
EARTH WORK 02200 - 1

Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to
remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork
operations.
Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during
excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with owner and
utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair
damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.
Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this
work and post with warning lights.
Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards
created by earthwork operations.
Perform excavation within drip line of large trees to remain by hand, and protect the root
system from damage or dry out to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition
for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1" diameter and
larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
SOIL MATERIALS:
General:
Backfill and Fill Materials: Provide satisfactory soil materials for backfill and fill, free of
clay, rock or gravel larger than 3" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,
vegetable matter, and other deleterious matter. Uses excavated or borrow material that
has been sample, tested and approved as satisfactory material. Backfill excavations as
promptly, as the work permits, but not backfill until completion of all inspections, testing,
approvals, and recording locations of underground utilities.
Select Fill: Fill under all floor slabs (and Extending 5'-0" beyond the building area),
walks, and paved areas to consist of low plasticity index materials (12 or less) as
approved by the Architect which is to be placed in 8" layers and compacted by use of
sheep foot rollers, pneumatic tired roller, tamp rollers or other compaction equipment
capable of obtaining the required density thru out the entire layer.
These materials shall be predominately sandy in nature, ideally with enough binder to
facilitate trenching operations, and with more than 50% retained on a #200 sieve. On
site materials are generally acceptable for use, but should be laboratory tested for
compliance.
Sand Cushion: Material immediately below sidewalks and at other locations indicated
on the drawings shall consist of a clean sand, free of silts, fines, or other organic
impurities capable of supporting the migration of water, as approved by the Architect.
This material shall be loosely compacted as in typical screeding and placement
operations.
EARTH WORK 02200 - 2

Dirt Fill: Fill dirt approved by the Architect shall be furnished, hauled, and spread on the
site by this Contractor at all locations where other materials are not specified, and in
accordance with drawings.
All other materials not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the
work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the
Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
GENERAL:
Ground Surface Preparation: remove vegetation, debris unsatisfactory soil materials,
obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills.
Plow, strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill
material will bond with existing surface.
When the existing ground surface is a density less than that specified under
"Compaction" for the particular area classification, break up the optimum moisture
content, and compact to the required depth and percentage of maximum density.
EXCAVATION:
Excavation to grades shown on drawings, if grades not shown excavate as required to
accommodate installation.
Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of all materials encountered to obtain
the required subgrade elevations, including earth, rock, etc., necessary for footings,
columns, beams, slabs, etc.
Unauthorized Excavation: Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials
beyond indicated subgrade elevations without the specific direction of the Architect.
Backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations
of the same classification, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
Excavation for Pavements: Cut the ground under pavements to comply with the cross
sections, elevations, and grade as shown on the drawings.
Excavation for Ditches: Cut ditches to the cross sections and grades as shown on the
drawings. Deposit excavated materials a sufficient distance from the edges of ditches to
prevent cave ins or material falling or sliding into ditch. Keep ditches free of an
accumulation of leaves, sticks and other debris until final acceptance of work.
Removal of Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: Excavate unsatisfactory soil materials
encountered that extend below the required elevations, to the additional depth directed
by the Architect. Such additional excavation, provided it is not due to the fault or neglect
of the Contractor, will be measured as directed by the Architect and paid for by the
Owner as a change in the work. Where the removal of unsatisfactory soil materials, is
due to the fault or negligence of the Contractor in his performance of earthwork ad site
EARTH WORK 02200 - 3

grading operations, excavate the resulting unsatisfactory soil material and replace with
compacted satisfactory soil material as required.
Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade
elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's
expense.
Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by
extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without
altering required too elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to
proper position, when acceptable to Architect.
Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized
excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect.
Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations,
notify Architect who will make an inspection of conditions.
If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry
excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Architect.
Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of
contract conditions relative to changes in work.
Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and
ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because
of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.
Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.
Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling,
uprights, stringers and cross braces, in good serviceable condition.
Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and
authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will
be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses.
Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into
excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of
foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of
subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction
and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey
water away from excavations.
Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting
or run off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
EARTH WORK 02200 - 4

Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until
required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip
line of trees indicated to remain.
Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified.
Excavation for Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a
tolerance of plus or minus 0.10', and extending a sufficient distance from footings and
foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services,
other construction, and for inspection.
In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling
authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe
systems.
Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric
temperature is less than 35 o F. (1 o C).
COMPACTION:
General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of
density specified for each area classification indicated below.
Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the
following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well defined moisture
density relationship (cohesive soils) determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557; and
not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance
with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well defined moisture density
relationship (cohesion-less soils).
Structures, Building Slabs: Compact
at 95% relative density.
subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill
material at 85% maximum density for cohesive materials and 90% relative density for
cohesion-less soils.
Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90%
relative density.
Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned
before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil
material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction
operations.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit
compaction to specified density.
EARTH WORK 02200 - 5

Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be
stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or
pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value.
BACKFILL AND FILL:
General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for
each area classification listed below.
In excavations, uses satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
Under walks and pavements, use subbase material or satisfactory excavated or borrow
material, or combination of both.
Under building slabs, use drainage fill material.
Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the
following:
Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable,
dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities.
Removal of concrete formwork.
Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. Cut
off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in manner to
prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if required.
Removal of trash and debris.
Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls.
Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials,
obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills.
Plow, strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill
material will bond with existing surface.
When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction"
for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture condition
to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of
maximum density.
Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in
loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than
4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand operated tampers.
Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum
moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density
EARTH WORK 02200 - 6

or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on
surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
GRADING:
ROUGH GRADING
After excavation is made to lines shown on the Drawings, and under proposed
embankments and structures, as adjusted for topsoil and landscaping depths, remove
soft or undesirable material as specified in this Section. Break down sides or holes or
depressions to flatten the slopes.
Locate and correct any irregularities in the subsoil, filling each depression with the
appropriate subsoil resulting in a level surface. Place any fill necessary in layers
moistened and compacted as specified in this Section.
Shape all areas designated for grading, including cut and fill areas, to receive a
minimum of 4-inches of topsoil. Topsoil depth at areas receiving landscaping, shrubs or
trees shall be coordinated through Landscaping Sections and Drawings
Scarify subsoil to a depth of 4 inches where topsoil is scheduled and in areas where
subsoil has been compacted due to equipment activity. Shape all areas designated for
grading, including cut and fill areas, to receive a minimum of four inches of topsoil.
Verify that subsoil has been appropriately contoured and shaped.
Tolerance on top surface of subgrade is plus/minus 1/10 foot.
FINISH GRADING
Place topsoil in areas where seeding, sodding and planting is indicated on Drawings or
otherwise scheduled.
Place topsoil while soil is dry and during dry weather. Perform topsoil spreading so that
planting can proceed with little additional tillage or soil preparation. Fine grade topsoil,
eliminating rough or low rough areas. Manually place topsoil around trees, plants, and
building to prevent any damage. Lightly compact topsoil.
Verify that finish grades and contours as indicated on Drawings have been maintained
after placement of topsoil and any landscape soil.
Tolerance of finish grade is plus/minus 1/2”.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and
approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed.
Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method),
ASTM D2922-81 (nuclear density method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), as
applicable.
EARTH WORK 02200 - 7

Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, conduct at
least one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and
approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each
subgrade with related tested strata, when acceptable to Architect.
Building Slab Subgrade: Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000
sq. ft. of building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer,
make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab but in no
case less than 3 tests.
If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or
fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction
and testing at no additional expense.
MAINTENANCE:
Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
Repair and re establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas too specified
tolerances.
Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re shape, and
compact to required density prior to further construction.
Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general
project warranty period, remove surface (lawn or other finish), add backfill material,
compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of
surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to
greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS:
Removal to Designated Areas on Owner's Property: Transport acceptable excess
excavated material to designated soil storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile soil
or spread as directed by Architect.
Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials, including unacceptable
excavated material, trash and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02200
EARTH WORK 02200 - 8

SECTION 03010 CONCRETE WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of concrete work shown on drawings.
Concrete paving and walks are specified in Division 2.
Precast concrete is specified in other Division 3 sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice".
Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at Contractor's expense a testing laboratory
acceptable to Architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete
mixes.
Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by Architect,
at any time during progress of work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and
facilities. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be done
at Contractor's expense.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing
compounds, dry shake finish materials, and others as requested by Architect.
Shop Drawings; Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and
placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard
Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup
spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special
reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures.
Laboratory Test Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix
design test as specified.
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 1

PART 2 PRODUCTS
FORM MATERIALS:
Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork for
exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood faced or other
acceptable panel type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed
surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to
conform to joint system shown on drawings. Provide form material with sufficient
thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection.
Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be
unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable
material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.
Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form coating compounds that will not
bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
REINFORCING MATERIALS:
Reinforcing Bars (Rebar): ANSI/ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. No. 3 bars may be
grade 40.
Welded Wire Fabric (WWF): ANSI/ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
Supports for Reinforcement: Provide brick bat supports for reinforcement for supporting
and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type
supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unless otherwise acceptable.
For slabs on grade: Use Brick bats (1/2 of full brick) to support slab and beam
reinforcing.
For exposed to view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms,
provide supports with legs which are plastic protected (CRSI, Class I) or stainless steel
protected (CRSI, Class 2).
CONCRETE MATERIALS:
Portland Cement: ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I.
Use one brand of cement throughout project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
Normal Weight Aggregates: ANSI/ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide
aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete.
Water: Potable.
Moisture Barrier: Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base material where
indicated. Use only materials which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance
with ANSI/ASTM E 154, as follows:
Clear Polyethylene Sheet not less than 6 mils thick.
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 2

Chemical Hardener (ChHd Fn): Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of
magnesium flousilicate and zinc flousilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing
not less than 2 lbs. of flousilicates per gal.
Non slip Aggregate Finish (NSAg Fn): Provide fused aluminum oxide grits, or crushed
emery, as abrasive aggregate for non slip finish with emery aggregate containing not
less than 40% aluminum oxide and not less than 25% ferric oxide. Use material that is
factory graded, packaged, rust proof and non glazing, and is unaffected by freezing,
moisture and cleaning materials.
Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz.
per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
Moisture Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ANSI/ASTM C 171.
10 mil polyethylene vapor barrier (clear).
Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compound: Federal Spec TT C 800, Type I, unless
other type acceptable to Architect.
Products: offered by manufacturers to comply with the requirements for membrane
forming curing compounds include the following:
"Klearseal:; Setcon Industries.
"Floor Coat"; The Eeuclid Chemical Corp.
"MB 429"; Master Builders
"Kure N Seal 800"; Sonneborn Contech.
"Klorkure 800"; Setcon Industries.
"Clear Seal 800"; W. R. Grace
"Dress and Seal"; L & M Construction Chemicals.
"Sealco 800"; Gifford Hill.
Note: Verify that selected product will not affect bonding of subsequent wall finishes or
floor coverings.
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES:
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial
batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used,
use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting
proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality
control testing unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at
least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have
been reviewed by Architect.
Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties unless
otherwise noted on the structural drawings, as indicated on drawings and schedules:
All concrete, except curb concrete, shall be flowable concrete comprised of:
1. Not less than 470# (5 sacks) of cement Type I per yard of concrete. (Unless water
reducing agent is provided.)
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 3

2. Water reducer shall be used equal to WRDA No. 79, 20 oz. per yard by
manufacturer by Grace Chemical.
3. Air 2% to 5 %.
4. 5" max. slump after additive placed in mix.
5. All concrete shall have a minimum compressive 28 day strength of 3,000 PSI.
(Unless noted otherwise on construction drawings.)
Design Test cylinders and compression breaks of the above mix shall be submitted to
the Architect/Engineer for approval. Should cylinders fail to meet specifications, the
cement added shall be increased to satisfy the required strength.
Curb concrete shall be 4 sack per yard minimum cement factor and have a w/c
maximum ratio of 0.65 with a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 2,500 PSI. Max
slump shall be 3".
CONCRETE MIXES:
Ready Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein
specified.
Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted.
During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a
shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required.
When air temperature is between 85 degrees F (30 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32
degrees C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when
air temperature is above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C),reduce mixing and delivery time
to 60 minutes. Ice or other means of cooling shall be added to mix should concrete
exceed 95 deg. F.
Admixtures:
Use air entraining in all concrete, unless otherwise shown or indicated. Add air
entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point
of placement having air content within the following limits: 2% to 5% air.
When air entrainment is used, reduce the maximum water content of the design mixes.
A water reducing additive such as Master Builders' Pozzolith or Gifford Hills' PSI shall be
used for all concrete. Such shall be used in strict compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations, such as to provide a flowable mix.
Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climate conditions
prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to maintain
quality control. All such shall be subject to approval of the Engineer and Architect.
Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride in concrete, except as otherwise
authorized in writing by the Architect. Do not use any admixtures containing calcium
chloride where concrete is placed against any galvanized steel, post tension steel or in
any mix using high early strength cement.
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 4

PART 3 EXECUTION
FORMS:
Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads
that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Construct
formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment,
elevation and position. Use wood forming for the full surfaces of the exterior side of all
grade beams.
Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast in
place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
Construct forms to sizes shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate
alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for
openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets,
chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features
required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints
and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to
place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets,
recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal.
Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout,
for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely
brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations.
Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber
chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate
work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases
from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into
forms.
Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive
concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is
placed. Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement is required to eliminate
mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
PLACING REINFORCEMENT:
Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing
Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports,
and as herein specified.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which
reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by
formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 5

einforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.
Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection.
Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position
during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete,
not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
Chuting of concrete in excess of 25' (twenty five feet) of slab perimeter is not approved.
"Pumping Placement" of all concrete shall be required of all foundation work beyond 25'
(twenty five feet) of perimeter.
JOINTS:
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on
drawings, so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to
Architect.
Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in construction joints in walls, slabs and between
walls and footings; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.
Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement.
reinforcement across construction joints.
Continue
Joint sealant materials are specified in Division 7 sections of these specifications.
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS:
General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items
required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast in place concrete. Use
setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to
be attached thereto.
Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate
screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab
surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by
use of strike off templates or accepted compacting type screeds.
PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES:
Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form coating compound before reinforcement is
placed.
Thin form coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under
conditions of form coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess
form coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete
surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with
manufacturer's instructions.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
Contractor shall notify Architect's office 48 hours prior to placement of concrete for on-
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 6

site visual inspection by Structural Engineer.
Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork
installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to
permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work.
Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not
used.
Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of
forms and reinforcing steel.
General: Comply with ACI 304and as herein specified.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be
placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or
planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction
joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location
to avoid segregation.
Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper
than 24" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement
consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid
cold joints.
Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand
spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of
concrete in accordance with ACI recommended practices.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine.
Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do
not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each
insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and
complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing
segregation of mix.
Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous
operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is
completed.
Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats or
darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior
to beginning finishing operations.
Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations.
Cold Weather Placing: Place no concrete when temperature is less than 40 degrees F
or 45 degrees F and falling.
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 7

Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair
quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as
herein specified.
Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel
temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment
in concrete.
Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES:
Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work
or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having
texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas
repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed
down or chipped off.
Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or that are to be
covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material
applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other
similar system. This is as cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing
material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed.
Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces,
which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after form
removal.
Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a
uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that
created by the rubbing process.
Related Uniformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets surfaces occurring
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES:
Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive
concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other
bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated.
After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/2" in 10' when tested
with a 10' straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After
leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes.
Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and
other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with
membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand bed terrazzo,
and as otherwise indicated.
After screening, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until
ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 8

has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power driven floats, or both. Consolidate
surface with power driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to
power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10'
when tested with a 10' straight edge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly
slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform,
smooth, granular texture.
Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view, and
slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint or
other thinfilm finish coating system.
After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power driven trowel. Begin
final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding
1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which
would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
Non Slip Broom Finish: Apply non slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps
and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with
fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
Chemical Hardener Finish: Apply chemical hardener finish to interior concrete floors
where indicated. Apply liquid chemical hardener after complete curing and drying of the
concrete surface. Dilute liquid hardener with water, and apply in 3 coats; first coat, 1/3
strength; secondcoat, 1/2 strength; third coat, 2/3 strength. Evenly apply each coat, and
allow 24 hours for drying between coats.
Apply proprietary chemical hardeners, in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
After final coat of chemical hardener solution is applied and dried, remove surplus
hardener by scrubbing and mopping with water.
Non slip Aggregate Finish: Apply non slip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads,
platforms, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
After completion of float finishing, and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25
lbs. of dampened non slip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush
with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and
tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein specified.
After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone, and water
to expose non slip aggregate.
CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION:
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures.
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 9

Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after
placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72
hours.
Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete
has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301
procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period.
Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by moisture retaining cover
curing, by curing compound, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.
Provide moisture curing by following methods.
Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
Continuous water fog spray.
Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover
with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of
concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Provide moisture cover curing as follows:
Cover concrete surfaces with moisture retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in
widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by
waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing
period using cover material and waterproof tape.
Provide curing compound to slab as follows:
Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final
finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous
operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat
areas immediately after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period. Apply 2 separate coatings of spray cure. Second coat
shall be applied in a pattern at 90 deg. to the first coat.
Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with
coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing,
dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish
materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of
beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place
for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing
by methods specified above, as applicable.
Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and
other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing compound. Final cure concrete
surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture retaining
cover, unless otherwise directed.
REMOVAL OF FORMS:
Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns,
and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 10

50 degrees F. (10 degrees C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is
sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing
and protection operations are maintained.
Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joints, slabs and other
structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has
attained design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential
compressive strength of inplace concrete by testing field cured specimens
representative of concrete location or members.
Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other
vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without
loosening or disturbing shores and supports.
RE USE OF FORMS:
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re used in work. Split, frayed, delaminated or
otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.
Apply new form coating compound as specified for new formwork.
When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean
surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure
joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except
as acceptable to Architect.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS:
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by
other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place.
Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in place construction.
Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to
template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of
manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS:
Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar
immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect.
Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie
rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make
edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with
water and brush coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place
patching mortar after bonding compound has dried.
For exposed to view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland
cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test
areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with
patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding
surface.
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 11

Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if
defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include
color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets; fins
and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be
removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast
cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the
durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.
Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for
smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish.
Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain
for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope.
Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which affect durability of
concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or
which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non reinforced sections
regardless of width, spalling, pop outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other
objectionable conditions.
Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14
days.
Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of
surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete.
Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds
may be used when acceptable to Architect.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1"
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to
sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4"
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete
of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry pack
method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust,
dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding
compound. Mix dry pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine
aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for
handling and placing. Place dry pack after bonding compound has dried. Compact dry
pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area
continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
Use epoxy based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by Architect.
Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION:
The Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform other
tests and to submit test reports.
CONCRETE WORK 03010 - 12

Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the
following, as directed by Architect.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C 94.
Slump: ASTM C 143; the first three trucks will be tested for adequate slump, and every
fifth truck thereafter. Those trucks exceeding the maximum 5" slump WILL NOT BE
ACCEPTED.
Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 3 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
laboratory cured test specimens except when field cure test specimens are required. All
making and handling of test specimens shall be by Laboratory personnel.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 50 cu. yds.or fraction
thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface
area placed: 1 specimen tested at 7 days, 1 specimens tested at 28 days, and one
specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and
no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive by more than 500
psi.
Test results will be reported in writing to Architect and Contractor on same day that tests
are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service,
concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking
strength and type of break for both 7 day tests and 28 day tests.
Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in place concrete
when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not
been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct
tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42,
or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any
other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified.
END OF SECTION 03010

SECTION 04220
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete masonry units, lintels, mortar and other related accessories.
1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Reinforcing steel.
B. Masonry accessories.
C. Masonry core insulation.
D. Hollow metal door frames.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03010 - Concrete Work
1.04 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. 530, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
2. 530.1, Specifications for Masonry Structures.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C33, Concrete Aggregates.
2. C90, Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
3. C140, Methods of Testing Concrete Masonry Units.
4. C150, Portland Cement.
5. C331, Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units.
6. C618, Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a
Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.
C. Portland Cement Association (PCA): Recommended Practices For Laying
Concrete Block.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Concealed: For Work required under this Section, the term "concealed" will
mean "not exposed to view in finished construction."
B. Exposed: For Work required under this Section, the term "exposed" will
mean "exposed to view in finished construction."
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit:
1. Certification of moisture content, fire resistive rating(s) or compressive
strength(s).
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04220-1

2. Color samples for precolored units.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Follow ACI 530 and 530.1.
B. Maintain 1 copy of each referenced document at Site.
C. Manufacturer: Current NCMA member.
D. Provide units from single manufacturing source to ensure uniform texture for
continuous and visually related areas.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver to Site only units properly cured and following these specifications.
B. Protect masonry units from damage and against moisture and weather,
particularly against freezing and thawing. Maintain hollow concrete masonry
units in their initial dry state until after they are laid up in wall.
C. Stack masonry units in dry place, off ground on prepared plank platform and
in manner to promote circulation of air through and around block. Protect
stacked block by shed roof or tarpaulin arranged to allow for circulation of air
around and above stacked block.
D. Carefully handle masonry units. Do not build units into Work with chipped
edges, spalls or other damage to their appearance which would show in
finished wall.
E. Do not store adjacent to materials which can cause staining or discoloration.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not erect masonry when, in Owner's Engineer's opinion, atmospheric
conditions or limited facilities prevent proper setting, bonding and curing.
B. Protect tops of masonry walls against weather. Use strong, non-staining
waterproof membrane secured with metal masonry wall clamps or properly
weighted down. Maintain this protection during construction of walls and
after their completion, properly anchored, repaired and replaced until tops of
walls are covered by Work of others.
C. Leave necessary openings for passage of pipes, drains, ducts, wires and
utility lines. Form chases shown, required or directed. Return and solidly
close all openings at completion of Work of other trades. Remove rubbish
and sweep out area before closing up any pipe chase, duct space or similar
limited access or inaccessible area.
D. Coordinate with other trades and make provisions that will permit installation
of their Work in manner to avoid cutting and patching. Build in items
furnished by other trades as Work progresses.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04220-2

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type 1.
B. Lime: ASTM C207 Type S.
C. Pozzolans: ASTM C618.
D. Aggregates: ASTM D33 normal weight or ASTM C331 lightweight. Provide
either normal, medium or light weight units unless shown otherwise.
E. Mortar: Type S or RS. Follow Section 04050.
F. Integral Water Repellent: ASTM E514 Class E.
1. Approved Product: Grace Construction Products' "Dry-Block"
admixture.
G. Integral Color: Integral color pigment mixed with cement and aggregates
during fabrication to match local licensee's color selection(s).
2.02 CONCRETE BLOCK
A. Hollow Units: ASTM C90 Type I; 1900 psi minimum compressive strength
(net).
2.03 FABRICATION:
A. Follow ACI and NCMA.
B. Provide the following finishes and colors:
1. Exterior Concrete Block: Manufacturer's regular (smooth) molded finish
and precolored during fabrication.
C. Provide integral water repellent in all exterior concrete block and exterior split
face block units.
D. Provide concrete masonry units with modular dimension; standard units 7-
5/8" high, 1'-3-5/8" long and 3/8" less nominal widths or thicknesses shown or
required, with permissible variation of 1/16".
E. Provide special units for 90 o corners, bond beams, bullnosed corners, control
joint fillers, etc. shown or required.
F. Cure units minimum 14 days in presence of moist air following ASTM C426.
1. Provide block properly cured to 30% of maximum absorption.
Questionable block will be tested and shipment rejected if average
moisture content is found to exceed specification limits.
2. Do not build in block with moisture content exceeding specification
requirements into Work. Dry block containing excess moisture to
acceptable maximum either by further air drying or use of heat before
being used.
3. No extension of time for completion will be allowed due to delay cause by
failure of Contractor to maintain stored block at acceptable moisture
content.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04220-3

PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work.
B. Inspect materials for defects before starting installation.
C. Reject any chipped or broken block. DO NOT BUILD DAMAGED UNITS
INTO WORK.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry Work. Maintain in
place until building structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03 ERECTION / INSTALLATION / APPLICATION
A. Follow ACI and NCMA.
B. See Sections under which materials to be installed are furnished for
additional installation requirements.
C. Use thoroughly dry concrete block with sharp, square, unbroken corners and
edges and no cracks. DO NOT WET MASONRY UNITS.
D. Take special care in handling and storage of units for exposed block Work.
Do not install chipped or marred block where exposed.
E. Lay block in running bond with each course lapping block below by 1/2 block
unless shown otherwise.
F. Lay solid block units with full mortar coverage on head and bed joints and
hollow block units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. Mortar
hollow block unit web joints in load bearing piers or pilasters, in starting
course on footings or solid foundation walls and next to cores grouted solid.
1. Do not shift or tap masonry after mortar has achieved initial set. Remove
mortar and replace where adjustments must be made.
2. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furring of mortar joints are not
permitted.
G. Build walls and partitions true to dimension, plumb and square, laid to line in
level courses, accurately spaced and coordinated with other Work. Keep
individual face units "in plane" with walls rising together. Use double lines in
multiple-tier walls with each tier plumb and all units "in plane."
H. Lay out Work to avoid fractional pieces. Interlock external corners. Set
partitions on structural floor slabs before finish floor is laid unless shown
otherwise.
I. Perform required cutting with power equipment which will produce true,
straight, clean edges free of chipping and undamaged surfaces. CUTTING
WITH HAMMER AND CHISEL WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. Use 100% solid
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04220-4

lock where webs would be exposed. Minimum length of cut units on
exposed Work shall be 1/2 unit.
J. Cut units accurately to fit around pipes, ducts, openings, structural framing,
etc. and slush voids full.
K. Take particular care to embed conduits and pipes within block without
fracturing exposed shells and to fit units around switch, receptacle and other
boxes set in walls. Grind and cut units before building in service where
electric conduit, outlets, switch boxes and similar items occur.
L. Fill voids and joints between block and different types of materials with
mortar.
M. Make joints approximately 3/8" wide. Line up joints vertically. Remove burrs
with burlap or carpet after tooling.
N. Neatly tool interior and exterior joints below grade and in exposed masonry
firm to slightly concave profile when mortar is thumbprint hard unless shown
otherwise. Cut off flush and brush off surplus as Work progresses. Tool
vertically then horizontally. Furnish all masons with joint tools of same
diameter. Exception: Strike flush interior concealed joints (such as in chases
and plenums) or those covered with directly applied finish materials.
O. Install vertical and horizontal masonry reinforcing where shown. Grout cores
solid full length of reinforcing with masonry core grout specified in Section
03300. Maintain position of reinforcing within 1/2" (13mm) of dimensioned
position.
P. Fill voids receiving anchor bolts, wedge anchors, expansion bolts, etc. solid
with masonry grout.
O. Provide solid masonry bearing surface under lintels, beams, bearing plates,
etc. as shown. Provide the following minimum solid bearing (as applicable) if
not shown:
1. Lintels: Solid masonry bearing for full thickness of wall by length of
bearing plus 8" by 8" high.
2. Beams: Solid masonry bearing for full thickness of wall by length of
bearing plus 1'-4" by 1’-4” feet high.
R. Provide solid masonry for course directly below corbelled masonry walls.
Maximum corbel for each course is 1".
S. Provide closure, lintels, bond beams, jamb units, sash, corners headers and
other special shapes shown or required. Provide standard manufactured
sizes or cut full size block for fractional course heights and lengths. Provide
sash blocks or other shapes designed to receive specified control joint filler
strips.
T. Provide bullnosed units at exterior corners unless shown otherwise. Field
grind to Owner's Engineer's satisfaction all external corners not installed
bullnosed.
1. Exception: Provide square cornered blocks at window jambs.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04220-5

U. Step back unfinished Work for joining with new Work. Toothing will not be
permitted unless specifically approved by Owner's Engineer. Remove loose
masonry and mortar and clean thoroughly before new Work is started.
V. Build in chases, openings, reinforcement, anchors, access doors, lintels,
flashings and other items required. Provide centering required to properly
support masonry until mortar attains design strength. Build in sleeves except
where shown to be installed in other Sections.
W. Build hollow metal door frames into wall. Plumb and brace. Thoroughly
embed frame anchors. Slush frame jambs full with mortar. Allow 1/4" for
caulking around frame in exterior walls and 1/8" on interior unless shown
otherwise. Rake out joints for caulking.
X. Fill masonry units solid with mortar 2 cores wide at each door jamb and 1
core wide at each window jamb for full height of opening.
Y. Hold block down approximately 2" below roof structural members such as
beams, joists and roof deck subject to deflection at non-bearing walls.
Z. Provide control and expansion joints in all block Work. Reference
Architectural Contract Drawings for masonry joint locations. Joints spacing
shall not exceed 20 ft. on center nor shall a joint be located within two feet of
an opening.
AA. Build in control joint filler strips in control joints as masonry is laid up allowing
for caulking on each side of wall. Caulking shall be provided in all joints.
Exception: Do not carry horizontal joint reinforcement through control or
expansion joints.
BB. Maintain lateral support of intersecting masonry non- load bearing walls with
wire mesh ties placed across joint between walls and spaced 1'-4" on center
vertically.
CC. Install concealed masonry flashing where shown. Provide clean smooth
surfaces set in full mortar bed and cover with full mortar bed. Seal
penetrations and joints with mastic.
DD. Build in exposed sheet metal flashing, expansion joints and reglets occurring
in masonry. Cut out mortar joint and set flashing or reglet in new mortar bed
in existing construction.
EE. Build in bond beams grouting full and carefully position reinforcing where
shown. Lap rebars a minimum length of 48 bar diameters. Field modify
standard units required to receive required reinforcing where bond beam
units are not available in specified finish.
FF. Any masonry Work found deficient in respect to these specifications will
require entire wall to be removed and relayed at Contractor's expense.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32".
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04220-6

B. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4" in 10 feet and 1/2" in 20 feet or
more.
C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4" per story non-cumulative; 1/2" in 2
stories or more.
D. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8" in 3 feet, 1/4" in 10 feet and
1/2" in 30 feet.
E. Maximum Variation From Joint Thickness: 1/8" in 3 feet.
F. Maximum Variation From Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4".
3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Replace any masonry units which are loose or damaged and repair defective
mortar joints. Make these repairs such that evidence of repair is not
apparent.
B. Remove surplus mortar, drippings, splatter, etc. from exterior and interior
masonry as Work progresses.
C. Clean, point and dry brush all exposed Work at end of each working day. Fill
holes from line pins and nails.
D. Point joints to provide a neat uniform appearance. Cut out unrepairable
defective joints. Fill solidly with mortar and tool to match adjacent Work. DO
NOT CORRECT IMPERFECTIONS WITH SPACKLE.
E. Thoroughly rub out exposed Work to remove any projections. Fill
indentations flush with surface.
F. Clean masonry surfaces upon completion from top down with water and fiber
brushes to remove stains. ACID CLEANING OF MASONRY IS NOT
PERMITTED.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04220-7

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUMMARY
This section includes the following metal fabrications:
Lintels
Toilet Partitions
Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following:
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section.
DEFINITIONS
SUBMITTALS:
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
Product Data: for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint
products and grout.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous
metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections.
Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts
specified for installation by other sections.
Samples: representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by
Architect.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications
similar to that indicated for this project, with sufficient production capacity to produce
required units without causing delay in the work.
Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this
section by same firm that fabricated them.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1
"Structural Welding Code - Steel," D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel", and
D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1

Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which
metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show
recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
FERROUS METALS:
Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the
Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom
form surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations
in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.
Steel Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A572 (Fy - 50 ksi)
Steel Pipe:
ASTM A53 Type E (Fy - 35 ksi)
Steel Plates, Angles, Channel, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786
Steel Bars for Gratings: ASTM A 569 or ASTM A 36.
Wire Rod for Grating Cross Bars: ASTM A 510.
Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:
Cold - Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, grade as indicated below:
Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required for design loading.
Grade B, unless otherwise indicated or required for design loading.
Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized
coating.
Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: Product type (manufacturing method), quality, and
grade, as follows:
Cold-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, grade as follows:
Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading.
Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570, grade as follows:
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2

Grade 30, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading.
Uncoated Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, product type (method of manufacture) as
follows:
Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366.
Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 569
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Quality as follows:
Structural Quality: ASTM A 446; Grade A, unless another grade required for design
loading, and G90 coating designation unless otherwise indicated.
Commercial Quality: ASTM A 526, G90 coating designation unless otherwise indicated.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:
Provide Hot Dipped Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
Type S, Grade A standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another
grade or weight or both required by structural loads.
Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and
finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either
malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers, and
shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for
the metal alloy to be welded.
GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
Non-shrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory- packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in
this section.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Non-shrink Nonmetallic Grouts:
"Basal Construction Grout"; W. R. Bonsal Co.
"Euco N-S Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co.
"Kemset"; Chem-Masters Corp.
"Masterflow 713"; Master Builders.
"Sealtight 588 Grout"; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
"Sonogrout"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3

"Five Star Grout"; U. S. Grout Corp.
"Vibropruf #11"; Lambert Corp.
Fasteners:
General: Provide zinc coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls.
Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular Hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A.
Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.
Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
Drilled- In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group
VIII (anchors, expansion, (non-drilling), Type I(internally threaded tubular expansion
anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.
Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required.
Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
Paint:
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing,
lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal
atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and for
capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged
exposure complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in
galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight,
and complying with DOD - P- 21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying SSPC-Paint 12 except
containing no asbestos fibers.
Zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT-P-645.
CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS
Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in
ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal
assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and
fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F (55.5 deg C).
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4

Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal corner to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the
following:
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that
no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those
adjacent.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not
indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least
conspicuous.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinated with supporting structure.
Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish
hardware and similar items.
Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or
provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
Fabricate loose structural steel lintels form steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Use hotdipped
galvanized angles at exterior.
Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
Design loose lintels for equal bearing of one inch per foot of clear span. Minimum
bearing shall be not less than 8 inches bearing at each side of openings, unless
otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5

Hot-dipped galvanized loose steel lintels are required at all exterior wall openings.
TOILET PARTITION FRAMES:
Fabricate steel tube frame using 1-1/2" and 2-1/2" x 3/16" vertical and horizontal
numbers with 1/4" x 3/16" plates as shown on drawings. To be hot dipped galvanized,
and painted.
Shop drawings must be submitted to Architects office prior to fabrication.
Provide Hardware as required for erection.
END OF SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definition: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other
sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. Types of
work in this section include rough carpentry for:
Finish carpentry is specified in another section within Division 6.
REFERENCES:
Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 70 and with applicable rules of the respective
grading and inspecting agencies for species and products indicated.
Plywood Product Standards: Comply with PS 1 (ANSI A 199.1) or, for products not
manufactured under PS 1 provision, with applicable APA Performance Standard for type
of panel indicated.
SUBMITTALS:
Wood Treatment Data: Submit treatment manufacturer's instructions for proper use of
each type of treated material.
Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant
stating type of preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards.
For water borne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials
was reduced to a maximum of 15% prior to shipment to project site.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to
weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and
other panels; provide for air circulation within stacks.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate
fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow
attachment of other work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
LUMBER, GENERAL:
Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except
omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or without finish.
Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes
as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1

Provide seasoned lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
Framing Lumber (2" through 4" thick) (Wd Frm):
For light framing (less than 6" wide), provide "Stud" grade lumber for stud framing and
"Standard" grade for other light framing, any species.
For light framing (less than 6" wide), provide the following grade, any species:
For structural framing (6" and wider and from 2" to 4" thick), provide the following grade
and species:
Select Structural grade.
No. 1 grade.
No. 2 grade.
No. 3 grade.
Any species of the specified grade.
Any species and grade which meets or exceeds the following values:
Fb (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending); 1500 psi.
E (minimum modulus of elasticity); 1,500,000 psi.
Exposed Framing Lumber (2" through 4" thick):
Where framing will not be concealed by other work, provide the following grade and
species:
Douglas Fir, Appearance Framing (WCLB or WWPA).
Southern Pine, Appearance Grade, Kiln Dried (SPIB).
Redwood Clear All Heart (RIS).
Boards (less than 2" thick).
Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the
following:
Moisture Content: 19% maximum, "S DRY."
Where painted finish is indicated, provide Southern Pine, No. 2 Boards per SPIB,
or Douglas Fir Construction Boards (WCLB or WWPA).
Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber of
19% maximum moisture content (S DRY) and of following species and grade:
Board Sizes: Provide sizes indicated or, if not indicated (for sheathing, sub flooring and
similar uses), provide 1" x 8" boards.
MISCELLANEOUS, LUMBER:
Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including cant strips, bucks,
nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of
sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows:
Moisture content: 15% maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
preservative treatment.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2

Grade: Construction Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber
as required. Provide construction grade boards (RIS or WCLB) or No. 2 boards (SPIB or
WWPA).
PLYWOOD (Pwd):
Trademark: Identify each plywood panel with appropriate APA trademark.
Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fireretardant
treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with
exterior glue, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than ½".
Plywood Exterior Sheathing: Provide fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade
designation, APA C-D plugged exterior with exterior glue in thickness shown.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as
recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications
for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices.
Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the
manufacturer for each use including recommended nails.
Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot dip zinc coating (ASTM A
153).
WOOD TREATMENT:
Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt Wd" or "Treated,"
or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA
Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark
each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements.
Pressure treat above ground items with water borne preservatives complying with AWPB
LP 2. After treatment, kiln dry to maximum moisture content, respectively of 19% and
15%. Treat indicated items and the following:
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with
roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing.
Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after
treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment.
Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective
pieces.
Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged of
defective pieces.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which
are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint
arrangement.
Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3

cut and fitted.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and
as required by recognized standards.
Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish
work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will
be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required.
WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS:
Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work.
Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be
attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of
masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key beveled lumber not
less than 1 1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness
of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL (Wd Frm):
Provide framing members of the size and spacing shown, and frame openings as
shown, or if not shown, comply with recommendations of "Manual for House Framing" of
National Forest Products Association N.F.P.A). Do not splice structural members
between supports, as per schedule.
Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of
"Manual for House Framing" and National Design Specifications for Wood construction
published by of N.F.P.A.
Fire stop concealed spaces with wood blocking not less than 2" thick, if not blocked by
other framing members. Provide blocking at each building story level and at ends of joist
spans.
Installation of Plywood:
General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E 304, "APA
Design/Construction Guide Residential & Commercial," for types of plywood products
and applications indicated.
Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
Sheathing: Nail to framing.
Plywood Backing Panels: Nail to supports.
END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4

SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, is non -
structural, and which is not specified as part of other sections.
Types of finish carpentry work in this section include:
Fascias
Trim
Wall Mounted Plastic Laminate
Rough carpentry is specified in another Division 6 section.
Builders Hardware and wood doors are specified in Division 8 sections.
Architectural woodwork is specified in another Division 6 section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading
agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish,
and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance
with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each
item of factory fabricated siding and paneling.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent
damage, soiling and deterioration.
Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar
operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in
installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials
must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements
specified for installation areas.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Conditioning: Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements
for finish carpentry installation areas. Do not install finish carpentry until required
temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in
installation areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS:
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 1

Softwood Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of
the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated.
Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 1/ANSI A199.1.
Hardwood Lumber Standard: Comply with National Hardwood Lumber Association
(NHLA) rules.
Hardwood Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 51.
Woodworking Standard: Where indicated for specific products comply with specified
provision of the following:
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards."
Glued -up Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 56.
MATERIALS:
General:
Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed
or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as
required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated.
Moisture Content of Softwood Lumber: Provide kiln -dried (KD) lumber having moisture
content from time of manufacture until time of installation not greater than 6% to 11%.
Moisture Content of Hardwood Lumber: Provide kiln -dried (KD) lumber having moisture
content from time of manufacture until time of installation from 6% to 11%.
Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Use good grade pieces made of
Cedar.
Lumber for Painted Finish: Any closed grain hardwood, AWI Section 300, custom grade.
Exterior Finish Carpentry:
Fascias: Rough cut cedar or saw textured, construction Douglas Fir (West Coast).
Trim: Rough cut cedar
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY:
Shelving: 3/4" shelves 12" wide or over #1 SYP and for shelves under 12".
Cleats: #1 SYP.
Trim and Moulding: Red Oak
Plastic Laminate: Countertops and backsplashes as per drawings.
Standards: Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards
listed.
Federal Specifications: FS equal to Wilson Art
Examining:
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 2

Examine surfaces that are to receive Laminated Plastic. Report unsatisfactory laminate
condition.
Do not star installation of Laminated Plastic until satisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Proceeding with installation of Laminated Plastic will be constructed as evidence of
acceptance of conditions under which work will be done.
Protecting:
Handle Laminated Plastic and items to avoid injury to person and to avoid damage to
materials or to work in place. Satisfactorily repair or remove and replace work that has
been damaged.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage, soiling and adhering of adhesives and extra
materials.
Protect Laminated Plastic from damage by weather and construction. Install necessary
protective covering for surfaces that may have traffic during construction period.
Remove protective covering upon completion of project. Remove and replace work that
has been damaged.
Delivering and Storing:
Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened, labeled containers or
packages.
Submit samples for approval of the Architect.
APPLICATION:
Trim shall be plumb and/or level with miter joints and finished as earlier specified. Prefinished
trim shall be required.
Application shall not take place sooner than 24 hours of temperatures less than 42 deg
F.
Miscellaneous Materials:
Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the
type, size, materials and finish required for application indicated to provide secure
attachment, concealed where possible, and complying with applicable Federal
Specifications.
All interior and exterior nails shall be galvanized.
Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity,
provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dipped zinc coating (ASTM A 153).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION:
Condition wood materials to the average humidity condition in installation areas prior to
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 3

installing.
Back prime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior or, where indicated, to
moisture and high relative humidity on the interior. Comply with requirements of section
on painting within Division 9 for primers and their application.
INSTALLATION:
Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly
treated, not adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or
optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of defective manufacturer with respect to
surfaces, sizes or patterns.
Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using
concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8' -0" for plumb and level countertops;
and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed
adjoining surfaces.
Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged
finish at cuts.
Anchor finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or blocking built -in or directly
attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk,
concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except
where pre-finished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nail for
exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface, and matching final
finish where transparent is indicated.
MILLWORK AND TRIM:
Exterior and interior millwork and trim shall conform to design and details shown. Where
practical, work shall be finished and assembled at the mill. All mill work and trim shall be
furnished smooth and free from machine and tool marks that will show through the finish.
All nail heads shall be set to receive putty.
Doors and other movable parts shall be accurately fitted with proper clearances and left
in perfect working order. Passage doors shall have a minimum clearance of 1/8" at sides
and top, and doors and hardware shall be fitted to template so that they may be
interchanged from opening to opening. All refitting necessary due to swelling shrinking,
assembly or installation shall be done by this Contractor, for a period of one year after
completion and acceptance of the building.
When dressing or cutting has been done, these surfaces shall be refinished. The work
shall be left clean and free from warp, twist, open joints or other defects.
Metal thresholds: Fit and set metal thresholds in mastic.
LOCATION OF FINISH HARDWARE:
Locate hardware for door and door frames as follows unless shown otherwise on the
drawings:
Center door knobs 38" above floor. Offset screen door latches to clear door locksets.
Center door pulls 42" above floor and push plates 48" above floors.
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 4

INSTALLATION OF WINDOWS:
Install windows and operating sash closed and locked, and set plumb, true, and
centered in openings; securely anchored in place, using approved manufacturers
anchors specifically designed for use in the openings detailed.
Check all windows for smooth operation and proper function and adjust as required,
prior to acceptance by the Architect.
ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION:
Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to eliminate
defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace
woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
Refer to Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed finish carpentry work.
Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise Contractor of final protection
and maintained conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or
deterioration at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 5

SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each type of architectural woodwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules.
Types of architectural woodwork include the following:
Shelving
Millwork
Plastic laminate Countertops
Plastic Laminate Toilet Partitions
Finish carpentry is specified in another section of Division 6.
Wood doors are specified within Division 8.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
AWI Quality Marking: Mark each assembled unit of architectural woodwork with
manufacturer's identification and grade mark evidencing compliance with indicated AWI
quality grade. Locate grade mark on surfaces which will not be exposed after installation.
For other items requiring field assembly, a certification of compliance may be substituted
for marking of individual pieces.
Arrange for architectural woodwork with sequence matched wood veneers to be
produced by a single firm.
REFERENCES:
AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of “Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), excets
otherwise indicated.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each
item of factory fabricated woodwork.
Certification: Include certification that fire -retardant treated materials comply with
governing regulations.
Quality Certification: Submit Manufacturer's (Fabricator's) certification, stating that
fabricated work complies with quality grades and other requirements indicated.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned
plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components.
Submit shop drawings for the following:
Framed openings and lights, including trim.
Shelving
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 1

PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,
soiling and deterioration.
Do not deliver woodwork, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which
could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas.
If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Conditioning: Woodwork Manufacturer and Installer shall advise Contractor of
temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork installation and storage areas. Do
not install woodwork until required temperature and relative humidity have been
stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas.
Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture
content of installed woodwork within a 1.0 percent tolerance of optimum moisture
content, from date of installation through remainder of construction period.
The fabricator of woodwork shall determine optimum moisture content and required
temperature and humidity condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with following requirements for
architectural woodwork not specifically indicated as prefabricated or pre-finished
standard products.
Wood Moisture Content: Provide kiln dried (KD) lumber with an average content range of
6% to 11% for interior work. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during
fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that moisture content values for
woodwork at time of installation do not exceed the following:
Interior Wood Finish: 5% - 10% for mild regions (as defined by AWI).
Interior Wood for Transparent Finish:
Solid Wood: Red Oak.
Plywood: Red Oak faced Cabinet grade,
Interior Wood for Opaque Finish and Concealed Portions:
Solid Wood: Red Oak hardwood complying with requirements for specified woodwork
grade.
Plywood: Closed grain hardwood plywood with exterior glue complying with
requirements for specified woodwork grade.
Veneer Matching: To be determined by Fabricator, for best visual effect, depending upon
flitch width and grain character. Refer questions of best visual effect to Architect for
resolution as work progresses.
Plastic Laminate: Comply with NEMA LD-3 for type, thickness, color, pattern and finish
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 2

as indicated for each application, or if not indicated, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard products as well as the following;
Wilsonart -
Formica -
Nevamar-
All Available Colors, including Premium Colors
All Available Colors, including Premium Colors
All Available Colors, including Premium Colors
Quality Standards: For following types of architectural woodwork; comply with indicated
standards as applicable:
Standing and Running Trim: AWI Section 300.
Casework and Countertops: AWI Section 400.
Shelving: AWI Section 600.
Miscellaneous Work: AWI Section 700.
Exterior Frames: AWI Section 900.
Design and Construction Features: Comply with details shown for profile and
construction of architectural woodwork, and, where not otherwise shown, comply with
applicable Quality Standards, with alternate details as Fabricator's option.
Pre -Cut Openings: Fabricate architectural woodwork with pre -cut openings, where
possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work and similar
items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams for
proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in countertops and
similar exposures seal edges of cutouts with a water -resistant coating.
Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required to be fitted to
other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing
details as required for accurate fit.
Where sequence of measuring substrates before fabrication would delay the project,
proceed with fabrication (without field measurements) and provide ample borders and
edges to allow for subsequent scribing and trimming of woodwork for accurate fit.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK:
Grade: Custom.
Construction: Reveal overlay.
Exposed Surfaces: Provide high pressure laminate in grades indicated for the following
types of surfaces:
Horizontal Surfaces: GP -50 (0.050" nominal thickness).
Post Formed Surfaces: PF -42 (0.042" nominal thickness).
Vertical Surfaces: GP -28 (0.028" nominal thickness).
Plastic Laminate Countertops: if applicable.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide separate plastic laminate countertops
(installed on other casework or other support system as indicated) to comply with
requirements for casework for plastic laminate finish. Provide with coved backsplash.
Note at science lab countertops, provide epoxy resin tops, black in color.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 3

Fabricate exposed edges of casework, including edges of doors and drawers when
open, with matching plastic laminate, except as otherwise indicated.
Shelves: 1" thick, reversible, finished booth sides and banded all edges.
Wood Storage Shelving, Transparent Finish:
General: These requirements do not apply to shelving which is either integral with or
indicated as "casework"; comply with casework requirements for those units of shelving.
Grade: Custom.
Shelving Material: Economy Grade (HPMA Sound Grade) hardwood plywood with
matching hardwood edge bands on exposed edges.
FINISH FOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK:
General: The priming and pre-finishing (if any) of architectural woodwork required to be
performed at the shop or factory is specified as work of this section. Refer to Division 9
sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
At the Contractor's option, he may use plastic laminate interior finish in lieu of painted
surfaces.
Preparations for Finish: Comply with AWI Quality Standards, Section 1500, for sanding,
filling countersunk fasteners, back priming and similar preparations for finishing of
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS:
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with
architectural woodwork, except for units which are specified as "door hardware" in other
sections of these specifications.
Hardware Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with ANSI A156.9 "
American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware".
Quality Level: Type 2 (institutional), unless otherwise indicated.
Quality Certification: Where available, provide cabinet hardware bearing the BHMA
certification label, affixed either to hardware or its packaging, showing compliance with
BHMA.
Cabinet Hardware Standard 201.
Cabinet Hardware: Provide all cabinet hardware required for proper installation and
operation, whether listed below or not.
Metal Shelf Standards and Brackets: Provide one of the following:
No. 87 Standards and No. 187 Brackets; Knape & Vogt Mfg. Co.
Finish: Nickel-plated.
Pivoted Hinges: model no. 872 Face Frame Hinge by Grass America
Finish for Butts and Hinges: Stain nickel-plated.
Cabinet Door Pulls: Surface-Mounted: Stanley 4478 ALD
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 4

Door Pull Finish: Satin Chrome
Magnetic Cabinet Catches: Provide one of the following:
Aluminum, satin finish, No.916, Knape & Vogt.
Aluminum, satin finish, No.46 ALD, Standley Hardware Div.
Drawer Slides: No. 1300 Knape & Vogt Mfg. Co.
Locks: Master Lock Five (5) pin tumbler
Cabinet Door Hardware: Provide hinges, catches and pulls of types indicated, to
accommodate each door size and style.
Drawer Hardware: Provide slides and pulls of types indicated, to accommodate each
drawer size and style.
Equip each drawer with side-mounted, full-extension, ball-bearing, nylon roller drawer
slides with load capacity of 75 lbs. per pair.
Locks: provide standard pin-type or disc-type (5 pins or discs) tumbler locks, keyed alike
in each room, at all base and wall cabinets unless noted otherwise.
Shelf Supports: Where shelving is indicated as "adjustable:, provide slotted-type
standards and brackets of type needed to properly support shelves with uniform 40-lb
per sq. ft. loading.
Closet Bars: Telescoping steel or brass tubing, with forged end brackets; size and wall
thickness as required to support full continuous hanging of clothing.
Exposed Hardware Finish: Provide exposed hardware with BHMA Code 626 satin
chromium plate finish (US26D). Where not available, provide either satin aluminum or
satin stainless steel finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION:
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior
to installing.
Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates, well in
advance of time substrates are to be built.
Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for
completion, and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of
packing.
INSTALLATION:
Install woodwork plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required
using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8' -0" for plumb and level
(including countertops); and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces, 1/8"
maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 5

Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged
finish at cuts.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full
length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners and
comply with referenced Quality Standards for joinery.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built -in or directly attached to substrates.
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and
blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where pre-finished matching
fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposing nailing, countersunk
and filled flush with woodwork, and matching final finish where transparent finish is
indicated.
Wood Storage Shelving: Complete the assembly of units and install in the areas
indicated, including hardware and accessories as indicated.
ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION:
Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects
functionally and visually; where not possible to repair replace woodwork. Adjust joinery
for uniform appearance.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch up shop applied
finishes restoring damaged or soiled areas.
Refer to the Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
Protection: Installer of architectural woodwork shall advise Contractor of final protection
and maintained conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or
deterioration at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 03/07 06400 - 6

SECTION 07200 - INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of insulation work is shown on drawings and indicated by provisions of this
section.
Applications of insulation specified in this section include the following:
Blanket type building insulation
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Thermal Conductivity: Thicknesses indicated are for thermal conductivity (k value at 75
degrees F or 24 degrees C) specified for each material. Provide adjusted thicknesses as
directed for equivalent use of material having a different thermal conductivity. Where
insulation is identified by "R" value, provide thickness required to achieve indicated
value.
Fire and Insurance Ratings: Comply with fire resistance, flammability and insurance
ratings indicated, and comply with regulations as interpreted by governing authorities.
Federal Specifications: Where compliance with FS standard is indicated, specified
requirements for marking individual boards/batts/blankets are waived, provided
packages of units are labeled to show compliance.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions
for each type of insulation and vapor barrier material required.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
General Protection: Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet,
soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for
handling, storage and protection during installation.
Protection for plastic insulation:
Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project
site ahead of installation time. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials
as rapidly as possible in each area of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
INSULATION 07200 - 1

MATERIALS:
Mineral/Glass Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation (M/GFB Ins): Inorganic (non-asbestos) fibers
formed with hinders into resilient flexible blankets or semi rigid batts; FS HH I 521, Type
as indicate, densities of not less than 0.5 lb. per cu. ft. for glass fiber units and not less
than 2.5 lb. per cu. ft. for mineral wool units, k value of 0.27; manufacturer's standard
lengths and widths as required to coordinate with spaces to be insulated; types as
follows:
Provide Type I - to be used above ceiling system, “Sonobatts, by Owens Corning or
equal with the following performance;
Kraft faced, Fungi-resistance (ASTM C 1338), Flame spread index of 10 or less,
Smoke developed index of 10. Provide an R-value of 30.
Provide Type II - to be used in metal stud exterior partitions, “Thermal FSK-25 Faced
Batts” by Certainteed or equal with the following characteristics:
Mildew and Fungi resistance, Maximum Flame Spread Index 25 or less, Smoke
Developed index of 50.
Provide an R-value of 19, when 6" studs are used and an R-value of 13 when 3-
5/8” studs are used.
Available Manufacturer's:
Certain Teed Products Corp.; Valley Forge, PA.
Clecon Inc.; Cleveland, OH.
Manville Bldg. Materials Corp.; Denver, Co.
Mizell Bros. Co.; Atlanta, GA.
Owens Corning Fiberglass Corp.; Toledo, OH.
Provide sound attenuation blankets at interior metal stud partitions. Refer to Section
07201 for more information.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSPECTION AND PREPARATION:
Installer must examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work is to be
performed, and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not
proceed with insulation work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to Installer.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor barriers, including
removal of projections which might puncture vapor retarders.
INSTALLATION
GENERAL:
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each
case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions,
consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before
proceeding with work.
Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which
interfere with placement.
INSULATION 07200 - 2

Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or
required to make up total thickness.
CAVITY - WALL AND MASONRY-CELL INSULATION:
On units of plastic insulation, install small pads of adhesive spaced approximately 1'-0"
o.c. both ways on inside face, as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of
insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted
tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside width of masonry or other construction
as shown.
Wedge insulation from outside wythe of construction with small fragments of masonry
materials spaced 2' -0" o.c. both ways.
GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION:
Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with
adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support
of units.
Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, except
as otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for fire stopping.
Set reflective foil faced units accurately with air space in front of foil as shown. Provide
not less than 0.75" air space where possible.
Lap edges of sheets of vapor barrier not less than 4" so as to provide complete coverage
of protected areas.
PROTECTION:
General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from harmful weather
exposures and from possible physical abuses, where possible by non-delayed
installation of concealing work or, where that is not possible, by temporary covering or
enclosure. Installer shall advise Contractor of exposure hazards, including possible
sources of deterioration and fire hazards.
CLEAN-UP:
Remove and dispose of excess insulation, wrappings and other waste materials.
END OF SECTION 07200
INSULATION 07200 - 3

SECTION 07201 - SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
SCOPE
A. Perform all work required completing the Sound Attenuation Blanket Installation as
indicated by the Contract Documents and furnish all supplementary items necessary
for their proper installation.
B. The requirements of Division 0 - "Bidding and Contract Requirements" and Division 1
- "General Requirements" of this Project Manual shall apply to all work required for
this Section.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's literature and mark sufficiently to indicate
compliance with these specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT/MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS
A. A specific product or material manufactured by any of the following listed
manufacturers is "acceptable" (not "approved") only if the specific product or material
can evidence exact compliance with the Contract Documents.
1. Owens/Corning Fiberglass Corp.;
2. Forty-eight Insulations, Inc.
3. Manville
4. Certain Teed Corporation
5. United States Gypsum
B. Refer to Section 01630 - Substitutions and Product Options for manufacturers not
listed above.
MATERIALS
A. INSULATION: Sound Attenuation Blanket, 3 5/8” thickness for 4” partition and 6 ½”
thick for 6" partition, unless otherwise indicated. Rated noncombustible when tested
per ASTM E136.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
INSTALLATION
A. Install at metal stud wall locations indicated.
B. Install in exact accordance with manufacturer's latest published requirements,
specifications and details, and as indicated.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect all finished surfaces from damage or staining. Remove and replace all
damaged or stained products.
B. Remove excess materials and debris from site.
END OF SECTION 07201
SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS 07201 - 1

SECTION 07220 - ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide all labor, equipment, and materials to install rigid insulation, and
DensDeck Prime over deck substrates indicated on the drawings. Install
cants, crickets and saddles where indicated on drawings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 6 "Rough Carpentry"
B. Division 7 “Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples and product literature for all products listed.
B. Design Loads: Submit copy of minimum design load calculations
according to ASCE 7-02, Method 2 for Components and Cladding, sealed
by a Texas registered professional engineer. In no case shall the design
loads be taken to be less than those detailed in article 1.06 of this
specification.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened packages, dry,
undamaged, seals and labels intact.
B. Store all insulation delivered to the site in enclosed trailers.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation only when the weather conditions are in compliance with
the roof system limitations.
B. Protect the installed insulation from water penetration at the end of each
day's work.
C. Application of the roof system shall immediately follow the installation of
the roof insulation as it is installed.
1.06 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Uniform Wind Uplift Load Capacity
1. Installed roof system over 22 ga. steel decks, shall withstand
negative (uplift) design wind loading pressures complying with the
structural drawings. Attachment shall be installed exactly as given
in article 3.03.
a. Design Code: ASCE 7-02, Method 2 for Components and
ROOF AND DECK INSULATION 07220-1

Cladding.
Roof Area
Zone 1 - Field of roof
Zone 2 – Eaves and rakes
Zone 3 - Corners
Note 10’ wide wind perimeter
Design Uplift Pressure
- 18.7 psf
- 31.4 psf
- 47.3 psf
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. When a particular make or trade name is specified, it shall be indicative of
a standard required.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Polyisocyanurate Insulation Board: ASTM C 1289 Type II, Class 1.
3-inch. R-value, 18.5 LTTR. Provide in 4 ft. by 8 ft. sizes. ACFoam-II,
Atlas Roofing Corporation.
B. DensDeck Prime, G-P Gypsum, 1/2-inch. R-value, .30
2.03 RELATED MATERIALS
A. As indicated on plans.
B. Fasteners & Plates:
1. Steel Deck: CRHD fasteners with steel plates, Olympic Mfg.
C. Roof Board Joint Tape: Six (6) inches wide glass fiber mat with adhesive
compatible with insulation board facers.
D. Cant Strips: Fiberglass, Glass Cant.
E
As required by the membrane manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive roof and deck insulation and
associated work and conditions under which insulation will be installed.
Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
B. Verify deck and surfaces are clean, smooth, dry, free of depressions or
irregularities prior to beginning installation of materials.
C. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, penetrations or vents
through roof are solidly set, wood nailing strips are in place.
D. Verify all specifications related to Carpentry, have been followed prior to
ROOF AND DECK INSULATION 07220-2

3.02 PROTECTION
beginning installation of insulation. Beginning installation means
acceptance of substrate.
A. During execution of work covered by this Section, the Contractor shall
provide protection for roof insulation from water and wind penetration at
the end of each day's work.
B. Protect the roof insulation in areas that will receive excessive traffic with a
surface protection such as plywood.
C. All workmen shall wear clean, soft rubber-soled shoes for any application
work where they may be walking on the in-place insulation.
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Insulation board covered by DensDeck Prime shall be fully attached with
specified fastening system as listed below.
1. STEEL DECKS
a. Fasteners in FIELD, Zone 1 of the roof are placed 11 fasteners
per board.
b. Fasteners at PERIMETERS, Zone 2 of the roof are placed 17
fasteners per board.
c. Fasteners at CORNERS, Zone 3 of the roof are placed 22
fasteners per board.
d. Placement of any fastener from edge of insulation board shall
be a minimum of three inches, and a maximum of six (6)
inches.
Note: 10’ wide wind perimeter for Zone’s 2 & 3. .
B. Filler pieces of insulation require at least two fasteners per piece if size of
insulation is less than four square feet.
C. Offset joints of DensDeck with those of the Insulation. Minimum
penetration into deck shall be as recommended by the fastener
manufacturer. There is a one (1) inch minimum for metal.
D. All boards shall be cut and fitted where the roof deck intersects a vertical
surface. The boards shall be cut to fit a minimum of 1/4" away from the
vertical surface.
E. Cant Strips/Tapered Edge/Crickets: Install preformed 45-degree cant
strips at junctures of vertical surface. Install crickets where indicated on
the plans.
END OF SECTION
ROOF AND DECK INSULATION 07220-3

SECTION 07520 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENT
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
B. Section 06100 - “Rough Carpentry".
C. Section 07220 - “Roof and Deck Insulation".
D. Section 07600 - “Flashing and Sheet Metal".
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Modified bituminous sheet roofing work including but not limited to:
One-ply of torch-applied 110-mil thick dual fiberglass scrim, SBS
(styrene-butadiene-styrene) rubber modified base sheet, One-ply of torchapplied
195-mil thick SBS rubber, mineral surfaced, polyester/fiberglass
scrim reinforced, modified roof membrane. 195 mil Torch-applied SBS
mineral surfaced, polyester/fiberglass scrim reinforced, rubber modified
roof membrane flashings.
1.03 References: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic
designation only.
A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definitions of terms
related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this Section.
ASTM D 41 1994 Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,
Damproofing, and Waterproofing
ASTM D 2178
1997a Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing.
ASTM D4586 Type II Class I Asphalt Roof Cement.
ASTM D6162- III
ASTM D 5147
Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Using Polyester /Glass Fiber
Reinforcement
2001a Standard Test Methods for Sampling and
Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Material.
B. FACTORY MUTUAL GLOBAL RESEARCH, FACTORY MUTUAL
APPROVALS (FM) .
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-1

FM A/S4470
Class 1 Roof Covers
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire and Wind Uplift Rating: Provide modified bitumen roof system and
component materials that have been tested for application and slopes
indicated that have been tested and listed by Factory Mutual, Underwriters
Laboratories, Warnock Hersey or approved third party testing facility in
accordance with ASTM E108, Class A for external fire and have been
designed for listed wind loads in accordance with IBC 2006 and ASCE 7.
B. Provide roof-covering materials bearing Factory Mutual Classification
Marking on bundle, package, or container indicating that materials have
been produced under FM's Classification and Follow-up Service.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Roofing system manufacturer shall be ISO
9001 Certified and have a minimum of 10 years experience in
manufacturing modified bitumen roofing products in the United States.
Show evidence that the products and materials are manufactured in the
United States and that materials provided conform to all requirements
specified herein, and are chemically and physically compatible with each
other and are suitable for inclusion within the total roof system specified
herein. The Roofing System Manufacturer shall Indemnify the Architect for
attorney's fees, related expenses and judgments incurred through litigation
arising out of application or performance of the roof system, even if the
litigation is groundless, false or fraudulent. The Architect shall be
indemnified for a maximum aggregate sum of amount of $100,000.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer (Roofer) shall be specializing in Built-up
bituminous roof application with minimum 5 years experience and who is
currently certified by modified bituminous sheet roofing system
manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's roofing materials. Any
one or more of the following causes may be considered sufficient for the
disqualification of installer:
1. Lack of responsibility as revealed by either financial, experience or
equipment statements.
2. Lack of expertise as shown by past work and judged from the
standpoint of workmanship and performance history.
3. Uncompleted work under other contracts which, in the judgment of
the Owner, might hinder or prevent the prompt completion of
additional work if awarded.
4. Being in arrears on existing contracts, in litigation with an Owner,
or having defaulted on a previous contract.
C. Installer's Field Supervision: Installer to maintain a full-time
supervisor/foreman on job site during all phases of modified bituminous
sheet roofing work and at any time roofing work is in progress, proper
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-2

supervision of workmen shall be maintained. A copy of the Specifications
shall be in the possession of the supervisor/foreman at all times.
D. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to respond immediately to
correction of roof leakage during construction.
E. Pre-application Roofing Conference: Before scheduled commencement of
modified bitumen sheet roofing installation and associated work, meet at
Project site with Installer, installer of each component of associated work,
installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work,
installers of rooftop units and other work in and around roofing that must
precede or follow roofing work (including mechanical work if any),
Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other
representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work, including
test agencies, and governing authorities. Review foreseeable methods
and procedures related to roofing work, including but not necessarily
limited to the following:
1. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect
and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations,
and other preparatory work.
2. Review roofing system requirements (drawings, specifications, and
other contract documents).
3. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be
completed.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work
and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment,
and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
5. Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage
accounting procedures.
6. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures
for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of
temporary roofing (if not a mandatory requirement).
7. Record (Contractor) discussions of conference, including decisions
and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish copy of
record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements exist
at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be
resolved and set date for reconvening conference.
1.06 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. See Section 07220 Roof & Deck Insulation
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-3

B. Manufacturer's Certification: (Use form attached to end of this Section)
The Manufacturer's Certification Form must be signed by a corporate
officer of the roofing system manufacturer with the Corporate Seal affixed
thereto.
C. Product data for each type of product specified include manufacturer's
technical product data, installation instructions, and recommendations for
each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that
materials comply with specified requirements.
E. For all modified bituminous sheet roofing include independent test data
according to ASTM Designation D 5147-97 “Standard Test Methods for
Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Material”, substantiating
that materials comply with specified requirements.
F. Samples of the following:
Minimum, 3-by-5-inch samples of each colored modified bituminous
mineral surfaced cap sheet and flashing materials to be exposed as
finished roof surface.
G. Manufacturer's ISO 9001 Certification.
H. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit sample copy of specified roofing
manufacturer's “Thirty (30) Year Warranty".
I. Manufacture’s Indemnification Agreement.
J. Manufacturer’s Inspection Reports: The Roofing System Manufacturer will
provide, when the project is in progress the following:
1. Keeping the Architect informed as to the progress and quality of
the work as observed.
2. Provide jobsite inspections at least two (2) times a week.
3. Provide detailed weekly written reports to the Architect along with
digital photographs of work in progress. All reports and
photographs shall be descriptive of actual work in progress and be
presented in a pre-approved manner.
4. Reporting to the Architect in writing, any failure or refusal of the
Contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the
Contractor's attention.
5. Confirming, after completion of the project and based on
manufacturer's observations and tests, that manufacturer has
observed no application procedures in conflict with the
specifications other than those that may have been previously
reported.
1.08 INSURANCE CERTIFICATION
A. Preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-4

may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage
insurance on roofing and associated work.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site with seals and labels intact, in manufacturer's
original containers, dry and undamaged.
B. Store and handle roofing sheets in a dry, well-ventilated, weather-tight
place to ensure no possibility of significant moisture exposure.
C. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on pallets or other raised
surface. Stand all roll materials on end. Cover roll goods with a canvas
tarpaulin or other breathable material (not polyethylene)
D. Do not leave unused rolled goods on the roof overnight or when roofing
work is not in progress unless protected from weather and other moisture
sources.
E. Handle and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid significant
or permanent deflection of deck.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Condition Limitations: Do not apply roofing membrane during
inclement weather or when a 40% chance of precipitation is expected.
B. Do not apply roofing insulation or membrane to damp deck surface.
C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities
greater than can be weatherproofed during same day.
D. Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions will permit unit of Work to be installed in accordance with
manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements.
1.11 EQUIPMENT SAFEGUARDS
A. Proper equipment is to be used to heat roofing membranes. Torches
should be equipped with a pilot adjustment, flame height adjustment, 25 to
50 ft. of Approved or listed hose, pressure gauge and regulator. A spark
igniter should be used. Torch trolleys and multiple torch head machines
should be equipped with listed safety valves.
B. Safety caps are to be tied to all propane cylinders and installed on the
valves whenever cylinders are not in use. Carts used to transport propane
cylinders should be stable. Tall, narrow, standing cylinders should be
chained against walls or in proper carts.
C. The propane cylinder should be adequately sized for the torch used. If
frost buildup occurs on propane cylinders and the rate of vapor withdrawal
is no longer adequate for operating conditions, the cylinder should not be
placed on its side or heated with the torch flame. The hose should be
disconnected and a larger cylinder used. Liquid propane cylinders may be
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-5

of either the vapor withdrawal or liquid withdrawal type. With the vapor
withdrawal type, vapor is drawn off from the torch head. Vapor withdrawal
cylinders are equipped with female cylinder valves. Liquid withdrawal
cylinders transfer the liquid, via a siphon tube, from the cylinder to the
torch head where it is vaporized. Liquid withdrawal cylinders have male
cylinder valves, which may be equipped with adapters.
D. Frost buildup only occurs with vapor withdrawal cylinders. This buildup
can be the result of an undersized cylinder or low air temperatures. When
vapor is dawn off more quickly than it is replaced, heat is absorbed and
frost buildup occurs on the outside of the cylinder. Vapor pressure then
further declines. Consequently, liquid withdrawal cylinders are preferred.
However, if vapor withdrawal cylinders are used, or if the temperatures are
low (below 20°F, -7°C), 40 or 100 lb (18.2 or 45.5 kg) cylinders should be
used with larger torches (such as those used in the field of the roof).
E. Equipment should be thoroughly inspected and repaired or replaced as
needed. Propane cylinders should be inspected for dents. If dents larger
than 1 in. (25 mm) in diameter are found, the cylinder should be replaced.
Torch and cylinder connectors should be visually inspected and checked
for leaks with soap and water solution. An open flame should not be used
to test for leaks.
F. Leaky equipment should not be used. Regulators adjustments and
pressure gauges should be checked to assure they are operable. The
vent on the regulator should be checked to assure it is not blocked. If an
unstable flame occurs (one which roars loudly and tends to blows itself
out), the equipment should be repaired or replaced immediately.
G. Propane cylinders should not be hoisted by their valves. Straps placed
around the cylinders should be utilized.
H. A fire watch should be conducted for at least one hour after torch work has
been completed. All roof areas worked on should be checked for hot
spots and signs of smoldering. If available, infrared roof scanners should
be used. The inside of the building should also be inspected for signs of
fire and smoke. All “hot spots” or fires, even if extinguished, should be
reported to the fire department. Smoldering may continue after
extinguishment, may take place for hours before flaming begins, and may
take place in areas unsuspected by the layman.
1.12 FIRE EXTINGUISHING EQUIPMENT
A. There should be at least one 10 lb (4.5 kg) multipurpose dry chemical
portable extinguisher within 20 ft. (6.1 m) horizontal travel distance of
torch-applied roofing equipment. For large roof areas, additional
protection such as charged hose lines or additional extinguishers should
be provided as practical.
1.13 FUEL HANDING SAFEGUARDS
A. Fuel containers, burners and related appurtenances of roofing equipment
in which liquefied petroleum gas is used for heating should comply with
NFPA58, Standard for Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-6

Gases.
B. All fuel containers should be located at least 10 ft. (3 m) from the burner
flame or at least 2 ft. (0.6 m) away when properly insulated from heat or
flame.
1.14 INSTALLATION SAFEGUARDS
A. The flame from a hand-held torch should be constantly moved from side to
side. The exposed outer surface of the membrane coil should be heated
until a slight sheen develops.
B. Caution should be used when working around roof openings, penetrations
or flashings. Wood nailers, cant strips and metal flashing should not come
in direct contact with the flame of the torch. Small detail torches should be
used to heat the underside of the membrane away from these areas
before securement.
C. The torch should not be used in areas where the flame impingement
cannot be fully viewed. Back-heat and flop the material when flame is not
visible.
D. Extreme caution is to be used near penetrations such as exhaust vents.
Air conditioning units and ventilating fans should be shut down before
torch work is done in surrounding areas.
E. Feather seams around details with heated trowel.
F. Expansion joints should be filled with mineral wool or ceramic fiber with a
steel cover plate below.
G. No full-time torches should be used under any circumstances.
H. A torch stand is to be used to direct the flame upward when momentarily
not in use.
I. The cylinder valve should be closed to burn off propane in the line before
shutting of the torch head. The gas supply should be shut off whenever a
propane odor is detected.
J. Torches should not be used near gas lines, electrical wires or flammable
liquids during roof construction.
K. When foam plastic, kraft-faced glass fiber or wood fiber insulation or cant
strips, or plastic fasteners are to be used, they should be covered with a
minimum 40 lb base sheet adhered with hot asphalt before the torch
applied membrane is installed.
L. Torch flames should not come in contact with exposed plastic roofing
cement.
1.15 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-7

A. Sequence installation of modified bituminous sheet roofing with related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that roof assemblies,
including roof accessories, flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are protected
against damage from effects of weather, corrosion, and adjacent
construction activity. Phased construction will not be accepted.
1.16 WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Warranty: “Thirty (30) year NDL Warranty", signed by a
corporate officer of the corporation of modified bitumen sheet roofing
system manufacturer, will pay all authorized cost or repair to the roof
membrane system necessary to stop any leaks which occur during a Thirty
(30) year period from the date of completion..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. When a particular performance standard is specified, it shall be indicative
of a minimum standard required. Products not meeting these minimum
performance requirements, shall not be bid and will not be considered.
B. Provide as listed or approved substitution. All request for substitution must
be submitted at least 7 DAYS prior to bidding and shall include the
Substitution Request Form attached to the end of this Section.
C. Obtain primary products, including each type of roofing sheet, bitumen,
membrane flashings from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary
products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use
with roofing system specified.
2.02 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41, V.O.C compliant.
B. Asphalt Roofing Mastic: ASTM D 4586, Type II, V.O.C compliant.
2.03 SHEET MATERIALS
A. SBS Modified Torch Base Sheet: SBS (styrene-butadiene-styrene),
rubber membrane, reinforced with dual fiberglass scrim designed
for torching applications, conforming to the following minimum
performance requirements according to ASTM D-5147 @ 77° F:
Machine
Cross Machine
Direction
Direction
Tensile Strength 210 lbf/in. 210.lbf/in.
Elongation 4.0% 4.0%
Tear Strength 250.lbf 250.lbf
Low Temp. Flex.
Passes -10° F
Thickness
110 mils
B. Modified Bitumen Cap Sheet Membrane: ASTM D-6163, Type III,
Starburst mineral surfaced SBS (styrene-butadiene-styrene), rubber
modified roof membrane; reinforced with a dual fiberglass scrim designed
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-8

for torching applications, conforming to the following minimum
performance requirements according to ASTM D-5147 @ 77° F:
Machine
Cross Machine
Direction
Direction
Tensile Strength 210 lbf/in. 210.lbf/in.
Elongation 6.0% 6.0%
Tear Strength 250.lbf 250.lbf
Low Temp. Flex.
Passes -20° F
Thickness
195 mils
D. Flashing Membrane: Modified Membrane: ASTM D-6163, Type III,
Starburst mineral surfaced SBS (styrene-butadiene-styrene), rubber
modified roof membrane; reinforced with a dual fiberglass scrim designed
for torching applications, conforming to the following minimum
performance requirements according to ASTM D-5147 @ 77° F:
Machine
Cross Machine
Direction
Direction
Tensile Strength 210 lbf/in. 210.lbf/in.
Elongation 6.0% 6.0%
Tear Strength 250.lbf 250.lbf
Low Temp. Flex.
Passes -20° F
Thickness
195 mils
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Penetration Seals: Chem Curb System, Chem Link Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive modified bitumen sheet roofing
system and associated work and conditions under which roofing will be
installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Cooperate with manufacturer, inspection and test agencies engaged or
required to perform services in connection with installing modified bitumen
sheet roofing system.
B. Protect other work from spillage of modified bitumen roofing materials, and
prevent liquid materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors.
Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of modified
bituminous sheet roofing system work.
C. Code Compliance: Where required, install and test modified bitumen sheet
roofing system to comply with governing regulations and specified
requirements.
D. Coordinate installing roofing system components so that insulation and
roofing plies are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed overnight.
Provide cut offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed ply sheets and
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-9

insulation with a course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed with
roofing cement. Remove cut offs immediately before resuming work.
E. Apply roofing materials as specified herein unless recommended
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. Keep roofing materials dry
before and during application. Do not permit phased construction.
Complete application of roofing plies, cap sheet and flashing in a
continuous operation. Begin and apply only as much roofing in one day as
can be completed that same day.
F. Water Cutoffs: At end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed
edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and any insulation. Provide
temporary covering of two plies of No. 15 roofing felt set in adhesive;
remove at beginning of next day's work. Seal off flutes in metal decking
along cut off edge. Pull membrane free or cut to expose the insulation
when resuming work, and remove the insulation sheets used for fill-in.
3.03 TORCH BASE SHEET UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install one layer of SBS Torch Base Sheet to properly prepared substrate
where indicated, Shingle in proper direction to shed water on each area of
roofing.
B. To a suitable substrate, lay out the roll in the course to be followed and
unroll six (6) feet.
C. Using a roofing torch, heat the surface of the coiled portion until the burnoff
backer melts away. At this point, the material is hot enough to lay into
the substrate. Progressively unroll the sheet while heating and press
down with your foot to insure a proper bond.
D. After the major portion of the roll is bonded, re-roll the first six (6) feet and
bond it in a similar fashion.
E. Repeat this operation with subsequent rolls with side laps of four (4)
inches and end laps of eight inches.
F. Give each lap a finishing touch by passing the torch along the joint and
spreading the melted bitumen evenly with a rounded trowel to insure a
smooth, tight seal.
G. Extend underlayment two (2) inches beyond top edges of cants at wall and
projection bases.
H. Install base flashing ply to all perimeter and projections details.
3.04 MINERAL SURFACED SBS MODIFIED MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Over the SBS Torch Base Sheet underlayment, lay out the roll in the course to
be followed and unroll six (6) feet. Seams for the top layer of modified
membrane will be staggered over the SBS Torch Base Sheet seams.
B. Using a roofing torch, heat the surface of the coiled portion until the burn-off
backer melts away. At this point, the material is hot enough to lay into the
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-10

substrate. Progressively unroll the sheet while heating and press down with
your foot to insure a proper bond.
C. After the major portion of the roll is bonded, re-roll the first six (6) feet and
bond it in a similar fashion.
D. Repeat this operation with subsequent rolls with side laps of four (4) inches
and end laps of eight (8) inches.
E. Give each lap a finishing touch by passing the torch along the joint and
spreading the melted bitumen evenly with a rounded trowel to insure a
smooth, tight seal.
3.05 FLASHING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. All base flashings are to be installed and completed on a daily basis. No
condition should exist that will permit moisture entering behind, around, or
under the roof or flashing membrane.
B. Prepare all walls, penetrations and expansion joints to be flashed and
where shown on the drawings, with asphalt primer at the rate of .75 to 1
gallon per square. Allow primer to dry tack free.
C. The heat fused flashing membrane will be adhered to an underlying base
ply of Self-Adhering SBS Fire Retardant membrane where indicated, or
Torch Base Sheet nailed-off at all vertical surfaces where shown on the
drawings.
D. The entire sheet of flashing membrane must be heated to the point when
surface bitumen melts and begins to flow. Both surfaces along the lap
areas shall be heated. The heated area will immediately be worked into
place and securely bonded.
E. Seal all vertical laps of flashing membrane with an additional ply of 8-inch
wide flashing membrane. All laps must be tested with a round nosed
trowel putting pressure against the side lap to insure that a complete,
positive bond has been achieved and to protect against a superficially
closed lap.
F. After the laps have been tested, and a complete positive bond has been
achieved, the applicator shall heat the seam edge and trowel along the
seam edge. Troweling shall continue until a sloped, beveled edge has
been produced.
G. Secure top of flashing membrane with termination bar and fasten 8-inches
o. c.
H. Factory fabricated flashings, cap flashings and similar work to be
coordinated with modified bitumen roofing work are specified in other
Sections.
I. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including piping vents to be
coordinated with modified bituminous roofing system work, are specified in
other Sections.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-11

3.06 PROTECTION
A. During execution of work covered by this Section, the Contractor shall
provide protection for equipment, materials, inside and outside the building
against falling debris, sparks, and water. Protection shall be provided in a
manner to minimize interference, interruption, and inconvenience to other
trades.
B. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
C. All workmen shall wear clean, soft rubber-soled shoes for any application
work where they may be walking on the in-place roofing membrane.
Precautions shall be taken to protect the membrane and to maintain a
clean appearance. Protect roofing during remainder of construction period.
D. At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will
in no way affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing and prepare a written
report, with copies to Owner, describing nature and extent of deterioration
or damage found.
3.07 FINAL INSPECTION
A. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with
Installer, installer of associated work. Owner, Architect, roofing system
manufacturer's representative and other representatives directly
concerned with performance of roofing system.
B. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges
as well as flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment.
List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to
each party attending.
C. The Owner, Architect and Roofing System Manufacturer reserve the right
to request a certified photographic and recorded thermographic scan of
the roof during final inspection to determine if any damp or wet materials
have been installed. The thermographic scan and photographic records
shall be provided by the Roofing Contractor free of charge.
D. If core cuts verify the presence of damp or wet materials, the Roofing
Contractor shall be required to replace the damaged areas at his own
expense.
E. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at
time of above inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
F. The Contractor is to notify the Owner upon completion of corrections.
G. Following the final inspection, acceptance will be made in writing by the
material manufacturer.
3.08 CLEANING
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-12

A. Remove drippage of the bitumen adhesives from all walls, windows, floors,
ladders, and finished surfaces.
C. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other source
of soiling caused by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces
for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions.
Roofing System Manufacturer's Certification Form
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-13

Project:
Catholic War Veterans Park
Service Center Building Improvements and Renovation
Mission, Texas
_____________________________________________________Certifies that;
(Roofing System Manufacturer)
_______________________________________, is currently approved by the
(Roofing Contractor)
Roofing System Manufacturer to install the specified roofing system for the referenced
project and that the Roofing System Manufacturer has a minimum of 10 years experience
in manufacturing roofing products in the United States and is currently ISO 9001 certified
to by the International Organization for Standardization.
The Roofing System Manufacturer has reviewed all Bidding Documents in their entirety
and approved of them as written and drawn.
Roofing System Manufacturer will provide a minimum of two weekly field inspection
services by a full time employee of the manufacturer, during, and until all roof
construction work is completed and accepted by the Architect and Owner.
The Roofing System Manufacturer shall Indemnify the Architect for attorney's fees,
related expenses and judgments incurred through litigation arising out of application or
performance of the roof system, even if the litigation is groundless, false or fraudulent.
The Architect shall be indemnified for a maximum aggregate sum of amount of $100,000.
Roofing System Manufacturer will provide the manufacturer’s Thirty (30) year guarantee
as stipulated in the Contract Documents upon completion of the project.
By: _________________________________________________
Name
Its ____________________________
Title
(Affix Corporate Seal)
Date ________________
ROOFING SUBSTITUTION REQUEST - BIDDING PHASE (Page 1 of 2)
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-14

PROJECT:
IDEA PUBLIC SCHOOLS
South Flores Campus Phase I
Campus Additions San Antonio, Texas
TO:
Gomez Mendez Saenz Architects
1150 Paredes Line Road
Brownsville, Texas 78521
FROM:
_________________________________________________________________
Bidder/Supplier hereby requests acceptance of the following product or system as a
substitution in accord with provisions of the Bidding Documents:
1. SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM: Substitution request for (Generic
Description)
_________________________________________________________________
Specification Section No.________________
Article(s)___________________
Para.(s)___________________________
2. SUPPORTING DATA: All items must be attached for verification
* Product data, description of product(s)
* Factory Mutual 4470 Certification
* Independent Test Data according to ASTM-5147 @ 77 0 F.
* Roofing System Manufacturer’s ISO Certification
* Roofing System Manufacturer’s Certification form
* Unexecuted copy of manufacturer’s Warranty & Indemnification Agreement
* Sample(s) attached.
3. PREVIOUS INSTALLATIONS: Identification of three (3) similar projects on which
proposed substitution was used. Include copies of issued manufacturer’s
warranty. Attach List Indicating;
* Project
* Address
* Architect
* Owner
* Date Installed
* Roof System
4. EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION: __ No __ Yes (If yes, explain):
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
5. BIDDER'S/SUPPLIER'S STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PROPOSED
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07520-15

SUBSTITUTION TO CONTRACT REQUIREMENT:
I/We have investigated the proposed substitution. I / We:
* Believe that it is equal or superior in all respects to specified product,
except as stated above; and
* Will provide the same warranty as specified for specified product; and
* Have included complete implications of the substitution as specified; and
* Will pay redesign and other costs caused by the substitution which
subsequently become apparent; and
* Will pay costs to modify all other parts of the Work as may be needed, to
make all parts of the Work complete and functioning resulting from the
substitution.
Bidder/Supplier:_________________________________________________
By:__________________________________________________________
Date____________________________
Answer all questions and complete all blanks -- use "NA" if not applicable.
END OF SECTION
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07550-16

SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the
Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections
apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide all labor, equipment, and materials to fabricate and install
the following.
1. Edge strip and flashing.
2. Fascia and trim.
3. Coping cap at parapets.
4. Gutters & Downspouts
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Division 06 Section Rough Carpentry
2. Division 07 Section Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
3. Division 07 Section Roof Accessories
4. Division 07 Section Roof & Deck Insulation
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
Coated (galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
2. ASTM A792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55%
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
3. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and
Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
4. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and
Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and
Tubes.
5. ASTM D692 Standard Specification for Coarse Aggregate
for Bituminous Paving Mixtures.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600-1

B. American National Standards Institute and Single Ply Roofing
Institute
(ANSI/SPRI)
1. ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Testing and Certification Listing of Shop
Fabricated Edge Metal
C. Warnock Hersey International, Inc., Middleton, WI (WH)
D. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FMRC)
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
(SMACNA)
1. Latest Edition Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
G. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)
1. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual
H. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
1. ASCE 7-05 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Product Data:
1. Provide manufacturer's specification data sheets for each
product.
2. Metal material characteristics and installation
recommendations.
3. Submit color chart prior to material ordering and/or
fabrication so that equivalent colors to those specified can
be approved.
B. Samples: Submit two (2) samples, illustrating typical metal edge,
coping, gutters, fascia extenders for material and finish.
C. Shop Drawings
1. For manufactured and shop fabricated gravel stops, fascia,
scuppers, and all other sheet metal fabrications.
2. Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details,
fastening methods, flashing, terminations, and installation
details.
3. Indicate type, gauge and finish of metal.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600-2

D. Specimen Warranty: Provide an unexecuted copy of the warranty
specified for this Project, identifying the terms and conditions
required of the Manufacturer and the Owner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A. Design Loads: Any material submitted must be accompanied by a
report .This report shall show that the submitted equal meets the
wind uplift and perimeter attachment requirements according to
ASCE 7-05 and ANSI/SPRI ES-1. Submitals without test data or
approval will be rejected for non-conformance.
B. Mill production reports certifying that the steel thicknesses are
within allowable tolerances of the nominal or minimum thickness or
gauge specified.
C. Certification of work progress inspection. Refer to Quality
Assurance Article below.
D. Certifications:
1. Submit certification that the perimeter/edge metal products
being used on this project have been tested according to
ANSI/SPRI ES-1 criteria. Certification submitted must be
provided by either NRCA, Independent Test Agency or the
perimeter/edge metal manufacturer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engage an experienced roofing contractor specializing in sheet
metal flashing work with a minimum of five (5) years experience.
B. Maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is on the job-site at all
times during installation. Foreman must have a minimum of five (5)
years experience with the installation of similar system to that
specified.
C. Upon request fabricator/installer shall submit work experience and
evidence of financial responsibility. The Owner's representative
reserves the right to inspect fabrication facilities in determining
qualifications.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or
packages with labels intact and legible.
B. Stack pre-formed and pre-finished material to prevent twisting,
bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets
to ensure drainage.
C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or
staining.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600-3

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Determine that work of other trades will not hamper or conflict with
necessary fabrication and storage requirements for pre-formed
metal edge system.
1.9 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Wind Uplift Pressures: Metal edge system must meet minimum design load
pressures as determined by ASCE 7. Provide completed calculations to show
ANSI/SPRI ES-1 test results meet the minimum wind uplift pressures.
B. Thermal expansion and contraction:
1. Completed metal edge flashing system shall be capable of
withstanding expansion and contraction of components
caused by changes in temperature without buckling,
producing excess stress on structure, anchors or fasteners,
or reducing performance ability.
1.10 WARRANTIES
A. Owner shall receive one (1) warranty from manufacturer covering
all of the following criteria. Multiple warranties are not acceptable.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
1. Pre-finished metal material shall require a written twenty
(20)-year non-prorated warranty covering fade, chalking and
film integrity. The material shall not show a color change
greater than 5 NBS color units per ASTM D2244 or chalking
excess of 8 units per ASTM D659. If either occurs material
shall be replaced per warranty, at no cost to the Owner.
2. Changes: Changes or alterations in the edge metal system
without prior written consent from the manufacturer shall
render the system unacceptable for a warranty.
3. Warranty shall commence on date of substantial completion
or final payment, whichever is agreed by contract.
4. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a notarized
written warranty assuring that all sheet metal work including
caulking and fasteners to be watertight and secure for a
period of two years from the date of final acceptance of the
building. Warranty shall include all materials and
workmanship required to repair any leaks that develop, and
make good any damage to other work or equipment caused
by such leaks or the repairs thereof.
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Common Product Requirements."
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600-4

B. Comply with all manufacturer and contractor/fabricator quality and
performance criteria specified in Part 1.
2.3 ACCEPTABLE FABRICATORS
A. Any fabricator which has been certified by the NRCA (National Roofing
Contractors Association) to fabricate their ANSI/SPRI ES-1 tested profiles on
their Gravel-Stop, Metal Edge, Fascia and Coping Cap products.
B. Provide a product carrying a signed and sealed Performance Test Report
from a testing company for ANSI/SPRI ES-1 on their Gravel-Stop, Metal
Edge, Fascia and Coping Cap products.
C. Any fabricator with a Gravel-Stop, Metal Edge, Fascia and Coping Cap
products that has been tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ES-1
standards. Proof of this testing must be provided via a report signed and
sealed by a qualified third party testing agency. This report shall show that
the submitted equal meets the wind uplift and perimeter attachment
requirements according to ASCE 7-05 and ANSI/SPRI ES-1. Substitution
requests submitted without licensed engineer approval will be rejected for
non-conformance
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Materials:
1. Exposed base metal material:
a. Aluminum, ASTM B209, alloy 3105-H14, in thickness
of .040" nom. or .050" nom. or .063" nom.
2. Unexposed base metal material:
a. Zinc-coated steel, ASTM A653, coating designation
G-90, in thickness of 0.0299 nom./ 22 gauge, 36" to
48" by coil length, chemically treated, commercial or
lock-forming quality.
3. Minimum gauge of steel or thickness of Aluminum to be
specified in accordance with Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's
National Association, Inc. recommendations.
B. Finishes:
1. Exposed surfaces for coated panels:
a. Steel Finishes: fluorocarbon finish. Epoxy primer
baked both sides, .2-.25 mils thickness as approved
by finish coat manufacturer.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600-5

Weathering finish as referred by National Coil Coaters
Association (NCCA).
PROPERTY TEST METHOD
FLUOROCARBON*
Pencil ASTM D3363 HB-H
Hardness
NCCA II-2
Bend ASTM D-4145 O-T
NCCA II-19
Cross-Hatch ASTM D3359
of
Adhesion
adhesion
no loss
Gloss ASTM D523 25+/-
5%
(60° angle)
Reverse ASTM D2794 no
cracking or
Impact
loss of
adhesion
Nominal
Thickness
ASTM D1005
Primer 0.2
mils
Topcoat 0.8
mils
TOTAL 1.0
mils
* Subject to minimum quantity requirements
b. Color shall be selected by Architect from standard
colors.
2. Exposed and unexposed surfaces for mill finish flashing,
fascia, and coping cap, shall be as shipped from the mill.
3. Exposed and unexposed surfaces for anodized aluminum
flashing, fascia, and coping cap, shall be as shipped from
mill.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Primer: Zinc chromate type.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600-6

B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586
C. Sealant: Tuff-Stuff One part polyurethane sealant.
D. Underlayment: ASTM D2178, No15 asphalt saturated roofing felt.
E. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.
F. Fasteners:
1. Corrosion resistant screw fastener as recommended by
metal manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners same as
flashing metal.
2. Fastening shall conform to Factory Mutual requirements or
as stated on section details, whichever is more stringent.
G. Gutter and Downspout Anchorage Devices: Material as specified for
system.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION, GENERAL
A. Refer to Division 07 Section Common Work Results for Thermal
and Moisture Protection.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Isolate metal products from dissimilar metals, masonry or concrete
with bituminous paint, tape, or slip sheet. Use gasketed fasteners
where required to prevent corrosive reactions.
3.3 GENERAL
A. Secure fascia to wood nailers at the bottom edge with a continuous
cleat.
B. Fastening of metal to walls and wood blocking shall comply with
building code standards.
C. All accessories or other items essential to the completeness of
sheet metal installation, whether specifically indicated or not, shall
be provided and of the same material as item to which applied.
D. Allow sufficient clearances for expansion and contraction of linear
metal components. Secure metal using fasteners as required by the
system. Exposed face fastening will be rejected.
3.4 INSPECTION
A. Verify that curbs are solidly set and nailing strips located.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600-7

B. Perform field measurements prior to fabrication.
C. Coordinate work with work of other trades.
D. Verify that substrate is dry, clean and free of foreign matter.
E. Commencement of installation shall be considered acceptance of
existing conditions.
3.5 SHOP-FABRICATED SHEET METAL
A. Metal work shall be shop fabricated to configurations and forms in
accordance with recognized sheet metal practices.
B. Hem exposed edges.
C. Angle bottom edges of exposed vertical surfaces to form drip.
D. Lap corners with adjoining pieces fastened and set in sealant.
E. Form joints for gravel stop fascia system, coping cap with a 3/8"
opening between sections. Back the opening with an internal
drainage plate formed to the profile of fascia piece.
F. Install sheet metal to comply with referenced ANSI/SPRI, SMACNA
and NRCA standards.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean installed work in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Replace damaged work than cannot be restored by normal cleaning
methods.
3.8 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Remove and properly dispose of waste products generated.
Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
3.09 FINAL INSPECTION
A. At completion of installation and associated work, meet with
Contractor, Architect, installer, installer of associated work, Owner,
roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other
representatives directly concerned with performance of roofing
system.
B. Inspect work and flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and
other equipment. List all items requiring correction or completion
and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600-8

C. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time
above inspection as required to a produce an installation which is
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion
and according to warranty requirements.
D. Notify the Contractor upon completion of corrections.
E. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance
of the installation from the roofing system manufacturer.
F. Immediately correct roof leakage during construction. If the
Contractor does not respond within twenty-four (24) hours, the
Owner will exercise rights to correct the Work under the terms of
the Conditions of the Contract.
END OF SECTION
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07600-9

SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings and by provisions of
this section.
Refer to Division 8 sections glazing requirements; not work of this section.
Refer to sections of Division 15 and 16 for joint sealers in mechanical and electrical
work; not work of this section.
General Performance: Except as otherwise indicated, joint sealers are required to
establish and maintain airtight and waterproof continuous seals on a permanent basis,
within recognized limitations of wear and as indicated for each application. Failures of
installed sealers to comply with this requirement will be recognized as failures of
materials and workmanship.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, handling/installation/curing
instructions, and performance tested data sheets for each elastomeric product required.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of liquid sealants under
unfavorable weather conditions. Install elastomeric sealants when temperature is in
lower third of temperature range recommended by manufacturer for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
General Sealer Requirements: Provide colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as
selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Select materials for
compatibility with joint surfaces and other indicated exposures, and except as otherwise
indicated select modules of elasticity and hardness or grade recommended by
manufacturer for each application indicated. Where exposed to foot traffic, select nontracking
materials of sufficient strength and hardness to withstand stiletto heel traffic
without damage or deterioration of sealer system.
Sealant: (with expansion and compression capability of plus or minus 50%).
Silpruf Silicone weatherproofing sealant: General Electric
790 Building Sealant: Down Corning
Caulking:
NP -1 Sonneborn
Install at all locations where notes as "caulk" or required to provide a neat joint.
Expansion Joint Sealer:
ACMA Seal: ACME Highway Products Corp., Buffalo, N.Y. 14207
JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1

System: Series “J”, Style No. 2-602, 1-3/4" wide x 2" high.
Install with manufacturer’s ACMA Lubricant Adhesive.
Foam Joint Filters:
Expanded Polyethylene Joint Filler (ExPe -JF): Provide flexible, compressible, closed -
cell, polyethylene of not less than 10 psi compression deflection (25%) except provide
higher compression deflection strength as may be necessary to withstand installation
forces and provide proper support for sealants; surface water absorption of not more
than 0.1 lbs. per sq. ft.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
Sealant backer Rod (S -Br): Provide compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam,
polyurethane foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam,
neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material as
recommended by sealant manufacturer for backup of an compatibility with sealant.
Where used with hot -applied sealant, provide heat -resistant type which will not be
deteriorated by sealant application temperature as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Installer must examine substrates, (joint surfaces) and conditions under which joint
sealer work is to be performed, and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory
conditions. Do not proceed with joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.
JOINT PREPARATION:
Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of gaskets, sealant or caulking
compounds. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which
could interfere with seal of gasket or bond of sealant or caulking compound. Etch
concrete and masonry join surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated, and where recommended by sealant
manufacturer. Confine primer/sealer to areas of sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
INSTALLATION:
Install at exterior doors, glass frames (both interior and exterior of frames), exterior
louvers, windows, exterior joints in walls and other locations where indicated or required
to provide weather tight joints. Indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration
occurs.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Produce beads of proper width and depth.
Tool as recommended by manufacturer.
Remove surplus materials.
Study drawings and furnish and install proper materials at each point where called for on
the drawings plus all other points essential to continued integrity of the watertight barrier.
CURE AND PROTECTION
Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions
JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2

and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and
surface durability. Advise the Contractor of procedures required for cure and protection
of joint sealer during construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or
damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at time of substantial completion.
Cure and protect sealants in a manner which will minimize increases in modules of
elasticity and other accelerated aging effects. Replace or restore sealant which are
damaged or deteriorated during construction period.
END OF SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3

SECTION 08100 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of standard steel doors and frames is indicated and scheduled on drawings.
Custom hollow metal work is specified in other Division 8 sections.
Builder's hardware is specified elsewhere in Division 8. Galvanized
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended
Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames” (SDI 100) and as herein specified.
Manufacturer: Provide standard steel doors and frames by a single firm specializing in
production of this type of work.
Provide steel doors and frames by one of the following:
Texas Door Products
Ceco Corp.
Republic Builders Prod. Corp.
Steel Craft Mfg. Co.
Tex Steel Corp.
Curries
Deansteel
Provide galvanized and insulated doors and frames at exterior conditions only.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for fabrication and installation,
including data substantiating that products comply with requirements.
Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames.
Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at
openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish
hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage
and accessory items.
Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and
openings as those on contract drawings.
Label Construction Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification for oversize fire
rated doors and frames that each assembly has been constructed with materials and
methods equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Deliver hollow metal work in cartons or crated to provide protection during transit and job
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 1

storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors.
Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired
provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to
Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.
Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on wood sills at least 4"
high, or otherwise store on floors in manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid
use of non vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If
cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4"
spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
Hot Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled,
complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568.
Cold Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366
and ASTM A 568.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel.
Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot dip galvanized
items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as
applicable.
Shop Applied Paint:
Primer: Rust inhibitive enamel or paint, either air drying or baking, suitable as a base for
specified finish paints.
FABRICATION, GENERAL:
Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from
defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's
plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before
shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site.
Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units,
from only cold rolled steel.
Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and
moldings from either cold rolled or hot rolled steel (at fabricator's option).
Finish Hardware Preparation:
Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in
accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and template provided by hardware
supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A 115 series specifications for
door and frame preparation for hardware.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 2

Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface applied hardware. Drilling and tapping
for surface applied finish hardware may be done at project site.
Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not shown, in
accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder’s Hardware," published by Door
and Hardware Institute.
Shop Painting:
Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including
galvanized surfaces.
Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials
before application of paint.
Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished
surface ready to receive finish paint.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS:
Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on drawings or schedules.
1 3/4" doors
Stiles
16 ga.
Panels
16 ga.
Hinge Tap Plate
9 ga.
Hinges 1 1/2 pair 4 1/2 x 4 1/2
full mortise template typ
Lock reinforcement 3/32" steel
Lock Set
See Hardware Schedule
Door Closer Reinforcement 9 ga.
Insulated
PolyurethaneR-5
Door Louvers:
Provide sight proof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of
inverted V shaped or Y shaped blades formed of 24 gage cold rolled steel set into 20
gage steel frame.
For fire rated openings, provide tightly fitted, spring loaded, automatic closing louvers
with operable blades, equipped with fusible links, arranged so that metal overlaps metal
at every joint.
STANDARD STEEL FRAMES:
Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other
openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal
fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
Frames shall be 16 gauge
Fabricate frames with metered corners, knocked down not acceptable.
Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 2 silencers on
strike jambs of single swing frames and 3 silencers on heads of double swing frames.
Glazing Stops: 16 ga. steel channel with pre drilled holes for flat heads of double sink
screws.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 3

Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gauge steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to
frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct
hardware operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frames are
to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to
proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION:
General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final
shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.
Placing frames:
Comply with provisions of SDI 105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel
Frames", unless otherwise indicated.
Except for frames located at in place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations,
place frames prior to construction at enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately
in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels.
Building in of anchors and grouting of frames is specified in Division 4.
At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent
construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.
Install fire rate frames in accordance with NFPA STD. No. 80.
In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels.
In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed
steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.
Door Installation:
Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI 100.
Place fire rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Prime Coat Touch up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air drying primer.
Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 4

wrappings from pre-finished doors.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel
doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION 08100
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 - 5

SECTION 08210 - WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on drawings and in schedules.
Types of doors required include the following:
Prefinished standard and fire rated type wood doors with flush faces.
Louvers for wood doors, including furnishing and installation, are specified under this
section. Louvers are to be furnished by mechanical contractor.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
NWMA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWMA Wood Flush Door
Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of ANSI/NWMA
I.S. 1 Series. For manufacturers not participating in NWMA Hallmark Program, a
certification of compliance may be substituted for marking of individual doors.
REFERENCES:
Comply with the applicable requirements of the following standards unless otherwise
indicated.
ANSI/AWMA I.S. 1, “Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors" published by
National Woodwork Manufacturers Associates (NWMA).
AWI Quality Standard: Section 1300 of "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standard" published by the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers (AWI).
Designations for grade and core construction under types of doors refer to this
standard.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation
instructions for each type of wood door.
Include certifications as may be required to show compliance with specifications.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,
elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data.
Samples: Submit samples for the following:
WOOD DOORS 08210 - 1

Factory Finished Doors: Submit 8" x 11" samples showing fully completed factory finish
on same veneer and edge construction that will be used on factory-finished doors.
Submit full range of samples from which selection can be made. Tinting stain may be
required at architect’s option in order to match finish on existing doors to remain.
Specific Product Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard
form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show photographing of
construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of NWMA.
1. All work in this Section shall be warranted by a FULL DOOR WARRANTY
(from the date of installation) against defect in materials and workmanship,
including the following:
a. Delamination in any degree.
b. Warp or twist of ¼” or more in any 3’6” x 7’0” section of a door.
c. Telegraphing of any part of core assembly through face to cause
surface variation of 1/100” or more in a 3” span.
d. Any defect which may, in any way, impair or affect performance of the
door for the purpose which it is intended. Replacement under this
warranty shall include hanging, installation of hardware, and finishing.
2. Periods of warranty after date or installation:
a. Interior solid core and mineral core Life of original installation.
3. Doors must be stored, finished, hung and maintained per manufacturers
recommendations set forth in their Full Door Warranty.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration. Comply with "On Site Care" recommendations of NWMA pamphlet "Care
and Finishing of Wood Doors" and with manufacturer's instructions and otherwise
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
VT Industries
Champions
Weyerhauser Company
Buell Door Company
All other door manufacturers must receive prior approval before allowed as substitute.
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
General: Provide wood doors complying with applicable requirements of NWMA I.S. 1
for kinds and types of doors indicated and as specified.
Face Panels: Manufacturer's standard 5 ply panels hot pressed, unless otherwise
indicated.
Exposed Surfaces: Provide kind shown or scheduled and as further specified.
Provide same exposed surface material on both faces of each door, unless
WOOD DOORS 08210 - 2

otherwise indicated.
Exposed edges shall be hardwood and compliment face veneer species.
GENERAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS:
Transom and Side Panels: Wherever transom panels or side panels of wood are shown
in same framing systems as wood doors, provide panels which match quality and
appearance of associated wood doors, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate matching
panels with same construction, exposed surfaces and finish as specified for associated
doors.
INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS:
Faces:
Red oak, plain sliced or rotary cut, 2 end matched panels.
Grade: A.
Core Construction: SLC (structural composite lumber core).
Edges:
Hardwood,
Particle Core door will NOT BE ACCEPTED.
Vision Lite Frames shall meet 20 minutes rating.
Provide 20 minute label doors at all corridors and where shown on plans and schedules.
FACTORY FINISH:
1. Comply with referenced WDMA Section G-15, “Factory Finishing.”.
2. Pre-finish wood doors at factory.
3. Transparent Finish: Match finish indicated in WDMA Section G-17: WDMA
System #6.
PRE-FITTING AND PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE:
Comply with tolerance requirements of NWMA for pre-fitting. Machine the wood doors
where hardware requires cutting of doors. Comply with final hardware schedules and
door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates and other essential information
required to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware.
Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify
dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in factory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Installer must examine door frames, and verify that frames are correct type and have
been installed as required for proper hanging of corresponding doors and notify
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation of wood
doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION:
Condition doors to the average humidity of the installation areas prior to hanging.
WOOD DOORS 08210 - 3

Hardware: For installation see Division 8 "Builders Hardware" section of these
specifications.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and as shown.
Job Fit Doors: Align doors to frame for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge
and machine for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
Clearance: For non fire doors provide clearances of 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/8” at
meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/2" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor
finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
Job Site Finished Doors: See painting sections in Division 9 of these specifications for
finishing requirements for finishing wood doors.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Operation: Re-hang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely, as directed
by Architect.
Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation, as directed by
Architect.
Protection and Completed Work: Advise Contractor of proper procedures required for
protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of
work.
END OF SECTION 08210
WOOD DOORS 08210 - 4

SECTION 08300 SPECIAL DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Special doors required for this work include but are not limited to, Overhead operating
doors.
Non-insulated doors are required.
Provide complete operating door assemblies including door curtains, guides,
counterbalance mechanism, hardware, operators and installation accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Furnish each door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including
hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components.
Insert and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in
concrete or built into masonry for the installation of the units. Provide setting drawings,
templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
See concrete and masonry sections of these specifications for installation of inserts and
anchorage devices.
SUBMITALLS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, roughing-in diagrams, and
installation instructions for each type and size of door. Include operating instructions and
maintenance information.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations which
are not fully dimensioned or detailed on manufacturer's data sheets. Provide
documentation for compliance with TDI, where applicable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
General: Special doors shall be the product of the manufacturer indicated and shall be
the type, model and finish upon which the design is based. Equivalent products of other
manufacturers will be considered provided approval is obtained from the Architect prior
to bidding.
Door Types:
Rolling Counter Door:
SPECIAL DOORS 08300 - 1

Description: Shall be equal to Overhead Door Corp. 665
series with all accessories related to this model.
• Options: Face of Wall Mount, Hood
• Operation: Manual
• Locking: Key operated cylinder lock on side
with panic lock release. Cylinder lock furnished
under Finish Hardware.
Manufacturer’s:
Overhead Door Corporation
Cornell
All other manufacturers for rolling doors and rolling grilles need to be approved by
Architects office, prior to bidding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head
mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment support in accordance with final
shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified herein.
Upon completion of installation including work by other trades, lubricate, test and adjust
doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist or distortion and fitting weathertight for
entire perimeter.
END OF SECTION 08300
SPECIAL DOORS 08300 - 2

SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of aluminum entrances and storefronts is shown on drawings and schedules.
Types of aluminum entrances and storefronts required include the following:
Aluminum entrance frames.
Aluminum sash and sidelight.
Miscellaneous items required for complete installation.
Hardware for aluminum entrances.
Glazing: Refer to "Glass and Glazing" section of Division 8 for glazing requirements for
aluminum entrances and storefronts, including doors specified herein to be factory preglazed.
Mortise cylinders are specified in Division 8 hardware section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Drawings are based on one manufacturer's standard aluminum entrance and storefront
system. Another standard system of a similar and equivalent nature will be acceptable
when differences do not materially detract from design concept or intended
performances, as judged solely by Architect.
Field Measurement: Wherever possible, take field measurements prior to preparation of
shop drawings and fabrication, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, proceed with
fabrication and coordinate installation tolerances as necessary when field measurements
might delay work.
REFERENCES:
Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of "Metal Curtain Wall, Window,
Storefront, and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual" by AAMA.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and installation
recommendations for components of aluminum entrances and storefronts required for
project, including data that products have been tested and comply with performance
requirements.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of aluminum
entrances and storefronts, including elevations, detail sections of typical composite
members, anchorages, reinforcement, expansion provisions, and glazing. Provide shop
drawings with approved anchoring for compliance with ASTM testing procedure.
Wind Pressures Requirements: Submit documentation stating the storefront system has
been designed to meet a wind pressure defined by IBC, latest version.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-1

PART 2 PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES:
Aluminum Entrances shall be equal to Oldcastle MS-375 with in-line panic device and
Nightwatch Rotary Security astragal.
Acceptable Manufacturers: (Must meet requirements of ASTM 1886)
Oldcastle
U.S. Aluminum
Kawneer
Atlas Architectural Metals
Aluminum Members with Rugged Frame: Alloy and temper recommended by
manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; ASTM
B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate.
Thickness: Major portions of sections shall be .125 inch minimum thickness. Moldings,
trim and glass stops shall be .050 minimum thickness.
Fasteners: Aluminum, non magnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by
manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components.
Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware.
Match finish of adjoining metal.
Provide Phillips flat head machine screws for exposed fasteners.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high strength aluminum units where
feasible; otherwise, nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot dip galvanized steel complying
with ASTM A 386.
Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot dip galvanized steel
complying with ASTM A 386.
Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable stripping of either
molded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC gaskets
complying with ASTM D 2287.
Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide glass and glazing materials which comply with
requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications.
HARDWARE:
General: Refer to hardware section of Division 8 for requirements for hardware items
other than those indicated herein to be provided by manufacturer of aluminum
entrances.
Provide Nightwatch High Security Rotary Astragal and the VIP series panic mid rail
device at each pair of doors.
Provide door manufacturer's standard heavy duty hardware units as indicated,
scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes,
number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required, finished to match
door, unless otherwise indicated.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 2

Refer to Section 08300 - Special Doors for Hardware
FABRICATION:
General:
Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, including profile
requirements, are indicated on drawings. Any variable dimensions are indicated,
together with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design
requirements and coordination with other work.
Details shown are based upon standard details by manufacturer indicated.
Similar details by other manufacturers listed will be acceptable, provided they
comply with other requirements including profile limitations.
Prefabrication: To greatest extent possible, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing,
hardware application, and other work before shipment to project site. Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
Do not drill and tap for surface mounted hardware items until time of installation
at project site.
Sequence: Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to
cleaning, finishing, surface treatment, and application of finishes. Remove arrises from
cut edges and ease edges and corners to radius of approximately 1/64".
Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations to avoid discoloration; grind exposed
welds smooth and restore mechanical finish.
Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as necessary for performance requirements; separate
dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other separator which will prevent corrosion.
Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting
members.
Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against
fixed stops; at other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip
mortised into door edge.
Provide heavy duty, hollow, compression weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable
for contact with threshold.
Storefront Framing System (AL SF): Storefront and assembly shall be designed to
comply with ASTM E 1886, BCCO PA 201,PA 202 AND PA 203.
General: Inside outside matched resilient flush glazed system, fabricated for stick type
erection procedure with provision for glass replacement.
Frames: Frames, mullions and transom bars shall be constructed of aluminum
extrusions, size 1 -3/4" x 4 -1/2" x 1/8" minimum wall thickness unless otherwise
indicated on the drawings. Coordinate with Architects office.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3

Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without
disassembly of door stiles and rails. Provide snap on extruded aluminum glazing stops,
with exterior stops anchored for non removal.
FINISHES:
Clear Anodized Finish
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of
aluminum entrances and storefronts.
Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors,
or panels. Anchor securely in place, separating aluminum and other corrodible metal
surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other
materials.
Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface mounted hardware templates,
complying with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use
concealed fasteners wherever possible.
Set sill members and other members in bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers
or gaskets as shown to provide weather tight construction. Comply with requirements of
Division 7 for compounds fillers, and gaskets.
Refer to "Glass and Glazing" section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other
panels shown to be glazed into doors and framing, and not pre-glazed by manufacturer.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Adjust operating hardware to function properly, without binding, and to provide tight fit at
contact points and weatherstripping.
Clean system, inside and out, after erection and installation of glass and sealants.
Remove excess glazing and joint sealant, dirt, and other substances from aluminum
surfaces.
Remove protective coating when completion of construction activities no longer requires
its retention.
Institute protective measures and other precautions required to assure that aluminum
entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal
weathering, at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 4

SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each type of aluminum window unit is indicated on drawings.
Types of aluminum window units required include the following:
Fixed Aluminum window units
Applications of aluminum windows on project include the following:
Individual units set in conventional wall construction.
Units in continuous runs, with mullions
Glazing: Refer to "glass and glazing" section of Division 8 for glazing all window units,
including those specified to be factory pre-glazed.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
Performance and Testing:
General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with air infiltration tests, water
resistance tests, uniform load deflection tests, and uniform load structural tests specified
in ANSI/AAMA 302.9 for type and classification of window units required in each case.
Testing: Where manufacturer's standard window units comply with requirements and
have been tested in accordance with specified tests, provide certification by
manufacturer showing compliance with such tests; otherwise, perform required tests
through a recognized testing laboratory or agency and provide certified test results.
QUALITY ASSURANCE: Design Criteria: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles and
dimensional requirements of aluminum windows. Window units having minor deviations
from dimensions and profiles indicated on drawings may be accepted, provided such
deviations do not materially detract from design concept or intended performances and
subject to approval of the Architect.
Design Criteria: Drawings are based on specific type and model aluminum window by a
single manufacturer. Equivalent type windows by other listed manufacturers may be
accepted, provided deviations in dimensions and profile are minor and do not materially
detract from design concept or intended performances, as judged solely by the Architect.
REFERENCES:
Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, requirements for aluminum windows,
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 1

terminology and standards of performance, and fabrication workmanship are those
specified and recommended in ANSI/AAMA 302.9 and applicable general
recommendations published by AAMA and AA.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, specifications,
recommendations, and standard details for aluminum window units, including certified
test laboratory reports as necessary to show compliance with requirements.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including wall elevations at l/4” scale, typical unit
elevations at 3/4" scale, and full size detail sections of every typical composite member.
Show anchors, hardware, operators, and other components not included in
manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details. Provide shop drawings with
approved anchoring for compliance with wind loading requirements.
Certification: Where manufacturer's standard window units comply with requirements
and have been tested in accordance with specified tests, provide certification by
manufacturer showing compliance with wind pressures identified in IBC, latest edition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide window units by one of
the following for each type of window unit required:
Fixed Aluminum Windows: Profile to match Oldcastle CS-250 with 1” insulated glass.
Alenco
Atlas Architectural Metal, Inc.
Efco Corp.
Oldcastle
MATERIALS:
Window frames and sash members shall be ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T6 for extrusions;
ASTM B209, alloy 5005-H16 for sheets; or other alloys and temper recommended by
manufacturer appropriate for specified finish.
Fasteners: Aluminum, non magnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by
manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim,
hardware, anchors and other components of window units.
Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.l25" thick,
reinforce interior with aluminum or non magnetic stainless steel to receive screw
threads, or provide standard non corrosive pressed in splined grommet nuts.
Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of
hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal.
Provide Phillips flat head machine screws for exposed fasteners.
Anchors, Clips and Window Accessories: Depending on strength and corrosion inhibiting
requirements, fabricate units of aluminum, non magnetic stainless steel, or hot dip zinc
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 2

coated steel or iron complying with ASTM A 386.
Compression Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: At manufacturer's option, provide
molded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 Designation 2BC4l5 to
3BC620, molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287, or molded expanded
neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4.
Sliding Weatherstripping: Provide woven pile weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene or
nylon pile and resin impregnated backing fabric, and aluminum backing strip; comply
with AAMA 701.
Sealant: Unless otherwise indicated for sealants required within fabricated window units,
provide type recommended by window manufacturer for joint size and movement, to
remain permanently elastic, non shrinking and non migrating. Comply with Division 7
sections for installation of sealants.
Friction shoes: Nylon or other non-abrasive, non-metallic, non-staining, non corrosive
durable material.
All muntins, horizontal sash members, and meeting rails shall be tubular sections.
The perimeter of the vent (s) shall be completely weatherstripped with woven pile and
vinyl.
Each unit shall be equipped with white bronze positive cam lock and keeper.
Spiral balances shall be adjustable and replaceable.
All anchors shall be manufacturer’s standard anchors, unless otherwise detailed and
specified.
For double hung only: The lower sash shall have a continuous integral lift rail in sash sill
and the upper sash shall be equipped with necessary pull handles.
CLASSIFICATION (GRADE):
Commercial Windows (Grade A3): Except as otherwise indicated, provide window units
complying with requirements of AAMA Classification A2, for "Commercial" type
buildings.
WINDOW TYPES (OPERATION):
General: Following paragraphs defined operating arrangements for types of sash
(ventilators) required in window units and specify minimum provisions for each type.
Drawings indicate which panels of each window unit are operable sash and which are
fixed. Where 2 or more types of operating sash are included in same window unit,
operation of each is indicated, and unit is considered a "Combination Aluminum
Window".
Windows of the types and sizes shown on the plans or as called for in this specification
shall be manufactured by one of the listed acceptable manufacturers to conform with
ASTM E 1886, BCCO PA 201,PA 202 AND PA 203. Window units shall be furnished
with necessary anchors and clips to provide a complete installation.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 3

FABRICATION AND ACCESSORIES:
General: Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories which comply with
indicated standards and are re-glazed without dismantling of sash framing, except to
extent more specific or more stringent requirements are indicated. Include complete
system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units, and prepare sash
for glazing except where pre-glazing at factory is indicated.
Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes of window units and profile requirements are shown
on drawings. Variable dimensions (if any) are indicated along with maximum and
minimum dimensions as required to achieve design requirements and coordination with
other work.
Details on drawings are based upon standard details by one or more
manufacturers. It is intended that similar details by other manufacturers will be
acceptable, provided they comply with size requirements, minimum/maximum
profile requirements, and performance standards as indicated or specified.
Coordination of Fabrication: Where possible, check actual window openings in
construction work by accurate field measurement before fabrication, and show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings. However, coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress as directed by Contractor to avoid delay of work. Where
necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate
installation tolerances to ensure proper fit of window units.
Pre-glazed Fabrication: Pre-glazed window units alsynite/structoglass where possible
and practical for applications indicated. Comply with requirements of section "Glass and
Glazing" in addition to requirements of ANSI/AAMA 302.9.
Provide water shed members above side hinged ventilators and at similar lines of natural
water penetration.
Provide means of drainage for water and condensation which may accumulate in
members of window units. Provide manufacturer’s pre-manufactured sill flashing. For
Vista Wall window unit sill flashing shall be equal to part no. FG-2169. Sill flashing shall
match finish of aluminum window system.
Weatherstripping: Provide compression type weatherstripping at perimeter of each
operating sash, except provide sliding weatherstripping at all locations where sash rails
slide horizontally or vertically along frame of units.
Provide sub-frames with anchors for window units where shown, of profile and
dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062" thickness extruded aluminum; with mitered
or coped corners, welded and dressed smooth or with concealed mechanical joint
fasteners; finish to match window units.
Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, and complete with
anchors for support and installation. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for
movements of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections.
ALUMINUM WINDOW FINISHES:
Clear Anodized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 4

INSTALLATION:
Comply with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations for installation of
window units, hardware, operators, and other components of work.
Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Anchor
securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action.
Set sill members and other members in bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers
or gaskets as shown, to provide weather tight construction. Refer to Division 7 sealant
sections for compounds, fillers and gaskets to be installed with window units. Coordinate
installation with wall flashing and other components of work.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and at
weatherstripping, and to ensure smooth operation and weather tight closure.
Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to avoid
damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds, dirt and clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows,
exercising care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess
glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances. Lubricate hardware and
moving parts.
Clean glass of pre-glazed units promptly after installation of windows; comply with
requirements of "glass and glazing" section for cleaning and maintenance.
Initiate and maintain protections and other precautions required to ensure that window
units will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at time of
acceptance.
END OF SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 5

MANUFACTURERS
Butts Hager Hagr
Locksets Schlage Lock Co. Schl
Exit Device Von Duprin Von
Closers Nortons Nort
Mullions Von Duprin Von
Stops Hager Hagr
Silencers Hager Hagr
Thresholds Hager Hagr
Weatherstripping Hager Hagr
Keys & Keying;
All locks, cylinders and deadbolts shall be Master Keyed as required by the Owner.
Furnish two (2) keys per locking device.
Schedule A at doors 1,2,10
cylinder locks (2) 20-757-626 Primus-Schl
Schedule B at door no.3 (single toilet)
1.5 pair Butts BB1191 x 4.5 x 4.5 x 630 x NRP Hagr
Indicator B571 x 626 Schl
Lockset ND40PD x SPA x 626 Schl
Wall Stop 236w x 626 Hagr
Door Closer P1601 BF x 689 x SNB Nort
Silencers 307D Hagr
Schedule B at door no.3 (gang toilet)
1.5 pair Butts BB1191 x 4.5 x 4.5 x 630 x NRP Hagr
dead bolt B663P x 626 x 12 Schl
push/pull plate (2)HL x 6 x US x 26D G/J
Wall Stop 236W x 630 Hagr
Door Closer P1601 BF x 689 x SNB Nort
kick plates (2)190S x 12” x 34” x 626 Nort
Silencers 307 D Hagr
Schedule C at doors no. 4
1.5 pair butts BB1191 x 4.5 x 4.5 x 630 x NRP Hagr
Lockset ND80PD x SPA x 626 Schl
door closer P1601 BF x 689 x SNB Nort
Wall Stop 236W x 630 Hagr
Schedule D at doors no. 5
3.0 pair butts BB1191 x 4.5 x 4.5 x 630 x NRP Hagr
exit device 88L x F x 626 x 42" Von
exit device 88L x F x 626 x 42" Von
removable mullion 4954 Von
floor stop (2) 236w x 626 Hagr
door closer (2) P1601 BF x 689 x SNB Nort
kick plates (2)190S x 12” x 34” x 626 Nort
1.5 pair butts BB1191 x 4.5 x 4.5 x 630 x NRP Hagr
exit device 88 EO x 626 x 42" Von
BUILDERS HARDWARE 08700 - 1

door closer P1601 BF x 689 x SNB Nort
weatherstripping 891 x SV x 36" x 2@ 84" x SMS Hagr
threshold 520 x SV x 36" x SMS Hagr
door bottom (2) 770 x SV x 36" x SMS Hagr
door drip 810S x 40" x SMS Hagr
astragal 872S x 84" x SMS Hagr
floor stop 243F x 626 Hagr
latchguard 8850 Mag Security
kick plates 190S x 12” x 34” x 626 Nort
Schedule E at doors no. 6
1.5 pair Butts BB1191 x 4.5 x 4.5 x 630 x NRP Hagr
exit device 88L x F x 626 x 42" Von
Wall Stop 236w x 626 Hagr
Door Closer P1601 BF x 689 x SNB Nort
Silencers 307D Hagr
Schedule F at doors no. 7
1.5 pair Butts BB1191 x 4.5 x 4.5 x 630 x NRP Hagr
Lockset ND53PD x SPA x 626 Schl
Wall Stop 236w x 626 Hagr
Door Closer P1601 BF x 689 x SNB Nort
Silencers 307D Hagr
Schedule G at doors no. 8
1.5 pair butts BB1191 x 4.5 x 4.5 x 630 x NRP Hagr
exit device 88 EO x 626 x 42" Von
door closer P1601 BF x 689 x SNB Nort
weatherstripping 891 x SV x 36" x 2@ 84" x SMS Hagr
threshold 520 x SV x 36" x SMS Hagr
door bottom (2) 770 x SV x 36" x SMS Hagr
door drip 810S x 40" x SMS Hagr
astragal 872S x 84" x SMS Hagr
latchguard 8850 Mag Security
Schedule H at doors no. 9
3.0 pair butts BB1191 x 4.5 x 4.5 x 630 x NRP Hagr
dead bolt B663P x 626 x 12 Schl
floor stop 243F x 626 Hagr
door closer P1601 BF x 689 x SNB Nort
threshold 520 x SV x 96" x SMS Hagr
flush bolts (2) 282Dx 626 Hagr
astragal 872S x 84" x SMS Hagr
passage set ND80S x SPA x 626 x knurled Schl
Toilet Partition Hardware Typical
Bolts 15109-612 Bomm
Contiunous Piano Hinge FSTP-10022 Assa
Pull 15020-612 Bomm
Slide Bolts 15004-612 Bomm
Stop/ Hook 15030-612 Bomm
Stop Keeper (Out Swing) 1075-612 Bomm
Stop Keeper (In Swing) 1074-612 Bomm
BUILDERS HARDWARE 08700 - 2

SECTION 08700 - BUILDERS HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definition: "Builders Hardware" includes items known commercially as builders’
hardware which are required for swing, sliding and folding doors, except special types of
unique and non-matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and door
frame. Types of items in this section include (but are not necessarily limited to):
Hinges
Pivots
Lock cylinders and keys
Lock and latch sets
Bolts
Exit devices
Push/pull units
Sliding door equipment
Closures
Overhead Holders
Miscellaneous door control devices
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Manufacturer: Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closures, etc.)
from only one manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products
complying with requirements.
Supplier: A recognized builders hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in
the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or has in
employment, an experienced hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times
during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to
Owner, Architect and Contractor.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturers' technical information for each item of hardware.
Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements,
and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finish.
Transmit copy of applicable data to Installer.
Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in the manner and format
specified, complying with the actual construction progress schedule requirements.
Hardware schedules are intended for coordination of work.
Final Hardware Schedule: Based on builders hardware indicated, organize hardware
schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required
for each door or opening. Include the following information:
Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item.
Name and manufacturer of each item.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
Location of hardware set cross - referenced to indications on Drawings
BUILDERS HARDWARE 08700 - 1

oth on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. contained in schedule.
Mounting locations for hardware.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
Keying information.
Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible data particularly where
acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow
metal frames) which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with
schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by builders’
hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware
schedule.
Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's
final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Packaging of hardware, on a set by set basis, is the responsibility of the supplier. As
materials received by the hardware supplier from the various manufacturers, sort and
repackage in containers marked with the hardware set number. Two or more identical
sets may be packed in the same container.
Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the hardware supplier and the
hardware installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct.
Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed.
Control handling installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable,
so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before
and after installation.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package
separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic
installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use
on doors and frames of the thicknesses, profile, swing, security and similar requirements
indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver individually
packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project
site) for installation.
Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other
work to be factory - prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the
shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for the
proper installation of hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SCHEDULED HARDWARE:
Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of
each type of builders hardware is indicated in the Builders Hardware Data Sheet and
Hardware Schedule at the end of this section. Products are identified by using hardware
designation numbers of the following.
BUILDERS HARDWARE 08700 - 2

Manufacturer's product designations: One or more manufacturers are listed for each
hardware type required. An asterisk (*) after a manufacturer's name indicates whose
product designation is used in the Hardware Schedule for purposes of establishing
minimum requirements. Provide product designated, or, where more than one
manufacturer is listed, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers which
comply with requirements including those specified elsewhere in this section.
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:
General:
Hand of door: The drawings show the direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf.
Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation an operation of the door movement
as shown.
Base Metals: Produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming method indicated,
using the manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in
no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for the applicable
hardware units by FS FF-H-106, FS FF-g-111, FS FF-E-116 and FS FF-H-121. Do not
furnish "optional” materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise
specified.
Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally
prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been
prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head
screws Finish exposed( under any condition) screws to match the hardware finish or , if
exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of such other work as closely as
possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive, painted finish.
Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when the door is
closed, except to the extent no standard units of the type specified are available with
concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where the bolt head or the
nut on the opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to
adequately reinforce the work.
LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING:
General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final
instructions in writing.
Keying System: Grandmaster key the locks to the campus, with a new master key for
this project.
HARDWARE FINISHES:
Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest
extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and
textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming
process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or
opening. In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and
lock set (or push-pull units if no latch-lock sets) for color and texture.
Provide finishes which match those established by EEMA or, if none established, match
BUILDERS HARDWARE 08700 - 3

the Architect's sample.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case
less than specified for the applicable units of hardware by referenced standards.
Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze
and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard
finish designations to indicate " not lacquer".
The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are
those listed in "Materials & Finishes Standard 1301" by EEMA, including coordination
with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders
Hardware" by the NEEA, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with
governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect.
Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware to a
surface which will later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal,
storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work
specified in the Division 9 sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes
have been completed on the substrate.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units which have not been factory-prepared for anchorage
fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Adjust and clean each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate
freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.
Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or
occupancy to make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or
area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of
hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilating equipment.
Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and
hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.
BUILDERS HARDWARE 08700 - 4

SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definitions: "Glass" includes prime glass, processed glass, and fabricated glass
products. "Glazing" includes glass installation and materials used to install glass. Types
of work in this section include glass and glazing for:
Window wall/store front construction, safety or tempered glass.
Entrances and other doors, safety or tempered glass.
"Glass Products" is hereby defined to include glazing plastics.
Packaged mirror units are specified as "specialties" in another section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Prime Glass Manufacturer: One of the following for each type/color/pattern of glass:
ASG Industries, Inc.
C E Glass Division
Ford Glass Company
PPG Industries, Inc.
Prime Glass Standard: FS DD G 451
Heat Treated Glass Standard: FS DD G 1403
Safety Glass Standard: CPSC 16 CFR 1201.
SUBMITTALS:
JOB CONDITIONS:
Pre Installation: Meet with Glazier and other trades affected by glass installation, prior to
beginning of installation. Do not perform work under adverse weather or job conditions.
Install liquid sealants when temperatures are within lower or middle third of temperature
range recommended by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
GLASS PRODUCTS:
INSULATED GLASS UNITS:
Manufacturer is used in this section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or
fabricated glass as defined in the referenced standards.
1. Oldcastle Glass®
GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 -1

2. Guardian Industries
3. Pilkington
4. PPG Industries
5. ACH Float Glass
Materials
SunGlass Sealed Insulating Glass (IG) Units
1. Insulating Glass Unit Make-up
• Outboard Lite
1. Glass Type: Low-E Coated
2. Glass Tint: Solarcool® Gray Reflective #2
3. Nominal Thickness: ¼"
4. Glass Strength: (Heat-Strengthened or Tempered)
5. Coating Orientation: Surface #2
• Spacer
1. Nominal Thickness: ½"
2. Gas Fill: Air
• Inboard Lite
1. Glass Type: Uncoated
2. Glass Tint: Clear
3. Nominal Thickness: ¼"
4. Glass Strength: (Annealed, Heat-Strengthened or Tempered)
5. Coating Orientation: NA
2. Performance Characteristics (Center of Glass)
(Note: Verify that the glass type and thickness specified matches the
Performance Characteristics listed below.)
• Visible Transmittance: 50%
• Visible Reflectance: 8%
• Winter U-Factor (U-Value): 0.29
• Shading Coefficient (SC): 0.29
• Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.25
3. Provide hermetically sealed IG units with dehydrated airspace, dual sealed
with a primary seal of polyisobutylene (PIB), or thermo plastic spacer (TPS) and
a secondary seal of silicone or an organic sealant depending on the application.
PROCESSED GLASS:
Tempered Glass: Provide prime glass of the color and type indicated, which has not
been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4.5 times annealed
strength. Provide at all glass areas opening onto corridors and hallways.
GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPONENTS:
General: Provide color of exposed sealant/compound indicated or if not otherwise
indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors, or black if no
color is so selected. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection of
hardness, depending upon the locations of each application, conditions at time of
installations, and performance requirements as indicated. Select materials and
variations or modifications, carefully for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the
installation.
Butyl Rubber Glazing Sealant (BUR GS): Compound of polymerized butyl rubber and
inert fillers, solvent based, 75% solids, complying with FS TT S 001657; tack free in 24
hrs. paintable, non-staining.
GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 -2

Preformed Butyl Rubber Glazing Sealant (PBuR GS): Compound of polymerized butyl
rubber and inert fillers, with or without polyisobutylene modification, solvent based, 95%
solids, formed and coiled on release paper; tack free in 24 hrs., paintable, non-staining;
plain, pre-shimmed or reinforced as required for proper installation and setting of glass.
Oleo Resinous Glazing Compound (OR GC): Oil based glazing compound; nonstaining
and non-bleeding; provide proper type as required for either channel or face
glazing; comply with FS TT G 410 for face glazing compound.
GLAZING GASKETS:
Structural Rubber Glazing Gaskets (StR GG): Neoprene extrusions fabricated into
frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips; comply with ASTM C 542.
Molded Neoprene Glazing Gaskets: (MN GG): Molded or extruded neoprene gaskets
of the profile and hardness required for water tight construction; comply with ASTM D
2000 designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 620, black.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS:
Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 70 90 durometer hardness, with proven
compatibility with sealants used.
Spacers: Neoprene or EPDM, 40 50 durometer hardness with proven compatibility with
sealants used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE:
Watertight and airtight installation of each glass product is required, except as otherwise
shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading,
impact loading (for operating sash and doors), without failure including loss or breakage
of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of
glazing materials and other defects in the work.
Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent
operation of glazed components of the work. During installation, discard units with
significant edge damage or other imperfections.
Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on
glass, minimum edge clearance, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation.
Comply with combined recommendations and technical reports by manufacturers of
glass and glazing products as used in each glazing channel, and with recommendations
of Flat Glass Marketing Association "Glazing Manual", except where more stringent
requirements are indicated.
PREPARATION FOR GLAZING:
Clean glazing channel and other framing members immediately before glazing. Remove
GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 -3

coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces
where elastomeric sealants are used.
Apply primer or sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.
GLAZING:
Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located 1/4th of glass width from each
corner. Set blocks in thin course of hell bead compound, if any.
Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than
50 united inches, except where gaskets or pre-shimmed tapes are used for glazing.
Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width,
except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or
installing filler rods in channel at heel of jambs and head (do not leave voids in still
channels), except as otherwise indicated and depending on light size, thickness and
type of glass, and complying with manufacturer's recommendations.
Force sealants into channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash"
away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of
channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after
installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations.
Where wedge shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant
or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not
"walk" out when installation is subjected to movement. Anchor gasket to stop with
matching ribs, or by proven adhesives, including embedment of gasket tail in cured heel
bead.
Gasket Glazing: Miter out and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used
for channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or
leaks in glazing system.
Structural Gasket Glazing: Cut zipper strips slightly long, to ensure tight closure.
Lubricate zipper strip and use special tool to install zipper. Do not lubricate glazing
channel or anchorage rabbed. Comply with details as shown and manufacturer's
instructions, including the possible use of liquid sealants and weep holes.
CURE PROTECTION AND CLEANING:
Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed
streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to
surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. Cure sealants for
GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 -4

high early strength and durability.
Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in
other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and
vandalism.
Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project.
Comply with glass product manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning.
END OF SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 -5

SECTION 09200 - LATH AND PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Types of work includes:
Steel stud systems
Metal furring and lathing
Portland cement plastering
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Interior Lathing and Furring Installation Standard: ASTM C 841.
Portland Cement Plastering Standards: ANSI A 42.2 and A 42.3.
Allowable Tolerances: For flat surfaces, do not exceed 1/8" in 8' 0" for bow or warp of
surface, and for plumb or level.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions
for each material, including other data as may be required to show compliance with
these specifications.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Deliver, store and protect manufactured materials to comply with referenced standards.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Environmental Conditions: Comply with referenced standards.
Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other
harmful effects which might result from plastering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
METAL SUPPORT, FURRING, LATHING AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS:
General:
Metals and Finishes: Manufacturer's standard steel products unless indicated as zinc
alloy or other metal. Where not otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard
galvanized finish on steel products except as follows:
Metal Lath: Rust inhibitive paint finish on copper bearing steel (ASTM A 659), except for
exterior work and in "High Humidity" areas.
Exterior Components: Hot dip galvanized finish; ASTM A 525 G90 for 18 gage and
lighter formed metal products, ASTM A 123 galvanized after fabrication for 16 gage and
heavier products.
Exterior Exposed Plastering Accessories: Provide zinc alloy accessories for exterior
work and work in "High Humidity" areas, except where fully concealed in plaster.
LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 1

Wire Ties: Galvanized soft steel wire.
Metal Lathing Materials (MtLth):
General: Where not otherwise indicated, comply with MLSFA "Technical Bulletin 101"
and ASTM C 841 for selection of metal lath for each application indicated.
Product Standards: Comply with FS QQ L 101.
Backing: Provide lath with factory applied backing of moisture resistant paper or
polyethylene film.
Exterior Diamond Mesh Lath: 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd., large mesh openings (approximately 1
3/8" x 3 1/8").
Flat Rib Lath: 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd., 1/8" rib depth.
Rib Lath, 3/8": 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd., 3/8" rib depth.
Rib Lath, 3/8": 4.0 lbs. per sq. yd., 3/8" rib depth.
Sheet Lath: 4.5 lbs. per sq. yd., perforated and rigidized.
Metal Plastering Accessories and Reinforcement:
General: Coordinate depth of accessory with thickness of and number of coats of plaster
to be applied.
Small Nose Corner Beads: General purpose type with expanded or perforated flanges,
No.1.
Cornerite: Manufacturer's standard preformed interior corner reinforcement made from
2.5 lb. per sq. yd. diamond mesh lath.
Square Edged Casing Beads: Manufacturer's standard with expanded or short flange to
suit application, No. 66.
Two Piece Control Joints: Manufacturer's standard roll formed pair of casing beads with
modified back flanges providing positive slip joint action and dust barrier, adjustable for
joint width variation of 1/8" to 5/8".
Corner Reinforcement: Special stucco type woven galvanized wire corner reinforcing
strips.
Line Wire: 18 gage soft annealed steel wire.
Fasteners: Galvanized steel, of type and length suitable for adequate penetration of the
substrate.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS:
General: Provide either neat or ready mixed (where applicable) materials, at Installer's
option, complying with ASNI A42.2.
LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 2

Base Coat Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or IA.
Base Coat Cement: Installer's option, masonry cement ASTM C91.
Base Coat Lime: Special finishing hydrated lime, Type S.
Base Coat Aggregate: Sand, Complying with ASTM C144.
Prepared Finish Coat: Factory prepared finish for portland cement plaster, type
recommended by the manufacturer for the color and texture indicated.
Texture: Sand float finish (SF Pls).
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
Asphalt Saturated Felt: ASTM D 226, 15 lb. type, non perforated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate work with structural ceiling work to ensure that inserts
and other structural anchorage provision have been installed to receive ceiling hangers.
Furnish concrete inserts, steel deck hanger clip and similar devices to other trades for
installation well in advance of time needed for coordination with other work.
Plastering:
Clean plaster bases and substrates to be plastered, removing loose materials, coatings
and other substances which might impair the work.
INSTALLATION OF METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS:
General:
Isolation: Where lathing and metal support systems abuts building structure horizontally,
and where partition/wall work abuts overhead structure, isolate the work from structural
movement sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into the work from the building
structure. Install slip or cushion type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral
support.
Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently, and do not bridge joints
with furring and lathing or accessories.
Fixture Support Framing: Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing where
work is indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and
furnishings and similar work requiring attachment and support.
Metal Lath on Exteriors (Stucco): Installation on Sheathed Construction or overcoating.
Fasten building paper in horizontal layers, to the sheathing or surface being overcoated,
with each strip lapping the strip below at least 3". (This is not necessary where lath with
integral waterproof paper backing is used).
Install furring devices (except for self-furring lath) and provide clearance for "plaster
keys" to form.
LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 3

Stagger end laps. Return lath 4" around corners or use corner ties. Carry lath over
foundation at least 2".
Ceiling Suspension Systems:
Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible,
otherwise connect to inserts, clips or anchorage devices or fasteners, as indicated.
Space runner channels as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, 4' 0" o.c.; and space
hangers along channels as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, 4' 0" o.c.
Level runner channels to a tolerance of 1/8" in 12' 0".
Steel Stud Systems:
General: Install steel studs with continuous runner tracks at top and bottom of each
wall/partition area, and above and below each opening more than 2' 0" in width. Anchor
tracks to floor and overhead structure at each end and 24" o.c. (Max.), unless otherwise
indicated.
Extend partition stud system through suspended ceiling to structural support above,
except where indicated to terminate at the ceiling.
Space studs 16" o.c., including jack studs above and below openings, except as
otherwise shown.
Anchor punched steel partition studs to bottom and top runner tracks, at both flanges.
Install stud shoes or clips, or weld or screw fasten to tracks.
Anchor wire truss type partition studs to runner tracks by crimping track, wire tied stud
shoes, or by using snap in type tracks, except wire tie end studs with stud shoes.
Anchor light gage screw type partition studs to runner tracks by friction fit, except screw
end studs to both tracks at both flanges.
Install a minimum of 3 studs at partition corners and intersections, spaced as shown or,
if not shown, as recommended by stud manufacturer for the application indicated.
Install horizontal stud system stiffeners in continuous runs at the spacings indicated, or if
not indicated, as required to comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and
recommendations.
Install additional studs at each jamb of openings more than 2' 0" wide, and secure jamb
studs to frames of openings and to runner tracks above and below openings in the
manner indicated (screw to frame anchors or directly to frames, or wire tie or weld, if not
otherwise indicated).
Install 3 studs at each jamb, except as otherwise shown.
Install stud system stiffeners not more than 6" above and 6" below each opening, and
extend 2 regular stud spaces beyond opening both ways.
Metal Furring:
Space furring members 16" o.c., except as otherwise indicated.
Where interior face of exterior walls are indicated with long length gypsum lath, install
LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 4

channel furring horizontally, spaced 3' 0" o.c., supported on furring brackets. Install floor
and ceiling runners of type indicated.
Metal Lathing:
Install metal lath to comply with referenced standards unless otherwise indicated.
Nail self furring diamond mesh directly to masonry and concrete substrates where
shown for direct plaster application.
Plastering Accessories:
Anchor each flange of accessories 8" o.c. to plaster base.
Miter or cope accessory corners, and install with tight joints accurately aligned.
Set accessories plumb, level and true to line, with a tolerance of 1/8" in 10' 0".
Install metal corner beads at external corners.
Install casing beads at terminations of plaster work, except where plaster is indicated to
pass through other work and be concealed by lapping work, and except where special
screens, bases or frames act as casing beads including interior metal door frames.
For exterior work, set casing beads 1/4" from abutting frames and other work (for
application of sealant).
At "Control Joints" and "Expansion Joints": set pair of casing beads back to back, with
metal strip behind anchored to only one side of joint. At "Expansion Joints" space beads
1/4" apart for interior work, 3/8" apart for exterior work.
Control Joint Installation:
Install control joints with attachment only to the edges of abutting sheets of lath, so that
lath is not continuous or tied across the joint.
Where control joints are placed parallel to framing members, install joints so that none is
more than 4" away from a framing member.
In gypsum plaster ceilings install control joints to create panels no larger than 2,400 sq.
ft., with no dimension exceeding 60 ft.
For exterior portland cement plaster install control joints to create panels no larger than
144 sq. ft. or a length to width ratio of 2 1/2 to 1.
Install control joints at all locations where panel size or dimensions change. Joint shall
extend the full width or height of the plaster membrane.
INSTALLATION OF PLASTER:
Mechanically mix plaster materials at the project site; do not hand mix except where
small amounts are needed, using less than one bag of plaster.
Grout hollow metal frames, bases and similar work occurring in gypsum plastered areas,
with base coat plaster material, and prior to lathing where necessary (PlsGrt). Except
where full grouting is indicated or required for fire resistance rating, grout 6" lengths at
each anchorage.
LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 5

Sequence plaster applications with the installation and protection of other work, so that
neither will be damaged by the installation of the other.
Plaster flush with metal frames and other built in metal items or accessories which act as
a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where plaster is not terminated at metal by
casing beads, cut base coat free from metal before plaster sets and groove finish coat at
the junctures with metal.
Apply thicknesses and number of coats of plaster as indicated; or as required by
referenced standards.
Provide 3 coat plaster installation except where shown as 2 coat work.
Limit 2 coat plaster installation to applications recommended by manufacturer and
permitted by ANSI standards and governing regulations.
Concealed Plaster: Where plaster application will be concealed by wood paneling, above
suspended ceilings and similar locations, finish coat may be omitted; where concealed
behind cabinets and similar furnishings and equipment, apply finish coat; where used as
a base for adhesive application of tile and similar finishes, omit finish coat and
coordinate thickness with overall dimension as shown, and comply with tolerances
specified.
Texture of Plaster Finishes: Except as otherwise indicated, apply finish coat as follows:
Exterior Portland Cement Plaster: Sand float finish (SF PcPls).
Cure portland cement plaster by maintaining each coat in a moist condition for 2 days
following application; keep enclosed and fog spray (after initial set) as required to
prevent dry out.
CUTTING AND PATCHING:
Cut, patch, point up and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to
restore cracks, dents and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters,
buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs and
similar defects, including areas of the work which do not comply with specified
tolerances, and where bond to the substrate has failed.
Sand smooth trowel finishes lightly to remove trowel marks and arises.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster
from door frames, windows, and other surfaces which are not to be plastered. Repair
floors, walls and other surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged
during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused
materials, containers and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris.
Installer shall advise the Contractor of requirements for the protection of plaster from
deterioration and damage during the remainder of the construction period.
END OF SECTION 09200
LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 6

SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Types of work include:
Gypsum drywall including screw type metal support system
Drywall finishing (joint tape and compound treatment)
Gypsum Sheathing
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Fire Resistance Rating: Where gypsum drywall systems with fire resistance ratings are
indicated or are required to comply with governing regulations, provide materials and
installations identical with applicable assemblies which have been tested and listed by
recognized authorities, including UL and AIA.
Gypsum Board Terminology Standard: GA 505 by Gypsum Association.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum board products from a single
manufacturer, or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of
gypsum boards.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions
for each gypsum drywall component, including other data as may be required to show
compliance with these specifications.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
Store materials inside under cover and in manner to keep them dry, protected from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction
traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal
corner beads and trim from being bent or damaged.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced gypsum
board application standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, for
environmental conditions before, during and after application of gypsum board.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 1

Cold Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 55 degrees F
(13 degree C) maintain continuous, uniform, comfortable building working temperatures
of not less than 55 degree F (13 degree C) for a minimum period of 48 hours prior to,
during and following application of gypsum bard and joint treatment materials or bonding
of adhesives.
Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that
required for drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application. Avoid
drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent too rapid drying.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Metal Support Materials:
Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
Milcor Division; Inryco Inc.
United States Gypsum Co.
Direct Suspension Systems:
Chicago Metallic Corp.
Donn Corporation.
National Rolling Mills Co.
Roblin Building Products, Inc.
United States Gypsum Co.
Gypsum Board and Related Products:
American Gypsum Co.
Georgia Pacific Corp.
Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
United States Gypsum Co.
METAL SUPPORT MATERIALS:
Ceiling Support Materials and Systems:
General: Size ceiling support components to comply with ASTM C 754 unless indicated
otherwise, hot dipped galvanized at exterior walls.
Main Runners: Steel channels with rust inhibitive paint finish, hot or cold rolled.
Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized.
Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts, cast in place concrete inserts or other
devices applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers
and whose suitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction
practices or by certified test data. Size devices for 3x calculated load supported except
size direct pull out concrete inserts for 5x calculated loads.
Furring Members: ASTM C 645; 0.0179" min. thickness of base metal, hat shaped.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 2

Where shown as "Resilient", provide manufacturer's special type designed to reduce
sound transmission.
Furring Members: ASTM C 645; 0.0179" min. thickness of base metal, C shaped studs.
Furring Anchorages: 16 gage galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire type
clips, bolts, nails or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer and complying with
C 754.
Direct Suspension Systems: Manufacturer's standard zinc coated or painted steel
system of furring runners, furring tees, and accessories designed for concealed support
of gypsum drywall ceilings; of proper type for use intended.
Wall/Partition Support Materials:
Studs: ASTM C 645; 0.0179" min. thickness of base metal unless otherwise indicated,
25 gage. Provide 16 gage hot dipped galvanized at exterior walls.
Depth of Section: 4", except as otherwise indicated.
Runners: Match studs; type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and ceiling
support of studs, and for vertical abutment of drywall work at other work.
Furring Members: ASTM C 645; 0.0179" min. thickness of base metal, hat shaped.
Where shown as "Resilient," provide manufacturer's special type designed to reduce
sound transmission.
Z Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard screw type galvanized steel, zee shaped
furring members; ASTM A 525, G60, 0.0179" min. thickness of base metal; of depth
indicated; designed for mechanical attachment of insulation boards or blankets to
monolithic concrete and masonry walls. Hot dipped galvanized at exterior walls.
Fasteners for Furring Members: Type and size recommended by furring manufacturer
for substrate and application indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS:
Gypsum Wallboard: (GypWbd) ASTM C 36, of types, edge configuration and thickness
indicated, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joint
Type: Gold Bond brand Gypsum Wallboard (at ceiling furrings only)
Edges: Manufacturer's standard.
Thickness: 5/8", unless otherwise indicated
Uses: at wall partitions, where indicated.
Type: Hi-Impact XP brand Wallboard
Thickness: 5/8".
Uses: at all wall partitions, where indicated.
SHEATHING shall be Georgia Pacific Dens Glass Gold, 3/4" thick, with foil faced taped
seams, at all exterior vertical applications.
Tile Backer Board: shall be Georgia Pacific, 5/8" thick Dens-Shield Tile Backer with Fire-
Shield, provide at all ceramic tile wainscot wall conditions only.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 3

TRIM ACCESSORIES:
General: Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated for drywall
work, formed of galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated, with either knurled and
perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment of
flanges in joint compound. Provide corner beads, L type edge trim beads, U type edge
trim beads, special L kerf type edge trim beads, and one piece control joint beads.
Corner bead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Comply with ASTM C 840 and the
following:
Corner bead formed from zinc alloy, with flanges knurled and perforated or of
fine mesh expanded metal.
Steel Edge trim formed from galvanized steel, types per Fig. 1 of ASTM C 840
as follows:
"LC" Bead, unless otherwise indicated.
"LK" Bead with square nose for use with kerfed jambs.
"L" Bead where indicated.
"U" Bead where indicated.
Plastic Edge Trim: Manufacturers standard rigid or semi rigid PVC moldings shaped to
provide resilient contact of gypsum board edges with other construction; friction fit, or
pressure sensitive adhesive mounting.
One Piece Control Joint: Formed with perforated face flanges connected by vee shaped
slot, 1/4 inch wide by approximately 7/16 inch deep and covered with removable tape,
fabricated from the following material:
Roll formed zinc.
Extruded vinyl.
Either roll formed zinc or extruded vinyl.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:
General: ASTM C 475; type recommended by the manufacturer for the application
indicated, except as otherwise indicated.
Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing type.
Joint Compound: Vinyl type powder or ready mixed vinyl type for interior use.
Joint Compound: On interior work provide chemical hardening type for bedding and
filling, ready mixed vinyl type or vinyl type powder for topping.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall work of the type and grade
recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum board.
Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound specifically recommended for
laminating gypsum boards.
Gypsum Board Screws: Comply with ASTM C 646.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 4

Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining,
non-bleeding, gunnable sealant for concealed applications per ASTM C 919.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: Refer to Section 07201 for sound attenuation blanket
specification.
TEXTURE FINISH MATERIALS:
Primer: Of type recommended by manufacturer of texture finish.
Polystyrene Aggregated Finish: One of the following:
QT Imperial Texture Finish: United States Gypsum Co.
Perfect Spray: Gold Bond Bldg. Products Div.
Regular Texture
Light Monterrey
Medium Monterrey
Orange Peel
PART 3 EXECUTION
PREPARATION FOR METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate work with structural ceiling work to ensure that inserts
and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers.
INSTALLATION OF METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS:
General:
Metal Support Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 754.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system, frame both sides of joints
with furring and other support as indicated.
Ceiling Support Suspension Systems:
Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible,
otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated.
Space main runners 4' 0" o.c. and space hangers 4' 0" o.c. along runners, except as
otherwise shown.
Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/8" in 12' 0", measured both lengthwise on each
runner and transversely between parallel runners.
Wire tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as
indicated.
Space furring member 16" o.c., except as otherwise indicated.
Wall/Partition Support Systems:
Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for
support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories,
furnishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or if not otherwise
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 5

indicated, to comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer, or if not available, of "Gypsum Construction handbook" published by
United States Gypsum Co.
Isolate stud system from transfer of structural loading to system, both horizontally and
vertically. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial
loading.
Install runner tracks at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum
drywall stud system abuts other work, except as otherwise indicated.
Extend partition stud system through acoustical ceilings and elsewhere as indicated to
the structural support or substrate above the ceiling.
Space studs 16" o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Frame door openings to comply with detailed indicated or if not otherwise indicated, to
comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if
not available, of "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum
Com. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb
anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for jack studs) at head and
secure to jamb studs.
Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor
or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated.
Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or if not
indicated, in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills
of openings to match framing required above door heads.
Space wall furring members 16" o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Erect thermal insulation vertically and hold in place with Z furring members spaced 24"
o.c. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall
with concrete stub nails or power drive fasteners spaced 24" o.c. At exterior corners,
attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner;
on adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached
channel. Start from this furring member channel with standard width insulation panel and
continue in regular manner. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12"
from corner and cut insulation to fit. Until gypsum board is installed hold insulation in
place with 10" staples fabricated from 18 gage tie wire and inserted through slot in web
of member, or by an equally acceptable method.
GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA 216.
Where handrails are indicated for direct attachment to gypsum board shaft wall system,
provide not less than a 0.0341 inch thick by 4 inch wide galvanized steel reinforcement
strip, accurately positioned and secured behind not less than one gypsum board face
layer of 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch thickness.
Install sound attenuation blankets as indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily
installed after board has been installed.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 6

Locate exposed end butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and
stagger not less than 1' 0" in alternate courses of board.
Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner which will minimize the number of end
butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end
joints at least 1' 0".
Install wall/partition boards vertically to avoid end butt joints wherever possible. At
stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over
studs.
Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or
damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more
than 1/16" open space between boards. Do not force into place.
Located either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or
where intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end
joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and
mill cut or field cut ends against mill cut or field cut ends. Do not place tapered edges
against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides
of partitions.
Attach gypsum board to framing and blocking as required for additional support at
openings and cutouts.
Form control joints and expansion joints with space between edges of boards, prepared
to receive trim accessories.
Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces
(above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls which are properly braced internally.
Except where concealed application is required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. area, and may be
limited to not less than 75% of full coverage.
Isolate perimeter of non load bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide
1/4" to 1/2" space and trim edge with J type semi finishing edge trim. Seal joints with
acoustical sealant. Do not fasten drywall directly to stud system runner tracks.
For double layer partition system, work above acoustical ceilings may be installed with
base layer only.
Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced standards and
manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated.
METHODS OF GYPSUM DRYWALL APPLICATION:
Single layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard.
On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest
extent possible.
On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel), unless otherwise indicated,
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 7

and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints.
Double Layer Fastening Methods: Apply base layer of gypsum board and face layer to
base layer as follows:
Fasten base layers to wood supports with nails and face layer with adhesive and
supplementary fasteners.
INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES:
General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as
required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or
stapling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Install metal corner beads at external corners of drywall work.
Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or
semi exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange
to receive joint compound except where semi finishing type is indicated. Install L type
trim where work is tightly abutted to other work, and install special kerf type where other
work is kerfed to receive long leg of L type trim. Install U type trim where edge is
exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant filled (including expansion joints).
Install plastic edge trim where indicated on wall panels at juncture with ceilings.
Install metal control joint (beaded type) where indicated.
FINISHING OF DRYWALL:
General: Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of trim
accessories, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to
prepare work for decoration. Pre-fill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, using
type of compound recommended by manufacturer.
Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where a trim accessory is
indicated.
Apply joint compound in 3 coats (not including pre-fill of openings in base), and sand
between last 2 coats and after last coat.
Refer to sections on painting, coatings and wall coverings in Division 9 for decorative
finishes to be applied to drywall work.
APPLICATION OF TEXTURE FINISH:
Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and prime drywall and other surfaces in strict
accordance with texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer of proper type to
all surfaces to receive texture finish.
Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to drywall and other surfaces indicated to receive
finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce a uniform texture
without starved spots or other evidence of thin application, and free of application
patterns.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 8

Remove any texture droppings or overspray from door frames, windows and other
adjoining work.
PROTECTION OF WORK:
Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protecting gypsum drywall
work from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 09250
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 9

SECTION 09300 - TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definition: Tile includes ceramic surfacing units made from clay or other ceramic
materials.
Extent of tile work is indicated on drawings and schedules.
Types of tile work in this section include the following:
Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.
Glazed ceramic mosaic tile
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Source of Materials: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color
of tile, grout and setting materials.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions
for materials required, except bulk materials.
Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of
actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full range of colors, textures and patterns
available for each type of tile specified. Include samples of grout and accessories
requiring color selection.
Samples for verification purposes: Submit the following:
Samples for each type of tile and for each color and texture required, not less than 12"
square, on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted.
Full size samples for each type of trim, accessory and for each color.
Certification: Furnish Master Grade Certificate for each shipment and type of tile, signed
by manufacturer and Installer.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and
labels intact until time of use. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water,
freezing, foreign matter or other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to
comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.
Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide
buildup.
TILE 09300 - 1

Maintain temperatures at not less than 50 deg.F (10 deg.) in tiled areas during
installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by
referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Available Manufacturers:
Glazed and Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile:
American Olean Tile Co., Div., National Gypsum Co.
Lone Star Ceramics
Dry Set Grouts: (Non staining)
Custom Building Products.
Laticrete International Inc.
L & M Surco Mfg., Inc.
Commercial Portland Cement Grout: (Non staining)
Custom Building Products.
L & M Surco Mfg. Co., Inc.
TheUpco Co.
PRODUCTS, GENERAL:
ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard
Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types and grades of tile indicated.
ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced
with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting.
Colors, Textures and Patterns: For tile, grout and other products requiring selection of
colors, surface textures or other appearance characteristics, provide products to match
characteristics indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standards.
Provide tile trim and accessories which match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
Mounting: Where factory mounted tile is required provide back or edge mounted tile
assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated.
TILE PRODUCTS:
Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory mounted flat tile complying with the
following requirements:
Type: Porcelain
Type: Natural Clay
Nominal Facial Dimensions: 2" X 2".
Base: Equal to Dal-Tile MDKB-5A
Provide for two four premium colors and two standard color field tile.
Premium colors to equal Dal-Tile price group 2 and 3. Provide (3) rows of
premium colors at all tile locations.
Glazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory mounted flat tile complying with the
following requirements:
Type: Porcelain.
TILE 09300 - 2

Type: Natural Clay.
Nominal Facial Dimensions: 4 1/4" x 4 1/4".
Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to
comply with following requirements:
Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved.
Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Coved.
Upon completion of project, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with two boxes of tile
for each style used for future repairs.
SETTING MATERIALS:
Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials to comply with ANSI
A108.1 as required for installation method designated, unless otherwise indicated.
Thin set Portland Cement Mortar: Where thin set portland cement mortar applications
are indicated, use the following unless otherwise required.
Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5, factory sanded; or latex
portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.4.
Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1; use Type I for showers, tub recesses, or other areas
requiring prolonged water resistance, Type II elsewhere, unless indicated. Provide
primer sealer where recommended by manufacturer.
GROUTING MATERIALS:
Commercial Portland Cement Grout: Proprietary Pre-blended compounded composed of
portland cement and additives formulated for the type of tile installed.
Dry Set Grout: Proprietary compound composed or portland cement and additives
formulated for type of tile installed.
Grout for Pre-grouted Tile Sheets: Same elastomeric material used in factory pregrouted
sheets.
Colors to be selected by Architect form manufacturer’s standard colors.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
Metal Edge Strips: Zinc alloy or stainless steel, 1/8" wide at top edge with integral
provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated.
Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and grout
manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion
Federation, 112 North Alfred St., Alexandria, VA 22134 or Ceramic Tile Institute, 700 N.
Virgil Ave., Los Angeles, CA 90029.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Examine surfaces to receive tile work and conditions under which tile will be installed.
Do not proceed with tile work until surfaces and conditions comply with requirements
indicated in referenced tile installation standard.
TILE 09300 - 3

INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with applicable parts of ANSI 108 series of tile
installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the
Installation of Ceramic Tile".
TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with
TCA installation methods indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as applicable to
installation conditions shown.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a
complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and
other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile
cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown. For tile mounted in sheets
make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of
each sheet is not apparent in finished work.
Grout tile to comply with referenced installation standards, using grout materials
indicated.
FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS:
Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting
bed methods, TCA installation methods related to types of sub-floor construction, and
grout types:
Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1.
Bond Coat: Portland cement paste on plastic bed or thin set portland cement on cured
bed, ANSI A108.5; at Contractor's option.
Concrete Sub-floors, Interior, Waterproofing Membrane: TCA F121.
Mortar: Sand portland cement
Thin set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5
Concrete Sub-floors; Interior: TCA F113.
Grout: Sand portland cement
Conductive Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Install to comply with ANSI A108.7 using conductive
dry-set mortar bond coat on damp cured and dried portland cement mortar bed as per
TCA F112; grout type as indicated below:
Grout: Sand-portland cement
Paver Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed
method, TCA installation method related to types of sub-floor construction, and grout
types:
Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1
Concrete Sub-floor, Interior: TCA F112 (bonded)
Grout: Sand-portland cement.
TILE 09300 - 4

Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of the flooring
meets carpet, wood or other flooring which finishes flush with top of tile.
WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS:
Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with requirements indicated
below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to subsurface wall
conditions, and grout types:
Grout: Dry set.; Thin-set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5.
Interior; TCA W213
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so
they are free of foreign matter.
Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solution only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect
metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.
Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped,
broken, un-bonded, or otherwise defective tile work.
Protection: When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral
protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft
paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage
and wear.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is
completed.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile
surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09300
TILE 09300 - 5

SECTION 09400 - TERRAZZO
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Types of terrazzo include:
Bonded Terrazzo (Bd-Tz)
Epoxy Resin Terrazzo
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
NTMA Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of National
Terrazzo and Mosiac Association, Inc. as specified.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions
for each type of terrazzo, accessory item, and material required.
Certification: Submit 2 copies of suppliers/manufacturers written certification that
terrazzo materials meet or exceed specified NTMA properties.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout of divider strips, control joint
strips and base and border strips if required.
Samples: Submit 3 samples of each pattern, color and type of terrazzo required, not less
than 6" square. Also, 6" long samples of accessories.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of written instructions for recommended
periodic maintenance of each type of terrazzo.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Divider, Accessory, Control and Expansion Strips:
Manhattan American Strip Div./Southern Stone Industries
Inc.
Cleaners and Sealers:
Bestal
General Polymers Corp.
Hillyard Chemical Company.
Multi-Clean Div./H.B. Fuller Company.
TERRAZZO 09400 - 1

CEMENTITIOUS TERRAZZO MATERIALS:
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except as modified to comply with NTMA
requirements for compressive strength. Obtain cement from a single source for all work
of each required color.
Provide non-staining white cement for terrazzo matrix.
Sand: ASTM C33.
Water: Clean, free of oil, soluble salts or other deleterious substances.
Aggregate: Natural, sound, crushed marble chips without excessive flats or flakes,
complying with NTMA requirements. No premix aggregate will be allowed.
Colors and gradation of aggregate to match NTMA plate, as indicated.
Matrix Pigments: Pure mineral or synthetic pigments, resistant to alkalies and nonfading.
Color to be White.
Curing Compound: Liquid-membrane-forming compound, ASTM C 309, Type 1.
Epoxy Resin Terrazzo Matrix: Thermosetting, amine-cured epoxy resin and hardener,
mineral filler and color pigment, complying with NTMA “guide Specification for Epoxy
Terrazzo” and as required to match Architect’s sample.
TERRAZZO ACCESSORIES:
Divider Strips: Depth and style as required for type and thickness of terrazzo. Width,
material and color as indicated, to match Architect's sample. Angle or "T"-type for
adhesive bonding to substrate. Terrazzo panel sizes not to exceed 3'-0" x 3'-0".
If width and material are not indicated or established by Architect's sample, use divider
strips with 1/16" wide top, as follows: White alloy zinc (interior only).
Accessory Strips: Match width, material and color of divider strips, unless otherwise
indicated. Provide the following types of accessory strips as required for complete
installation.
Base bead and cove base dividers, to align with floor dividers unless otherwise shown.
Channels to receive abrasive inerts.
Stair nosings for treads, landings and similar exposed edges of flooring.
Control or Expansion Strips: Double or split units, 1/8" wide, of same material and color
as the divider strips. Provide 1/8" wide filler of same depth as strips, laminated between
the strips.
Coordinate control joints with concrete construction joints.
Control Joint Filler: White neoprene. Provide to coincide
with terrazzo strip pattern.
Expansion Joint Filler: Elastomeric sealant.
TERRAZZO 09400 - 2

Cleaner: Liquid, neutral chemical cleaner, with Ph factor between 7 and 10, of
formulation recommended by sealer manufacturer for type of terrazzo used, and
complying with NTMA requirements.
Interior Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip and stain resistant penetrating sealer which will not
affect color or physical properties of terrazzo surface.
Finish: Apply Hillyard Industries - Northstar #528 terrazzo finish after the floor has been
sealed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION:
Clean and prepare substrate to comply with NTMA specifications for type of terrazzo
application indicated. Clean area to receive terrazzo of loose chips and all foreign
matter. Grind concrete substrate as required to provide surfaces within tolerances
required by NTMA for type of terrazzo application indicated.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
Comply with NTMA and manufacturer's recommendations for proportioning mixes,
installation of strips, and for placing, curing, grinding, grouting and finishing.
Provide terrazzo bases, thresholds, stair treads and landings, where indicated or
scheduled, without interruptions of seams, except where divider strips, control joints and
expansion joints are indicated or required. Place and finish terrazzo around obstructions
to achieve continuous color, pattern and finish.
Install divider and accessory strips where indicated, in an adhesive setting bed, in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and without voids below strips. Provide
mechanical anchorage as required for adequate attachment of strips to substrate.
Provide control joints where indicated by installing angle-type divider strips back-to-back
with neoprene rubber filler cemented between strips, flush with finish floor.
Provide for expansion joints where indicated, by installing angle-type divider strips backto-back,
with removable filler of the width shown (but not less than 1/4" wide) between
strips.
Joint sealants and installation are specified in Division 7.
Install abrasive inserts where indicated, and in accordance with insert manufacturer's
instructions.
CEMENTITIOUS TERRAZZO:
Bonded Terrazzo (Bd-Tz): Comply with NTMA "GuideSpecification for Bonded
Terrazzo". Prepare sub- slab surfaces to insure positive bonding with underbed.
Thoroughly clean areas of foreign matter immediately before placing underbed.
Surfacing: Grout and grind cured terrazzo topping in accordance with NTMA
specifications. Finish by fine grinding with abrasive grit of size specified by NTMA, or as
TERRAZZO 09400 - 3

otherwise required matching Architect's sample.
CLEANING, SEALING AND PROTECTION:
Clean terrazzo after installation and finishing operations are completed, complying with
sealer manufacturer's instructions.
Apply sealer to cleaned terrazzo surfaces to comply with sealer manufacturer's
instructions.
Protect terrazzo from damage and wear during construction operation.
FINAL CLEANING:
Clean terrazzo as recommended by manufacturer of sealer and machine buff if required
when building if ready for occupancy.
Upon completion the work shall be ready for final inspection and acceptance by the
Owner or his Agent. The General Contractor shall protect the finished floor from the
time that the Terrazzo Contractor completes the work and request final inspection.
END OF SECTION 09400
TERRAZZO 09400 - 4

SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling is shown and scheduled on drawings.
Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following:
Acoustical panel ceilings, exposed suspension.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than three years of successful experience in
installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this project and which is
acceptable to manufacturer of acoustical units, as shown by current written statement
from manufacturer.
Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and
suspension system components with other work supported by or penetrating through,
ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system components
(if any), and partition system (if any).
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each
acoustical ceiling material required, and for each suspension system, including certified
laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with these
specifications.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store
them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from
moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes.
Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and
stabilized moisture content.
Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in
any way.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings
completed, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously
maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL:
Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturer's standard units of
configuration indicated which are prepared for mounting method designated and which
comply with FS SS S 118 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type,
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -1

form, pattern, grade (NRC or NIC's as applicable), light reflectance coefficient (LR), edge
detail, and joint detail (if any).
Sound Attenuation Performance: Provide acoustical ceiling units with ratings for ceiling
sound transmission class (STC) of range indicated as determined according to AMA 1 II
"Ceiling Sound Transmission Test by Two Room Method" with ceilings continuous at
partitions and supported by a metal suspension system of type appropriate for ceiling
unit of configuration indicated (concealed for tile, exposed for panels).
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics
indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard colors, surface textures, and patterns available for acoustical ceiling units and
exposed metal suspension system members of quality designated.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS:
Type I Panels Mineral Composition with Standard Washable painted finish:
Nodulated, Cast or Molded Units, Fissured: Form 2, Pattern d, NRC 60, LR 1, STC
30-34 Square edge, white, 24" x 24" x 5/8". No. 1831 Fire Resistance Panels:
Fine-Fissured Fire-Guard. - Armstrong World Ind., Inc.
Type II Panels Mineral Composition with Standard Washable painted finish:
Nodulated, Cast or Molded Units, Fissured: Form 2, Pattern d, NRC 60, LR 1, STC
30-34 tegular edge, white, 24" x 24" x 5/8". No. 1835 Fire Resistance Panels:
Fine-Fissured Fire-Guard. - Armstrong World Ind., Inc.
Type III Panels - Other (Panel Material as indicated below).
High Density Ceramic Composition Units with Scrubbable Finish: Resistant to heat,
moisture, and corrosive fumes; suitable for exterior applications; Pattern/NRC as
indicated below; LR1 (0.75); STC 40-44, square edge, white, 24" X24" X 5/8" or as
indicated. Provide locking hold down clips at all toilets.
Ceramaguard RH100 Fire Rated #601- Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Upon completion of project, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with two boxes of
ceiling tile for each style used for future repairs.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL:
Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide metal suspension systems of type,
structural classification and finish indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C 635
requirements.
Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard finish for type of system indicated,
unless otherwise required. For exposed suspension members and accessories with
painted finish, provide black color.
High Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for Coating Classification
for "Severe Environment Performance" where high humidity finishes are indicated.
Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
Direct-Hung.
Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, pre-stretched,
Class 1 coating, sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design loan (ASTM C 635, Table
1, Direct Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 12 gage.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -2

Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded plastic of types and profiles indicated or, if
not indicated, provide manufacturer's standard molding for edges and penetrations of
ceiling which fits with type of edge detail and suspension system indicated.
Available Manufacturers: Manufacturers of Steel Exposed Suspension Systems: (in airconditioned
areas)
Same as acoustical unit manufacturer:
Chicago Metallic Corp.
Donn Corp.
National Rolling Mills, INc.
EXPOSED METAL DIRECT HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEM:
Fire Rated Double Web Suspension System:
Finish: Aluminum cap painted white.
Structural Classification: Intermediate Duty System:
Finish: Aluminum cap painted white.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION:
Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed
by other trades for support of acoustical ceilings.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at
borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever possible.
INSTALLATION:
General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to
comply with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements as indicated, and
industry standards applicable to work.
Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units (if any) in manner shown
by reflected ceiling plans.
Install tile with pattern running in alternating one direction.
Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only
from building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6" from each end and
spaced 4'-0" along each carrying channel or direct hung runner, unless otherwise
indicated, leveling to tolerance of 3/32" in 12'-0".
Secure wire hangers by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which
will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures.
.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by
bracing, counter splaying or other equally effective means.
Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at
locations where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -3

Screw attached moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16” o.c. and not more than 3"
from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12' 0". Miter
corners accurately and connect securely.
Install acoustical tile in coordination with suspension system. Place splines or flanges of
suspension system into kerfed edges, or insert tile tongues into tile grooves, so that
every tile to tile joint is closed by double lap of material.
Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut for accurate fit at borders and
around penetrating work.
Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed
by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders
and at penetrations.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up
of minor finish damage.
Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 -4

SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and in schedules.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a
single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling
compounds.
Wherever possible, provide required resilient flooring and accessories produced by a
single manufacturer.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical data and installation
instructions for each type of resilient flooring and accessory.
Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, samples of each type, color, and pattern of
resilient flooring, including accessories, required, indicating full range of color and
pattern variation.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended
maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required.
Replacement Material: After completion of work, deliver to project site replacement
materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed, and as follows:
Tile flooring, not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, for each
type, size, and color installed.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) in spaces to receive
resilient flooring for at least 40 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not
less than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where
they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently,
maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) in areas where work is
completed.
Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until
the latter have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as
determined by manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Available manufacturers must have thru-chip technology or equal manufacturing
technology.
RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 1

Vinyl Composition Tile:
Tarkett Inc. - Signals, Collage, Expressions/Basics available.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc. - All available colors including Multi-colors
Mannington Commercial - Essentials and Designer Essentials.
Azrock Commercial Flooring - Cortina/Compliments
Rubber Wall Base:
Johnson Rubber Co., Inc., Flooring Accessories Div.
R. C. Musson Rubber Co., Inc.
Roppe Rubber Corp.
MATERIALS:
Colors and Patterns: As shown or scheduled, or as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standards.
Tile Flooring:
Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): FS SS T 312, Type IV; 12" x 12" unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
Composition 1 asbestos-free.
Gage: 1/8".
Provide color pattern as shown on plans.
Accessories:
Wall Base (WL BS): Provide rubber base complying with FS SS W 40, Type I, with
matching end stops and preformed corner units, and as follows:
Height: 4".
Thickness: 1/8" gage.
Style: Standard top set cove.
Finish: Matte.
Transition strip:
Provide 1" wide transition strips between all differing floor conditions.
Provide 1" transition strips at all door openings.
Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring
manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions.
Concrete Slab Primer: Non staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Leveling Compound: Latex type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Floor Wax: Betco “Hard As Nails” – Hard film floor finish. Five (5) coats req’d.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION:
Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect sub-floor. Start of flooring
installation indicates acceptance of sub-floor conditions and full responsibility for
completed work.
Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling
RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 2

small cracks and depressions in sub-floors.
Perform moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine that concrete surfaces are
sufficiently cured and ready to receive flooring.
Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to
application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions.
INSTALLATION:
General:
Install flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and
similar openings.
Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for
future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on sub-floor. Use chalk or other
non permanent marking device.
Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and other such items as
occur within finished floor areas.
Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these
covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers.
Tightly cement flooring to sub-base without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at
joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Hand
roll flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion.
Tile Floors:
Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use
of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless
otherwise shown.
Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked,
chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable.
Lay tile in "checkerboard" fashion with grain reversed in adjacent tiles.
Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with
flooring manufacturer's directions.
Accessories:
Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in
rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable,
with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with metered or coped
inside corners. Tightly bond tile to substrate throughout length of each piece to provide
continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.
On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular surfaces, fill voids along top edge
RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 3

of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install
edging strips at edges of flooring which, when changed to different floor material, would
otherwise be exposed.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as
recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring with heavy Kraft paper
or other covering.
Finishing: After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly
clean floors and accessories.
Apply wax, polish and buff, with type of polish, number of coats, and buffing procedures
in compliance with flooring manufacturer's instructions, unless noted otherwise.
END OF SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 4

SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of painting work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified.
Work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces
throughout Project, except as otherwise indicated.
Surface preparation, priming and coats or paint specified are in addition to shop priming
and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.
"Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers,
emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used
as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in “schedules", except
where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted.
Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar
adjacent materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Architect will select these
from standard colors available for materials systems specified.
Pre Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory
finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) metal
toilet enclosures, pre-finished partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural
woodwork and casework, finished mechanical and electrical equipment, including light
fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets, elevator entrance frames, doors and
equipment.
Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces
such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas,
foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator
shafts.
Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized
aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials
will not require finish painting.
Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units,
mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing
devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting.
Do not paint over any code required labels, such as Underwriters’ Laboratories and
Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or
nomenclature plates.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including Paint label analysis
and application instructions for each material proposed for use.
PAINTING 09900 - 1

Samples: Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only. Provide a
listing of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.
On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material, with texture to
simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by Architect until
acceptable sheen, color, and texture is achieved.
On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" x 8" samples of natural and stained wood
finish. Label and identify each as to location and application.
On concrete masonry, provide two 4" square samples of masonry for each type of finish
and color, defining filler, prime and finish coat.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information:
Name or title of material.
Fed. Spec. number, if applicable.
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
Manufacturer's name.
Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Apply water base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees
F (32 degrees C), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed
instructions.
Apply solvent thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees
F (35 degrees C), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed
instructions.
Do not paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to
damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed
instructions.
Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted
are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer
during application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
COLORS AND FINISHES:
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes, are indicated in "schedules" of the
contract documents.
Prior to beginning work, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted.
PAINTING 09900 - 2

Use representative colors when preparing samples for review.
MANUFACTURERS: for interior paint system only;
Sherwin Williams
Technical Coatings Inc.
Jones Blair
Pittsburgh Paint
for exterior paint system;
Tnemec (no substitutes for this product)
Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service
indicated.
Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to
ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from
other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed
for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over
incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required. Notify Architect in writing of
any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by
others.
MATERIALS:
Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly
manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying
manufacturer’s identification as a standard, best grade product will not be acceptable.
EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (EPS):
Provide following paint systems for various substrates, as indicated.
General Paint Wood:
EPS-1 1 st coat - Primer undercost (T-P-25).
2 nd coat - Acrylic emulsion (TT-P-19).
3 nd coat - Acrylic emulsion (TT-P-19).
Painted Wood Trim:
EPS-2: 1 st coat - Primer undercoat (TT-P-25).
2 nd coat - Alkyd trim enamel (TT-P-37).
3 rd coat - Alkyd trim enamel (TT-P-37).
Painted Plywood:
EPS-3 1 st coat - Surface sealer (TT-S-176).
2 nd coat - Primer undercoat (TT-P-25).
3 rd coat - Acrylic emulsion (TT-P-19).
4 th coat - Acrylic emulsion (TT-P-19).
INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS:
Provide following paint systems for various substrates, as indicated.
Exposed Structural Systems:
1 st Coat – SuperPaint Interior Latex Based Primer Coat (FS TT-P-650).
2 nd Coat - SuperPaint Interior Latex Based Primer Coat (FS TT-P-650).
PAINTING 09900 - 3

Concrete Masonry units:
IPS2: 1 st Coat - PROMAR Interior/Exterior Block Filler
2 nd Coat - PROMAR 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss
3 rd Coat - PROMAR 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss
Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.
3.5 mils dry film thickness, excluding first coat.
Not less than
Gypsum Drywall Systems:
1 st Coat - Interior Latex Based Primer Coat (FS TT-P-650).
2 nd Coat & 3 rd Coat - Odorless interior semi-gloss alkyd enamel (TS TT-E-509).
Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness.
Painted Wood Work and Hardboard:
IPS-6: 1 st Coat - Enamel Undercoat.
2 nd Coat- Semi-gloss enamel.
3 rd Coat - Semi-gloss enamel
Stained Woodwork:
IPS-5: 1 st Coat - Exterior oil stain.
2 nd Coat - Bleached Shellac.
3 rd Coat - Rubbing Varnish.
4 th Coat - Rubbing Varnish.
Surface Preparation: Wood must be dry and cleaned of dirt, grease, wax, polish, and
marks. Old finishes in poor condition should be completely removed and the surface
treated as a new surface (this shall apply to existing floors only). Sand wood to a
smooth surface, using 100-120 grit paper. If wood is stained, sand carefully to avoid
sanding through the color. Remove sanding dust with a vacuum, no dust cloths shall be
permitted. New wood should be stored inside for a minimum of 24 hours prior to
staining. Stain or varnish applied to wood that has not been dried can exhibit blotching,
discoloration, or cracking.
Replacement Material: After completion of work, deliver to project site replacement
materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed, and as follows:
Contractor shall provide the Owner with (1) one five gallon container for each
paint color used..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSPECTION:
Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be
applied and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
correct in a manner acceptable to Applicator.
Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within any particular area.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
SURFACE PREPARATION:
General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint
manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate
PAINTING 09900 - 4

condition.
Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures,
and similar items in place and not to be finish painted, or provide surface applied
protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary,
for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting
of each space or area, reinstall removed items.
Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil
and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that
contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly painted surfaces.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block to be
painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as
required to remove glaze as required. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of
surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be
sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition
before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds
that permitted in manufacturer’s printed directions.
Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial solution or
muriatic acid, or other etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid,
and allow to dry before painting.
Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with
scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished
surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots
and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before
application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces
with putty or plastic wood filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job painted immediately upon delivery to job.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets,
counters, cases, paneling. When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for
back-priming.
Back-prime paneling on interior partitions only where masonry or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cut outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or
equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to job.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop coated, of oil,
grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical
cleaning.
Touch up shop applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other
sections of these specifications. Clean and touch up with same type shop primer.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non petroleum
based solvent.
MATERIALS PREPARATION:
PAINTING 09900 - 5

Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue. Store materials in tightly covered containers.
Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if
necessary, strain material before using.
APPLICATION:
General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final
coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special
attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed
fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only
before final installation of equipment.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular
black paint. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged
covers to match exposed surfaces.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless
otherwise indicated. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop primed and touch up
painted, unless otherwise indicated.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned,
pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation
and before subsequent surface deterioration.
Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
until paint has dried to where it feels firms, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause
lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not
indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.
Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished,
and which has not been prime coated by others.
Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects
due to insufficient sealing.
Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no
evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections.
PAINTING 09900 - 6

Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface
of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,
brush marks, runs, sags or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
Transparent (Clear) Finish: Use multiple coats to produce glass smooth surface film of
even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush
marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for
final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove,
refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
The right is reserved by Owner to invoke the following material testing procedure at any
time, and any number of times during period of field painting:
Engage services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint being used.
Samples of materials delivered to project site will be taken, identified and sealed, and
certified in presence of Contractor.
Testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for any or all of following characteristics:
Abrasion resistance, apparent reflectivity, flexibility, wash ability, absorption,
accelerated weathering, dry opacity, accelerated yellowness, recoating, skinning, color
retention, alkali resistance and quantitative materials analysis.
If test results show that material being used does not comply with specified
requirements, Contractor may be directed to stop painting work, and remove non
complying paint; pay for testing; repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint; remove
rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint,
the two coatings are non compatible.
CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION:
Clean Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish,
cans and rags at end of each work day. Upon completion of painting work, clean
window glass and other paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper
methods of washing and scraping, using car not to scratch or otherwise damage finished
surfaces.
Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage
by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing,
and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after
completion of painting operations.
At completion of work of other trades, touch up and restore all damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09900
PAINTING 09900 - 7

SECTION 10410 - DIRECTORIES AND BULLETIN BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provision of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of directories is shown on drawings.
To be located by Architects office.
Specialty signs are specified elsewhere in Division 10.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Drawings and Specifications are based on one manufacturer’s standard products.
Another standard system of a similar and equivalent nature will be acceptable when
differences do not materially detract from design concept or intended performance, as
judged solely by Architect.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for each
type of directory and bulletin board.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for directories and bulleting boards, including
large-scale sections of typical members. Show reinforcement, anchorages,
components, and finishes.
Samples: Submit samples of each exposed material, including letters and other
graphics, showing, finish, color, and qualities of fabrication and design.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
MATERIALS:
Nelson-Harkins, model no. 244.
Provide the following features:
3" high header with copy in standard style.
Allow for 40 letters.
Custom PMS frame colors.
Changeable letters
Clear anodized
Background with cork and premium fabric
Size to be 48" x 36".
Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer or finisher
for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
DIRECTORIES AND BULLETIN BOARDS - SECTION 10410 - 1

properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063 - T5.
Laminated Glass: 2 layers of 1/8" clear float with adhesive plastic interlayer of
transparent colored polyvinyl butyral laminating film; Monsanto Saflex No.
360900, with light transmittance of 95%.
Tackboard: Material indicated below, of color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by
Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors, factory laminated under pressure to 1/4"
thick exterior type plywood or hardboard backing.
Vinyl-Fabric-Faces: Vinyl fabric complying with FS CCC-W-408, Type II, mildew
resistant, laminated to 1/4" thick cork backing.
FABRICATION:
General: Fabricate items to comply with requirements indicated, including those for
quality, thickness and finish of materials as those for dimensions, design and details.
Use metals and shapes of sufficient thickness, with reinforcing, if needed, to produce
surface flatness, free of “oil canning”, and to impart sufficient strength for size, design
and application indicated.
Fabricate perimeter and cover frames with reinforced corners, mitered to hairline fit, with
no exposed fasteners.
Bulletin Board Insert Panels: Tackboard of material indicated. Provide manufacturer’s
standard mullion trim matching frame where tackboard surface adjoins other directory
panels.
Mounting: Recessed
Bulletin Boards: Provide manufacturer’s standard assembly, fabricated to sizes
indicated, consisting of housing with perimeter frame, sides (if separate from frame), and
back; tackboard surface of material indicated; header panel, if any; operable transparent
covers with hardware, and other features as indicated. Comply with following
requirements:
Perimeter frame and Cover Design: Extruded aluminum frame of profile indicated; cover
type as follows:
Hinged Cover Type: Hinged doors with extruded aluminum frame of profile indicated,
with continuous hinges, glazed as follows:
Mounting: Recessed.
FINISHES:
General: Comply with NAAM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and
application recommendations.
Anodized Aluminum Finishes:
Class II Clear Anodized Finish: Provide AA-M21C22A31 (smooth specular mechanical
finish; chemical etch, medium matte; 0.4 mil min. thick anodic coating).
DIRECTORIES AND BULLETIN BOARDS - SECTION 10410 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
Install units plumb and level, in locations and with mountings shown. Securely attach to
the supporting structure with concealed fasteners, in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 10410
DIRECTORIES AND BULLETIN BOARDS - SECTION 10410 - 3

SECTION 10440 - SPECIALTY SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of specialty signs is shown on drawings.
Forms of specialty signs required include the following:
Panel signs
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Uniformity of Manufacturer: For each sign form and graphic image process indicated,
furnish products of a single manufacturer.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each
type of sign required.
Samples: Submit samples of each sign form and material showing finishes, colors,
surface textures and qualities of manufacture and design of each sign component,
including graphics.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of specialty signs.
Include plans, elevations, and large scale details of sign wording and lettering layout.
Show anchorages and accessory items. Furnish location template drawings for items
supported or anchored to permanent construction.
Furnish full size rubbings for metal plaques.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Manufacturers of Rooms Signs:
Knight Mfg. Co.
Spanjer
MATERIALS:
Plastic Laminate: Provide high pressure plastic laminate engraving stock with face and
core plies in contrasting colors, in finishes and color combinations indicated or, if not
indicated, as selected from the manufacturer's standard.
Anchors and Inserts: Use non ferrous metal or hot dipped galvanized anchors and
inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use
toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled in place anchors. Furnish inserts,
as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
FABRICATION OF PANEL SIGNS::
Fabricate panels signs to comply with the requirements indicated for materials,
SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440 - 1

thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes and details of construction. Provide
and install, one per door.
Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under
installed condition within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16" measured diagonally from
corner to corner.
Framed Panel Signs: Fabricate unframed panel signs with edges mechanically and
smoothly finished to conform with following requirements:
Equal to Spanjer RIS 102 Custom Modules.
A. Character Proportion. Letters and numbers on signs should have a width to height
ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke width to height ratio between 1:5 to 1:10 utilizing
an uppercase "X" for measurement.
B. Color Contrast. Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background.
C. Tactile Characters and Symbols. Characters, symbols, or pictographs on signs
required to be tactile, shall be raised 1/32 inch minimum. Letters and numbers shall be
sans serif characters; shall be at least 5/8 inch high, but should be no higher than two
inches; and shall be proportioned in accordance with subparagraph (B) of this
paragraph.
FINISHES:
General:
Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign materials which require selection of
materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related
to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not otherwise indicated,
as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
INSTALLATION:
General: Locate sign units and accessories where shown or scheduled, using mounting
methods of type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions,
unless otherwise indicated.
Install sign units level, plumb and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortion or other defects of appearance.
Panel Signs:
Wall Mounted Units: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated
below:
Vinyl Tape Mounting (VTM): Use double sided foam tape, or
thickness indicated, to mount signs to smooth non porous
surfaces. Do not use for vinyl covered or rough surfaces.
Where mounted on glass provide blank sign on inside of glass.
SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440 - 2

Flush Mounting (FM): Mount letters either backs in contact with wall surface.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surface in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 10440
SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440 - 3

SECTION 10520 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definition: "Fire extinguishers" as used in this section refers to units which can be hand
carried, unless otherwise specified.
Types of products required include:
Fire extinguishers.
Fire extinguisher cabinets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Provide portable fire extinguishers, cabinets and accessories by one manufacturer,
unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for all
portable fire extinguishers required. Where color selections by Architect are required
include color charts showing full range of manufacturer's standard colors and designs
available.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
J. L. Industries.
Larsen's Mfg. Co.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other
locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard which comply with requirements of governing authority.
Fill and service extinguishers to comply with requirements of governing authorities and
manufacturer's requirement.
Multi Purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL rated 4 A: 60 BC, 10 lb. nominal capacity, in
enameled steel container for Class A, Class B and Class C fires.
Wet Chemical: Provide Class K type in Kitchen areas. Two (2) units minimum.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS:
General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets (FECB) where indicated, of suitable size for
housing fire extinguishers of types and capacities indicated.
Construction: Manufacturer’s standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and
grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10520 - 1

Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting conditions indicated, of the following types:
Semi Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style
of trim indicated.
Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth.
Exposed Trim: One piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge
(backbend).
Rolled Edge Trim: Rounded edges with backbend depth as follows:
Depth: 2 1/2".
Trim Metal: of same metal as door.
Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material
indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
Door Style: Equal to JL 1027V10.
Duo Panel: Double strength glass, 1/8" thick, unless otherwise indicated.
Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer’s standard door operating hardware of proper
type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either
lever handle with cam action latch, or door pull, exposed or concealed, and friction latch.
Provide concealed or continuous type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
FACTORY FINISHING OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and
application recommendations except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory
after products are assembled. Protect cabinets with plastic or paper covering, prior to
shipment.
Aluminum Finishes:
Provide #180 clear anodized door and frame.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if
not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.
Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size of
cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions.
Where exact location of bracket mounted fire extinguishers is not indicated, locate as
directed by Architect.
IDENTIFICATION:
Identify existence of fire extinguisher in cabinet with lettering spelling "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER” painted on door by silk screen process. Provide lettering on door as
indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard letter
sizes, styles, colors and layouts.
END OF SECTION 10520
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10520 - 2

SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on drawings and schedules.
Types of toilet accessories required include the following:
Sanitary napkin disposal units.
Grab bars.
Mirrors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in
concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid
interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units.
Products: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for
units exposed in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each
toilet accessory.
Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for
installation of anchorage devices in other work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS:
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Bradley Corporation
MATERIALS, GENERAL:
Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22 gage minimum, unless
otherwise indicated.
Mirror Glass: FS DD G 451, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, 1/4" thick, with silver coating,
copper protective coating, and non metallic paint coating complying with FS DD M 411.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 386, hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of
galvanized steel where concealed.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1

FABRICATION:
General: Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not
permitted, except where otherwise indicated; unobtrusive labels on surfaces not
exposed to view are acceptable. Where locks are required for a particular type of toilet
accessory, provide same keying throughout project. Furnish two keys for each lock.
Surface Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated,
fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access
panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage
wherever possible.
• Handicap Mirror: Equal to Bobrick model no. B-165 - 2448, Framed Mirror.
Provide one unit at each handicap lavatory. See plans for locations.
• Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Equal to Bobrick model no.B-2730, provide one unit at
each water closet location.
• Non-Accessible Mirror: Equal to Bobrick model no. B-165-1830, provide one
unit at each non-accessible lavatory. See plan for locations.
• Liquid Soap Dispenser - equal to Bobrick model no. B-155 Soap Dispenser.
• Hand Dryer: Hot Air Dryer (see MEP).
• Grab Bar: Equal to Bobrick model no. B-62601 series x 42" long, provide at each
handicap water closet location.
• Grab Bar; Equal to Bobrick model no. B-62061 series x 36" long, provide at each
handicap water closet location.
• Mop & Broom Holder: Equal to Bobrick model no. B-223X36, provide two units
at each janitorial room.
• Partition Mounted Napkin Dispenser: Equal to Bobrick model no. B-35303
• Wall Mounted Napkin Dispenser: Equal to Bobrick model no. B-254
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using
fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit.
Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
General Contractor to provide for solid 2x wood blocking at toilet accessories mounted at
gypsum drywall partitons.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function
smoothly.
Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 10800
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2

SECTION 11400 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
SCOPE:
This section includes furnishing all material, labor, equipment and services required to
complete food service equipment shown on the drawings and described herein:
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
Plumbing (refer to Division 15) including:
• Rough In: Piping for supply and waste lines.
• Traps, grease traps, line strainers, tail pieces, valves, stops, shut offs and
miscellaneous fittings required for complete installation.
• Final Connections.
• Ventilation (refer to Division 15)
• Roof mounted fans and connecting ductwork not shown as part of the kitchen
equipment.
Electrical (refer to Division 16) including:
• Rough in:
• Conduit, wiring, line and disconnect switches, safety cut offs and fittings, control
panels, fuses, boxes and fittings required for complete installation.
• Final connections including mounting and wiring of starters and switches
furnished as part of the food service equipment (unless otherwise indicated on
the drawings).
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Food Service equipment suppliers shall submit satisfactory evidence of compliance with
the following qualifications and conditions to be approved.
Successful completion of jobs of comparable scope.
Have manufacturer's authorization to distribute and install specified factory items of
equipment.
Maintain a permanent staff experienced in the installation of food service equipment and
preparation of professional style shop drawings and brochures.
Maintain or have access to shop meeting N.S.F. requirements. If other than food service
equipment suppliers on shop, obtain approval of shop desired to be used.
Maintain or have access to a readily available stock of repair and replacement parts,
together with authorized service personnel.
SUBMITTALS:
Shop Drawings:
Submit to the Consultant for preliminary review within six (6) weeks after notification of
award, one sepia and one blue line print of professionally prepared detailed arrangement
plans (not traced from the Contract Documents) and mechanical rough-in plans showing
dimensions locations, sizes, elevations and capacities of all services required for each
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 1

item of equipment.
Submittal shall include bound brochures containing item flysheets, illustrations,
specifications, line drawings and rough-in information on all brand name items (items not
of his manufacture) hereinafter specified.
Two (2) preliminary brochures shall be submitted with arrangement plans, rough-in plans
and shop drawings as hereinafter specified, for preliminary approval. After approval,
drawings and brochures are to be submitted in the number as required by the Architect.
Professionally prepare detailed shop drawings at a minimum scale of 3/4" to the foot,
plus necessary cross sections at a scale of 1-1/2" to the foot, showing complete detail of
each item of specifically fabricated equipment. These drawings shall be based on the
floor plans and the following item specifications.
Drawings shall include accurately dimensions layouts and locations for all masonry
bases or recesses if required or called for hereinafter and shall furthermore, if applicable,
include accurately dimensions, details and locations of any special wall openings that
are required where items of equipment extend through walls.
Do not begin fabrication until shop drawings have been approved.
Food service equipment supplier shall furnish three (3) bound sets of dimensional prints,
data sheets, spare parts lists, and operating instructions for each piece of mechanical
equipment. These are to be prepared and submitted to Architect before demonstration
of equipment (refer to 3.43).
All brochures shall be bound in hard durable covers bearing the job name and date of
submission.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Delivery: Equipment shall be delivered only after the building is weather and vandal safe.
Storage: Store equipment in an area convenient to the point of installation in such a way
that it can be protected from the weather and job hazards.
Protection: Wrapping and protective coverings shall remain on all items until ready for
use and in the case of stainless steel items, until installation is complete and the job is
ready for cleaning.
JURISDICTION TRADE AGREEMENTS AND RESTRICTIONS:
Include the work specified, shown or reasonably inferable as part of food service
equipment. Portions of this work may be subcontracted to those qualified to do such
work, as may be necessary because of jurisdictional trade agreements and restrictions.
REGULATION AND CODES:
In addition to complying with applicable laws, statutes, building codes and regulations of
public authorities, comply with the following.
National Sanitation Foundation (to bear label)
National Electric Code
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 2

American Gas Association Laboratories
National Fire Protection Association
Occupational Safety and Health Act
WARRANTIES:
Warrantee in writing all equipment and fabrication against defects and workmanship for
a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance, unless noted otherwise.
KITCHEN EQUIPMENT LIST:
Item No. 1 – Stainless Steel Table Ten (10)
Manufacturer/Model: Advance Tabco SS-300 / SS-2020
Furnish and set in place per plans, elevations and manufacturer’s specifications
Provide Stainless steel table, 30” wide top, constructed of 14-gauge stainless steel with stainless
steel legs, drawer and undershelf.
Item No. 2 – Ice Maker and Bin Quantity: One (1)
Manufacturer/Model: Manitowac S-1202A / B-570
Furnish and set in place per plans, elevations and manufacturer’s specifications.
Dice style, air cooled self-contained condenser with stainless steel finish.
Bin construction to be sanitary stainless steel exterior, NSF approved with polyethylene bin
interior.
Bin to hold 430 pounds per ARI standard.
208v/60/3phase, 2hp, 11.4 amp.
Item No. 3 – Reach-In Freezer Quantity: One (1)
Manufacturer/Model: RLT132WUT-FFS
Furnish and set in place per plans, elevations and manufacturer’s specifications.
Provide Reach-In Refrigerators with full doors.
Provide door locking hardware and (13) sets of universal tray slides and omit standard shelves for
each section.
Unit to have metal door liners and guaranteed for life stainless steel breaker caps, door handles,
and cam lift hinges.
Mount on 6” high adjustable stainless steel legs.
Verify electrical with plans, 120volt 60/1phase, 1/3 HP.
One-year parts and labor warranty, Five-year compressor warranty.
Item No. 4 – Reach-In Refrigerator Quantity: One (1)
Manufacturer/Model: RHT132WUT-FFS
Furnish and set in place per plans, elevations and manufacturer’s specifications.
Provide Reach-In Refrigerators with full doors.
Provide door locking hardware and (13) sets of universal tray slides and omit standard shelves for
each section.
Unit to have metal door liners and guaranteed for life stainless steel breaker caps, door handles,
and cam lift hinges.
Mount on 6” high adjustable stainless steel legs.
Verify electrical with plans, 120volt 60/1phase, 1/3 HP.
One-year parts and labor warranty, Five-year compressor warranty.
Item No. 5 – Pass Through Heated Cabinet Quantity: One (1)
Manufacturer/ Model: Traulsen RHF132WP-HHS
Furnish and set in place per plans, elevations and manufacturer’s specifications.
Provide one RHF132WP with half doors on server side and full doors on kitchen side, hinged as
per plan with controls to face on kitchen side.
Unit to have metal door liners and guaranteed for life stainless steel breaker caps, door handles,
and cam lift hinges.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 3

Provide door locking hardware and (13) sets of universal tray slides and omit standard shelves for
each section.
Mount on 6” high adjustable stainless steel legs.
Verify electrical from plans, 208 volt 60/1 phase.
Item No. 6 – Pass Through Refrigerator Quantity: One (1)
Manufacturer/Model: RHT132WPUT-HHS
Furnish and set in place per plans, elevations and manufacturer’s specifications.
Provide one RHT132WPUT with half doors on server side and full doors on kitchen side, hinged
as per plan with controls to face on kitchen side.
Provide door locking hardware and (13) sets of universal tray slides and omit standard shelves for
each section.
Unit to have metal door liners and guaranteed for life stainless steel breaker caps, door handles,
and cam lift hinges.
Mount on 6” high adjustable stainless steel legs.
Verify electrical with plans, 120volt 60/1phase, ½ HP.
One-year parts and labor warranty, Five-year compressor warranty.
Item No. 7 – Three-Compartment Sink Quantity: One (1)
Manufacturer/Model: Advance Tabco No.94-43-72-36RL
Furnish and set in place per plans, elevations and manufacturer’s specifications.
Provide one Three-Compartment Sink, 14 gauge, 300 series stainless steel construction with fully
welded bowls and 11” backsplash.
Unit to have three compartments 24”L x 24”W x 14”D with two 36” drainboards.
Mount sink on stainless steel legs and feet.
Unit to be provided with 12” wide, 16 gauge wall shelves 144” long with rear and both ends
turned up 1-1/2”.
Provide unit with Fisher #13196 8” c/c control valve, #2901-14 add on body, and #2928 spring
style pre-rinse sub assembly.
Unit to have two (2) Fisher #22349 DrainKing waste valves with locking basket strainers.
Item No. 8 - Disposer Quantity: One (1)
Manufacturer/Model: Salvajor Model 100
Furnish and set in place per plans, elevations and manufacturer’s specifications.
Stainless steel grinding chamber, stainless steel exterior, air-cooled motor, auto-reversing
controller with magnetic starter, siphon breaker, solenoid valve, flow control valve.
Provide unit with de-jamming wrench.
Power; 208v/60/3ph, 1 hp..
To be mounted on item 12 and 14.
Item No. 9 - Hand Sink: Quantity One (1)
IMC/Teddy Model CSW-1S
END OF SECTION 11400
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 4

SECTION 11450 - RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of residential equipment required is indicated on drawings and in schedules.
Each dwelling unit shall receive refrigerator, range, hood and dishwasher. Dining room
shall receive range and hood.
Types of residential equipment required include the following:
Range Hoods
Ranges
Plumbing requirements are specified in Division 15.
Electrical services and connections are specified in Division 16.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Certification Labels: Provide residential equipment which complies with standards and
bears certification labels as follows:
Energy Ratings: Provide energy guide labels with energy cost analysis (annual
operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade Commission.
UL Standards: Provide residential equipment with UL labels.
ANSI Standards: Provide gas-burning residential equipment with American Gas Assoc.
(AGA) seal of approval, complying with ANSI Z21-Series.
Uniformity: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of residential
equipment required.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for
each type of residential equipment, including data indicating compliance with
requirements. Submit operating and maintenance instructions for each item of residential
equipment.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers, after
spaces to receive them have been fully enclosed.
SPECIFIED PRODUCT WARRANTIES:
RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 - 1

Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty for each item of residential equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:
Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard colors as shown or scheduled. If no color
indicated, provide white.
36” Slide-in Range: Equal to GE #JSP39SNSS – 36” or approve equal.
Range Hoods: Denlar (Refer to MEP)
MANUFACTURERS:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
Amana Refrigeration, Inc.
Broan Mfg. Co.
Chambers Corp.
General Electric
Hotpoint
Sears, Roebuck & Co.
Modern Maid; Raytheon Co.
Whirlpool Home Appliances
White-Westinghouse
General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Built-In Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinetry or countertops with
concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and
rough openings are completely concealed.
Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been
completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper operation of
equipment.
Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Testing: Test each item of residential equipment to verify proper operation. Make
necessary adjustments.
Accessories: Verify that accessory items required have been furnished.
Cleaning: Remove packing material from residential equipment items and leave units in
clean condition, ready for operation.
END OF SECTION 11450
RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 - 2

LANDSCAPING SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
LANDSCAPING
02810 Irrigation ........................................................................................................ 5 Pages
02900 Planting ......................................................................................................... 8 Pages
02902 Vegetation Protection & Relocation ....................................................... 8 Pages
02930 Lawns ............................................................................................................ 6 Pages

SECTION 02810 - IRRIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION 02910 - IRRIGATION
1.01 SCOPE
A. An automatic underground irrigation system for exterior landscaped areas, but not limited
to, supply and installation of water meter, backflow device and controller, boring and
sleeving, rotary heads and spray heads in lawn areas and spray heads and drip lines in
shrub, ground cover, and flower bed areas.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Provide connection to water source or meter as specified and in accordance with
local code requirements.
2. Provide for an electro-mechanical controller.
B. Performance Requirements: Provide for irrigation at a rate of 1 in. per week applied at
2 or 3 day intervals.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Irrigation work to be performed by a Texas licensed irrigation company specializing in
commercial irrigation installation with a minimum of five (5) years experience on similar
projects. Owner/SSP Design to review qualifications and approve subcontractor prior to
commencing work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be formatted in a three-ring binder (10 copies) with tabs identifying each
section. Required submittal information for this section shall be included with the overall
landscape submittal and shall be designated ‘Section-25-Irrigation System’. The following
submittals are required for this section:
A. Product Data: Manufacturers' technical data and installation instructions for all
components of the irrigation system including controller system, pumps (if specified),
backflow devices, piping, wiring, wire connectors, valve boxes, valves, heads, rotors, drip
piping.
1.05 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Submit in writing verification of water pressure at meter or point of connection.
1.06 MAINTENANCE/WARRANTY
A. Provide the following extra materials to the Owner:
1. Two (2) wrenches for servicing each type of sprinkler head and valve installed.
2. Two (2) keys for the controller door lock.
B. Maintenance Requirements: Maintain the work of this Section for ninety days after
‘substantial completion’ and until final acceptance by Owner. Notify the owner in writing
of ‘substantial completion’. Maintenance period begins after owner’s acceptance of
‘substantial completion’.
IRRIGATION 02810 - 1
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02810 - IRRIGATION
C. Maintenance Service: Perform the following maintenance operations at least once a
week:
a. Test entire system and adjust timer as necessary and as directed by landscape
contractor, landscape designer or owner.
b. Replace or repair any broken parts or equipment.
c. Report any significant problems in writing to landscape contractor, owner and
landscape designer.
D. Warranty: Warranty shall cover all parts and equipment for a period of one year from the
date of final acceptance. Repairs and replacements shall be completed within two weeks
of notification from owner.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2241-83, SDR21, class 160 lateral piping; ASTM D1785, class
200 mainline piping.
B. Pipe Fittings:
1. Pipe Under 3 in., id: Socket type, ASTM D 2466-78, with solvent Cement, ASTM D
2564-80.
2. Pipe 3 in. id and Larger: Gasketed fittings of epoxy coated steel with nonhardening
pipe dope or Teflon tape for threads.
C. Concrete: 2500 psi min. compressive strength.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Controller: Electro-mechanical, 24 hr./14 day clock with manual operation capacity, with
adequate number of stations for system operating requirements (see irrigation equipment
table). Provide both freeze-protection and rain-sensor devices with controller. Provide
ground-fault interrupt and lightning protection.
B. Water Meters: Water meters in locations shown on plans. Contractor to coordinate
application, permit and installation with local utility company. Contractor responsible for
water meters and all associated installation costs.
C. Backflow Preventers: Provide and install backflow devices per local codes, specifications
and requirements.
D. Electric Valves: Normally closed, 24v AC, 60 cycle, solenoid actuated, globe pattern,
diaphragm type. Cast brass or plastic body and nylon reinforced nitrile rubber diaphragm.
E. Quick coupling Valves: Cast brass body with self-closing cover. Provide (2) brass keys
with 1 in. female threaded outlet.
F. Sprinkler Heads: Heavy-duty plastic sprinkler case, high density plastic sprinkler body,
corrosion-resistant internal parts, plastic spray nozzles with adjustable flow and direction
features.
IRRIGATION 02810 - 2
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02810 - IRRIGATION
G. Control Wire: 24v UL/UF., approved for direct burial. Provide color-coded wire with white
used for common (14-gauge, single-strand copper) and red for control (14-gauge singlestrand
copper).
H. Tracking Wire: 18 gauge copper (only where mainline and wiring bundle are separated)
I. Valve Boxes: Heavy-duty commercial grade, fiberglass reinforced, plastic with locking
covers. 10” Dia. Minimum.
J. Swing Joints: 3 high density polyethylene street ells with 8 in. Schedule 80 PVC nipple;
sized the same as inlet to sprinkler head.
K. Sleeves: Schedule 40 PVC. Boring as required under all existing pavement, walls or
curbs.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the site and conditions under which irrigation work is
to be performed. Irrigation contractor shall notify the landscape contractor in writing, with
a copy to SSP Design, if the site is unsatisfactory. Do not begin the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to irrigation
contractor. Beginning of work indicates acceptance of the site as satisfactory by the
irrigation contractor.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tracking wire along mainline pipe if separate from valve wiring bundle.
B. Excavating and Filling:
1. Cover for Piping:
a) Mains: 18 in. min.
b) Laterals: 12 in. min.
2. Use clean backfill material without stones larger than 1/2 in., debris or extraneous
material that may damage pipe assembly.
3. Compact all trenches to a minimum 95% Standard Proctor Density.
C. Pipe:
1. Provide boring and sleeves under pavement per plans or as required.
2. Clean pipe and joints before making connections.
3. Attach joints according to manufacturer's instructions. Threaded joints to be
coated with "Teflon" tape. Allow joints to set for at least 24 hrs. before applying
water pressure to the system.
4. Thoroughly flush piping before sprinkler heads are installed and test under
pressure for leaks in each line separated by valves.
D. Water Meters: Provide and install water meters per local codes, specifications and
requirements. Coordinate permit and application with owner and local utility company.
Adjust locations as necessary to coordinate with existing water line locations.
IRRIGATION 02810 - 3
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02810 - IRRIGATION
E. Back Flow Protection: Provide and install backflow devices per local codes,
specifications and requirements.
F. Valves:
1. Provide same size brass isolation valve on inlet side of every electric control valve.
Install electric and gate valves with at lest 10 in. of cover over the valve and at least 6
in. of cover over the stem.
Install valve box centered over the flow control handle. Provide 1 cu. ft. of clean pea
gravel in the bottom of each valve box with filter fabric below.
G. Controllers: Hard wire to nearest power source. Coordinate with general contractor.
Install on exterior wall in location as shown on plans or as directed/approved by
Owner/ SSP Design.
H. Sprinkler Heads: Install all heads on swing joint assemblies and flush with finish
grade.
I. Wiring:
1. Bundle and tape wires at 10 ft. o.c., max.
2. Snake wire in trenches to allow for expansion. Provide expansion coils at 100 ft.
o.c. max., and at the entry to each valve box.
3. Splice wires using mechanical sealant connector for a waterproof connection.
Make all wire splices within valve boxes.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY WORK
A. General: Notify the Owner and SSP Design at least 48 hours before testing is begun.
B. Hydrostatic Test: Test mainline piping to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psi.
Piping may be tested in sections to expedite work. Remove and repair piping and
connections which do not pass hydrostatic testing.
C. Operational Testing: Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed,
backfill is in place, and sprinkler heads adjusted to final position.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Check sprinkler heads for arc of spray. Adjust as necessary to provide 100% coverage of
all landscaped areas.
B. Adjust layout to conform to actual layout of landscape plantings.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate operation of the system to SSP Design and the Owner's personnel.
3.06 CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS
A. As-Built Drawings: Submit ‘As-Built’ drawings before project close-out showing the
irrigation system layout, including line locations and sizes, spray heads and types, points
of connection, location of backflow device(s), controller, and other installation information.
B. Zoning Diagram: Submit 3 copies of ‘Zoning Diagram’ (laminated plans, 11x17) indicating
IRRIGATION 02810 - 4
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02810 - IRRIGATION
all zones and their corresponding numbers for the controller.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit Manufacturers' operation and maintenance
instructions and laminated letter size valve zoning diagram.
END OF SECTION 02910
IRRIGATION 02810 - 5
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02900 - PLANTING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Supply and installation of all approved materials, labor, equipment, transportation and
services required and incidental thereto, in conformity with the plans and
specifications, including but not limited to; fine grading, earth mounding, bed
excavation and preparation, bed edging, planting soil/mixes, fertilizer, mulch, trees,
palms, shrubs, ground covers, sod, staking, clean-up, maintenance, and warranty.
B. Related Sections:
1. Earthwork
2. Irrigation – 02810
3. Lawns – 02930
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. General: "Hortus Third," 1976.
B. Texas Association of Nurserymen, Grades and Standards for Nursery Stock.
C. Plant Material: "American Standard for Nursery Stock,” ANSI Z60.1-1990.
D. National Arborist Association Standards
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Specimen Plants: Plants having exceptional character, superiority in form and
branching, and the best attributes of the species; all as determined by the Architect,
Landscape Designer or Owner.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Landscape work to be performed by a single firm specializing in commercial landscape
work with a minimum of five (5) years experience on similar type projects. Owner/SSP
Design to review qualifications and approve subcontractor prior to commencing work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be formatted in a three-ring binder (10 copies) with tabs identifying each
section. Landscape Submittals shall also include submittal requirements for Section
02810-Irrigation and 02930-Lawns. The following submittals are required for this
section:
A. Landscape Construction Schedule
B. Edging
C. Post emergent Herbicides
D. Pre emergent Herbicides
E. Soils, Compost and Mulch
F. Sources of all Plant Materials (including photos of all plants for approval)
G. Product Data Material Safety Data Sheets
Planting 02900 - 1
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02900 - PLANTING
H. Paving Materials
I. Lawns (fertilizers, herbicides, maintenance)
J. Irrigation Product Information
K. Samples: One foot section of edging (as specified on plans), one pound bag sample of
each; topsoil, premium compost and mulch.
L. Name of Subcontractor for pruning trees (Certified I.S.A. Arborist)
1.05 PROTECTION
A. Before commencing work, contractor shall place orange construction fencing around
all vegetation labeled “to remain” on landscape plans. Fencing shall be placed
squarely around each tree 6’ x 6’ and at least 60” in height or continuously around
groups of vegetation as shown on plans. No work may begin until this requirement is
fulfilled. All other vegetation not labeled “to remain” shall be cleared and grubbed
including root systems.
B. In order to avoid damage to roots, bark or lower branches, no truck or other equipment
shall be driven or parked within the drip line of any tree, unless the tree overspreads a
paved way.
C. The contractor shall use any and all precautionary measure when performing work
around trees, walks, pavements, utilities, and any other features either existing or
previously installed under this Contract.
D. The Contractor shall adjust depth of earthwork and loaming when working immediately
adjacent to any of the aforementioned features in order to prevent disturbing tree
roots, undermining walks and pavements, and damage in general to any existing or
newly incorporated item.
E. Where excavating, fill or grading is required within the branch spread of trees that are
to remain, the work shall be performed as follows:
a. TRENCHING: When trenching occurs around trees to remain, the tree roots shall
not be cut but the trench shall be tunneled under or around the roots by careful
hand digging and without injury to the roots.
b. RAISING GRADES: When the existing grade at tree is below the now finished
grade, and fill not exceeding 16 inches (16") is required, clean, washed gravel
graded from one to two inches (1" - 2") in size shall be placed directly around the
tree trunk. The gravel shall extend out from trunk on all sides a minimum of 18
inches (18") and finish approximately two inches (2") above the finished grade at
tree. Install gravel before any earth fill is placed. New earth fill shall not be left in
contact with the trunks of any trees requiring fill. Where fill exceeding 16 inches
(16") is required, a dry laid tree well shall be constructed around the trunk of the
tree. The tree well shall extend out from the trunk on all sides a minimum of three
feet (3') and to three inches (3") above finish grade. Coarse grade rock shall be
placed directly around the tree well extending out the drip line of the tree. Clean,
washed gravel graded from one to two inches (1" - 2") in size shall be placed
directly over the coarse rock to a depth of three inches (3"). Approved backfill
material shall be placed directly over the washed gravel to desired finished grade.
Planting 02900 - 2
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02900 - PLANTING
c. LOWERING GRADES: Existing trees in areas where the now finished grade is to
be lowered shall have regarding work done by hand to elevation as indicated.
Roots as required shall be cut cleanly three inches (3") below finished grade and
scars covered with tree paint.
d. Trees marked for preservation that are located more than six inches (6") above
proposed grades shall stand on broad rounded mounds and be graded smoothly
into the lower level. Trees located more than 16 inches (16") above proposed
grades shall have a dry laid stonewall, or other retaining structure as detailed on
the plans, constructed a minimum of five feet (5') from the trunk. Exposed or
broken roots shall be cut clean and covered with topsoil.
F. Contractor is responsible for all protection measures listed above. If these procedures
are not followed, contractor is responsible for replacement of existing trees with
approved trees of equal caliper and height.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Transport plant materials covered or in closed vehicles to
protect from exposure to heat and wind. Spray trees and in full leaf with anti-desiccant
- as recommended by the manufacturer - before shipping. Take precautions to protect
plant materials from desiccation and from damage to bark, branches and roots. Do
not allow root balls to crack. Schedule shipments to coincide with planting work
schedule.
B. Storage and Protection: If planting is delayed after delivery, keep plants in a shaded
area, cover roots with mulch or topsoil, and keep plants constantly watered until
planted.
1.07 MAINTENANCE/WARRANTY
A. Maintenance Requirements: Maintain the work of this Section for ninety days after
‘substantial completion’ and until final written acceptance by Owner. Notify the owner
in writing of ‘substantial completion’. Maintenance period begins after owner’s written
acceptance of ‘substantial completion’.
B. Maintenance Service: Perform the following maintenance operations at least once a
week:
1. Remove and replace dead plant material. Prune plants to remove dead wood and
to maintain health of plants.
2. Maintain all mulched areas at a 2 in. depth. Remove weeds and grass from shrub
and ground cover areas and from watering basins.
3. Provide insect and disease control to maintain health of plants.
4. Irrigation:
a) If the irrigation system is operating, program and monitor the system to provide
adequate water for plants.
Planting 02900 - 3
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02900 - PLANTING
b) If the irrigation system is not operating, hand water plants. Deep water trees
each week.
5. Dispose of all maintenance debris/clippings off-site. Owner’s dumpsters shall not
be used.
6. Keep all site areas tidy and free of grass clippings, mulch or other foreign
materials.
7. Submit receipts/dates of all maintenance operations to SSP Design for approval.
C. Warranty: Warranty shall cover all shrubs/groundcovers for a period of three months
and trees/palms for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. Any plant
material deemed dead or unrecoverable by the Owner/SSP shall be replaced with
similar species and size within two weeks of notification.
1.08 RIGHT OF REJECTION
A. The Owner/SSP Design reserve the right to inspect and reject plants
at any time and at any place.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fertilizer: 13-13-13 Osmocote slow release fertilizer granules or approved equal.
B. Planting tablets: Agraform 21 gram slow release fertilizer tablets or approved equal.
C. Compost: Premium grade compost (‘Earthwise Organics’ or approved equal).
D. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous
plant growth, taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds
and roots; minimum pH value of 5.4 and maximum 7.0; organic matter to exceed
1.5%, magnesium to exceed 100 units; phosphorus to exceed 150 units; potassium to
exceed 120 units; soluble salts/conductivity not to exceed 900 ppm/0.9 mmhos/cm in
soil.
E. Mulch:
1. Shrub and Ground Cover Planting Areas: Grade A cypress bark; long, fibrous bark
strands free from wood chips.
2. Watering basins: Grade A Shredded Hardwood; long, fibrous bark strands free
from wood chips. Texas Natives or Approved Equal.
F. Plants:
1. General: Provide plant materials that are healthy and free from disease, insects,
and larvae and without damage to bark, branches, and roots.
2. Approval: All plants must be approved by SSP Design prior to installation. Any
plants not approved by SSP Design shall be subject to rejection. All trees/palms
must be inspected, approved and tagged by SSP Design at their place of origin or
as directed in writing by SSP Design. Container grown trees shall be obtained by
Glen Flora Farms, Inc. or approved equal.
3. Sizes: Measured after pruning and in accordance with the plant schedule.
3. Root Treatment: As follows in accordance with the Reference Standards:
Planting 02900 - 4
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02900 - PLANTING
a) Palms: Balled and burlapped or containerized if they have been in the
container for at least one growing season.
b) Trees, Shrubs, Ground Cover Plants: Container grown with a wellestablished
fibrous root system.
4. Palms: All new palms shall be field dug or containerized material in specified sizes
shown in plant schedule. All palms shall have good form (straight trunks)
consistent of its species, free of scares/abrasions/burn marks and disease and
insects, with large healthy root systems. Rootballs sizes for B/B material must
meet the following minimum specifications:
a) Sabal Palms - 44” diameter, 36” height
b) Washingtonia Palms - 36” diameter, 36” height
c) All Other Palms - 36” diameter, 36” height
G. Staking material:
1. Stakes shall be commercial grade T-Posts, 1.25 Gauge, 8’ Ht., Green with
orange safety caps on tops. Note: Do not drive through stakes through root
balls.
2. Tree ties shall be Poly Chain Lock – 1” width, black, ProLock or approved
equal
H. Edging:
1. Concrete Edging: Extruded, fibermesh reinforced concrete edging (per details)
Curb Appeal (or approved equal)
2. Tree Rings: 5”x30” Black Anodized Aluminum tree rings (painted black or
green). Dreamscapes (or approved equal)
2.02 PLANTING SOILS
A. Planting Mix: 75 percent sandy-loam topsoil; 25 percent premium compost; (3:1
ratio by volume); and specified fertilizer or planting tablets.
B. Shrub and Ground Cover Areas:
1. Where topsoil has been installed: Apply one inch layer in planting bed; till into
the top six inches of soil.
2. Where no topsoil has been installed: Remove twelve inches of existing soil
and replace with ten inches of ‘Planting Mix’ as described in Item A above.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the site and conditions under which landscape
work is to be performed. Have the installer notify the Contractor in writing, with a
copy to SSP Design if the site is unsatisfactory. Do not begin the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.
Beginning of work indicates acceptance of the site as satisfactory by the installer.
Planting 02900 - 5
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02900 - PLANTING
3.02 EXECUTION
A. Site Preparation: Contractors must visit and review site prior to bidding.
Compacted soils and sub-soils from construction activities must be ripped and
tilled until a loose, friable and free-draining condition is met. All existing weeds,
grass, stabilized sub-base material, rubble, excavated soil and other material shall
be removed from the site and disposed of by the contractor prior to starting any
new landscape work. Soil conditions around entire site must be approved by
Owner/SSP Design prior to rough and finished grading operations. Contractor shall
not install any fill or topsoil in landscape areas prior to site condition approval by
Owner/SSP Design.
B. Drainage: Landscape contractor shall follow grading as shown and specified on
Civil Engineer’s grading plans. Landscape contractor shall coordinate grading
operations with site contractor. Landscape contractor shall ensure final grades
conform to the Civil Engineer’s grading plan including grades around building,
swales, sidewalk under-drains/swales, roof drains, splash blocks and rock swales
through planting beds.
C. Vegetation Protection: Contractors are responsible for protection of existing
vegetation labeled on plans “to remain”. Protection of existing vegetation includes
supply and installation of protective fencing around all existing planting areas.
D. Bed Preparation and herbicide: All planting areas shall be free of weeds, grass,
insects, or any other deleterious material prior to bed preparation. Contractor shall
herbicide all planting areas with ‘RoundUp’ or approved equal at least two times
prior to installation of any new plants. Pre-emergent herbicide shall be applied after
planting and before placement of mulch.
E. Planting Beds: Excavate 12” of existing soil within planting beds and replace with
8” of imported topsoil and 2” of premium compost. Mechanically till into top six
inches of bed until a loose, friable soil condition is met. Final grades within all
planting beds shall be 2-3” below adjacent curbs to allow for mulch. Contractor to
ensure positive drainage throughout all landscape areas. Adjust grades as
necessary to direct water away from buildings and planting beds. Report any
discrepancies on all drainage issues in writing to SSP Design or the Civil Engineer.
SSP Design must approve planting beds prior to planting operations.
F. Edging: Edging shall be installed as shown on plans. Edging shall allow for tapered
drainage points to ensure free drainage away from all structures and walkways.
Edging shall be set flush with adjacent paving, sidewalks or driveways.
G. Grass Areas: Scarify, float and fine grade all areas to receive sod or hydromulch
for approval by SSP Design prior to placement of sod or application of hydromulch.
Supply additional topsoil as necessary to fill any/all low areas and ensure positive
drainage away from all structures and planting beds.
H. Berms and Mounding: Supply topsoil and construct berms as indicated on plans.
Berms shall have a maximum slope of 1:4. SSP Design must approve berming
and mounding prior to planting operations.
Planting 02900 - 6
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02900 - PLANTING
I. Planting:
1. Installation:
a) Excavate planting pit to depth and width indicated on Drawings.
b) Set root ball on undisturbed or compacted soil in planting pit. Remove
burlap, rope, wire, and all other wrapping material from top of ball.
Remove any binding rope which is not biodegradable completely.
c) Fill planting pit 2/3 full with planting mix, soak with water and allow
settling, and adding fertilizer tablets as detailed. Finish filling pit with
planting mix and tamp lightly.
d) Construct a watering basin as detailed and install 2 in. of mulch.
Water-in to completely saturate the root ball and planting mix. Add
planting mix where any settling or air pockets occur.
e) Stake all trees/palms immediately after planting as detailed.
2. Palms: New Washingtonia palms shall be cleaned (skinned) completely of their
leafstem bases and fibers to a height 4 feet below the crown. Sabal palms shall
be planted with their leafstem bases remaining but cleaned and trimmed
evenly. All palms shall be planted with several petioles or fronds tied up straight
with natural twine. Remaining fronds shall be trimmed or ‘hurricane cut’ to
lighten wind load on terminal bud. Contractor is responsible for removing or
cutting the twine supporting the fronds at the end of the 90 day maintenance
and remove any dead fronds. All palms must be inspected and approved on
site by SSP Design prior to installation.
3. Shrubs: All plants shall be of species denoted on plans and shall be containergrown
material at specified sizes. All plants shall be of size equal or greater
than T.A.N. standards for their respective container size. All material shall be
vigorous, well established, of good form consistent of species, free of disease
and insects, with large healthy root systems and with no evidence of being
restricted or damaged. All plants shall be inspected and approved on site by
SSP Design prior to installation.
4. Planting Holes: All tree/palm holes shall be excavated with a diameter at least
two times the rootball size and to a depth equal to the height of the rootball.
The bottoms and sides of each hole shall be scarified with a pick to allow for
free drainage and maximum root penetration. After tree/palm placement, the
hole shall be backfilled with a mixture of excavated soil and premium compost
mixture (Earthwise Organics ‘RGV’ Mix or approved equal). All holes shall be
tested/inspected by SSP Design for free drainage prior to installation of trees.
5. Watering Basins: Watering basins for all trees/palms shall be constructed in a
ring shape around each tree or palm trunk. This earthen berm shall be
constructed 6” in height and 36” in diameter so as to hold water and allow
infiltration around root ball. A minimum of 2 inches of cypress mulch shall be
placed within the watering basin. Watering basins must be maintained and kept
free of weeds during the entire maintenance period.
J. Insect and Disease Control: Apply treatment as frequently as required during
construction and 90-day maintenance period to prevent damage to plant material.
Use only chemicals specifically approved by TNRCC.
Planting 02900 - 7
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02900 - PLANTING
K. Pruning: All existing and new vegetation shall be pruned/trimmed by a certified
I.S.A. Arborist as directed on site by SSP Design.
3.03 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Remove debris from landscaped areas daily and sweep clean adjacent
pavements, if soiled by landscape activities.
B. Provide and install barriers, fencing or construction tape as necessary to protect
landscaping from damage or theft until final acceptance.
END OF SECTION 02900
Planting 02900 - 8
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02902- VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
General: Section Includes: Labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the
tree protection and relocation work.
A. Related Section:
1. 02900 - Landscaping.
B. Before tree excavation, pruning, removal, or relocation of existing trees, contractor shall
notify:
1. The Owner’s Representative and SSP Design.
2. Appropriate utility companies for spotting and coordination of service disconnection as
necessary to complete work.
3. Coordinate work with other trades.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. General: "Hortus Third," 1976.
B. Texas Association of Nurserymen, Grades and Standards for Nursery Stock.
C. Plant Material: "American Standard for Nursery Stock,” ANSI Z60.1-1990.
D. National Arborist Association Standards
1.03 DEFINITION
A. Toxic Substances:
1. Do not deliver any toxic substance or item to the site without furnishing to the owner a
Texas Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
2. Provide current MSDS information with each initial shipment.
3. The MSDS shall contain the following information:
a. The chemical name and the common name of the toxic substance.
b. The hazards or other risks in the use of the toxic substance, including:
1) The potential for fire, explosion, corrosivity and reactivity.
2) The known acute and chronic health effects of risks from exposure,
including the medical conditions which are generally recognized as
being aggravated by exposure to the toxic substance.
3) The primary routes of entry and symptoms of overexposure.
c. The proper precautions, handling practices, necessary personal protective
equipment, any other safety precautions in the use of or exposure to the
toxic substance including appropriate emergency treatment in case of
overexposure.
d. The emergency procedure for spills, fire disposal, and first aid.
e. A description in lay terms of the known specific potential health risks posed by
the toxic substance intended to alert any person reading this information.
f. The year and month, if available, that the information was compiled and the
name, address, and emergency telephone number of the manufacturer
responsible for preparing the information.
VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION 02902 – 1
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02902- VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. Protect existing trees to remain during construction phases. Provide tree protection barriers
for those existing trees adjacent to tree transplantation operations. Any trees scarred or
destroyed, designated to remain, will be replaced at the Contractor's expense, with
similar species, size, and quality. Provide temporary watering methods for vegetation to
remain on site – hand water if required.
B. Relocate trees/palms as noted on plans. Store and maintain relocated trees/palms in
contractor’s nursery during construction. Storage and maintenance includes regular
watering (or drip irrigation), fertilizing and pruning as necessary for healthy growth.
Storage area in contractor’s nursery must be approved prior to relocation. As directed
by Owner’s Rep/SSP Design, relocate stored material on site in locations shown on final
landscape plans.
C. Resulting tree pits of relocated material on site shall be backfilled with clean fill and brought
back flush with surrounding grade, unless the pits are to be immediately replanted.
Stabilize grade if required. Correct problems caused by erosion, wind, etc., in the
reclaimed area. Pits to be quickly replanted shall be surrounded by safety barricades to
prevent accidental falls into pits.
1. In areas where new plant material will replace relocated plant material, appropriate
planting soil mix shall be used as backfill.
B. Remove other vegetation per plans or as directed by the A/E to accommodate new
plantings. Prepare areas to be planted according to Section 02900.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a list of equipment, procedure, and labor force anticipated for use for tree relocation
for approval by Owner/SSP Design.
B. Submit a schedule by day indicating units to be dug and relocated. Note materials requiring
root pruning, and that the relocation schedule is to begin at the end of the specified root
pruning period.
C. Obtain permits required by the local tree or landscape ordinances which may include
meeting with the local City or Urban Forester.
D. Submit written certification that trees indicated to remain have been protected during the
course of construction according to recognized standards of the industry. Certify that
where damage did occur:
1. Trees were promptly and properly treated.
2. Indicate which damaged trees (if any) are incapable of retaining full growth potential
and are recommended to be replaced.
E. Submit for approval, proposed methods, and schedule for effecting tree and plant
protection.
VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION 02902 – 2
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02902- VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor's crew used for the relocation of existing trees shall have minimum 10 years
experience in relocation of existing plant materials and be recognized by the American
Association of Nurserymen and/or Texas Nursery & Landscape Association.
B. Unless otherwise specified, tree transplanting shall comply with NAA Ref.1.
C. Comply with NAA standards for pruning and remove branches from trees to remain to clear
new construction.
D. Recommend procedures to compensate for loss of roots (if any) and perform initial pruning
of branches and stimulation of root growth where removed to accommodate new
construction.
E. Perform tree repair work for damage incurred by new construction.
F. Provide routine progress evaluation reports on relocated trees until the end of the
maintenance period.
G. Evaluate existing trees and verify trees are free of disease and ready to survive relocation
from the site to their new location on-site or off-site.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Properly handle trees and palms during moving so trunks will not be scarred or damaged
and to avoid broken limbs. Broken limbs not causing the tree to be rejected shall be
repaired as follows:
1. Properly prune dead, dying, or damaged branches with clean, sharp equipment.
2. Remove injured bark and wood of a tree would with a clean, sharp knife to a point
where healthy bark and wood make contact at their margins.
3. Inspect and treat wound for insect and disease.
4. Seal wounds with bituminous base wound paint for all oak limbs greater than 3 inch
diameter.
B. Transport trees on vehicles of adequate size to prevent overcrowding, broken limbs, foliage
damage, or root ball damage.
C. Keep root balls moist during relocation.
D. Protect tree crowns with shade cloth to prevent desiccation and wind burn. Crowns shall be
periodically sprayed with water to help ensure against desiccation.
E. Handle plant material only in ways and means accepted by the landscaping industry and
accepted by the Owner/SSP Design.
F. Plant material shall be planted the same day it is dug. Coordinate preparation of planting pits
or beds to ensure this schedule.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. For relocated trees or palms that die, replace their canopy area with new trees as specified:
1. Canopy spread for all palms and trees shall be listed on proposal when submitted for
relocation work.
2. Replacements (mitigation plantings) shall be provided at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3. Proposed replacement canopy tree species shall be Owner accepted trees and palms.
VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION 02902 – 3
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02902- VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION
4. The specification requirements for these trees and palms are according to Section
02900.
B. Repair damage to other plants and lawn or construction work within the relocation area
during tree transplantation at no cost to the Owner. This includes, but is not limited to,
damage to curbs, walks, roads, fences, site furnishings, etc. Replacing and replanting of
damaged trees, shrubs or turf shall be according to Section 02900.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain relocated plant materials immediately after each item is planted and continued until
the 90 day watering period is completed, upon which time the Owner will take over
maintenance of materials following procedures and recommendations of contractor and
specifications.
B. During the maintenance period, maintain relocated plant materials according to procedures
described in Section 02900.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Tree Protection Fence: Tree protection fence shall be a minimum of four feet high. Orange
Safety Fencing (Tenax Heavy Duty Model No. 000044 attached to 6’ minimum “T”- steel
posts, driven at least 2’ into ground @ 6 foot intervals or approved equal).
B. Tree Protection Signage: Vegetation Protection Areas shall be labeled “Vegetation
Protection Area”. Signs shall be laminated or otherwise weatherproof and printed in bold text
so as to be easily read from a distance of 20 feet. Wording on signage shall be provided in
both English and Spanish.
C. Bone meal shall be steamed bone meal type, useable as a natural organic nitrogen fertilizer.
D. Compost, topsoil, planting soil, mulch, staking, and guying, shall be as specified in section
02900.
E. Fill materials shall be as specified in Section 02900.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VEGETATION PROTECTION
A. Initial Work: No other construction activity may occur on site until Tree Protection Fencing
has been installed and approved by Owner/SSP Design.
B. Construction Activity: All construction activity within the areas fenced off around the trees
shall be prohibited. This shall include the following activities:
1. Parking or driving of equipment, machinery or vehicles of any type.
2. Storage of any construction materials, equipment, stockpiling, excavation or fill, soil,
gravel, etc.
3. Dumping of any chemicals, (i.e. paint thinner from cleaning brushes), wash-out materials
from cleaning equipment, concrete or mortar remainder, trash, garbage, or debris of
any kind.
VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION 02902 – 4
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02902- VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION
4. Burning within or in proximity to protected areas.
5. Felling trees into protected areas.
6. Trenching or grading within the Critical Root Zones of protected trees for any purpose
without notifying SSP Design and owner’s representative 10 days in advance of
operation in writing. This includes utilities, lighting, irrigation, drainage etc.
C. Tree Protection Areas: Any work required by plans which is in a Tree Protection Area shall
be performed by hand. All work shall be performed in a manner to prevent compaction,
siltation and disturbance of the root systems of all associated trees and understory trees.
At no time shall tree protection fencing be removed or relocated without permission of SSP
Design and owner’s representative.
D. Subcontractor: The contractor shall be responsible for insuring that all subcontractors are
aware of all Vegetation Protection Specifications.
E. Critical Root Zone: Contractor may operate equipment within the root zone of trees to be
preserved only if buffered with 1/2" plywood with a 6” layer of wood chips underneath; or
12 inches of wood chips. Approval from SSP Design and owner’s representative is
required prior to operation of any equipment in tree protection areas. Root protection
measures shall be inspected and maintained throughout construction.
F. Location: Contractor will be responsible for installation of tree protection fencing around
trees and groups of trees to be preserved. See plan for locations.
G. Flagging: Prior to installation, Contractor shall flag or paint location of fencing in field for
verification by SSP Design and owner’s representative.
H. Contractor shall include supply, installation, maintenance, and removal of fencing in bid.
I. Tree Protection Fence: Fencing shall remain in place and be continuously maintained for
duration of construction.
J. Damage: Contractor will provide services as necessary to respond to damage by
construction activities within 48 hours of notification by the SSP Design and owner’s
representative.
K. Penalties: Failure to comply with specifications will result in penalties as prescribed herein
and by local codes and ordinances.
3.02 TRANSPLANTATION
A. Transplanting shall consist of on-site or off-site transplanting of existing trees or palms from
proposed construction areas to storage areas to permanent locations as noted on the
drawings.
B. Digging, Wrapping, and Handling: Plants shall be dug and prepared for moving in a manner
that will not cause damage to branches, shape, root system, and development.
C. Balled and Burlapped Plants:
1. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with wire mesh, burlap or accepted cloth substitute.
2. No balled plant will be acceptable if the ball is cracked and broken or if the stem or
trunk is loose in the ball, either before or during transplanting.
3. Balled plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball.
4. Protect ball and deliver to the site, plant immediately, and water thoroughly.
5. Ball sizes shall be as recommended in ANSI Z60.1
VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION 02902 – 5
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02902- VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION
3.02 PLANTING
A. Relocated Material:
1. Relocated trees/palms shall be planted according to procedures described for new
material, Section 02900. Verify final grades have been established before planting
operations. Ensure proposed planting pits drain by test-filling with water before
transplantation.
2. Continue watering and caring for relocated material as specified.
3. Mulch tree pit areas to reduce weeds, discourage foot traffic, conserve moisture, and
minimize temperature fluctuations.
4. Brace trunk and leave in place for approximately one year until trees are wind firm.
5. Wrap trunks and structural branches of thin-barked trees to protect against sun scald
and dehydration. Retain through at least one growing season, and through cold
season.
6. Feed with a diluted solution of N-P-K in solution form with a soil needle, providing
water, air, and nutrients.
7. Where foliage is retarded, spray with one of the soluble types of foliage feeders.
8. At time of planting, fill air pockets and keep roots, especially feeder roots, moist, live,
and healthy. Use soil needles for watering new transplants. Direct fine spray at
foliage to help harden-off new leaves.
3.03 STAKING AND GUYING
A. Stake and guy designated material according to procedures described for new plant
materials, Section 02900.
3.04 WATERING
A. Following transplantation, water trees daily for the first two weeks, every other day for the
next three weeks, and every third day for the balance of the three month
watering/maintenance period. Such watering shall thoroughly saturate the root ball to its
full depth.
B. Following relocation, trees designated for transplanting shall be watered as specified in this
section. Such watering shall thoroughly saturate the root ball to its full depth.
C. Provide manual watering of relocated plant materials for 90 days. If used, after watering
period, Contractor shall be responsible for the complete removal of all temporary
watering systems.
3.05 TAGGING
A. Trees within the designated areas for relocation shall be clearly marked by means of yellow
plastic surveyor's ribbons and coordinated with, inspected, and accepted by Owner/SSP
Design before root pruning and digging.
VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION 02902 – 6
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02902- VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION
3.06 ROOT PREPARATION
A. Trees to be relocated shall be root pruned at least 45 days before digging with clean, sharp
equipment.
1. Maintain root pruned materials by watering, weeding, mowing, spraying, fertilizing,
and other horticulture practices.
2. After root pruning, backfill with good rooting medium, fertilize with organic fertilizer to
promote root growth.
3. Mulch to reduce weeds, discourage foot traffic, conserve moisture, and minimize
temperature fluctuation.
B. Root Ball Size Chart: Root ball sizes shall be according to minimum standards set forth in
Texas Association of Nurserymen, Grades and Standards for Nursery Stock.
1. Trees-Minimum Ball Sizes:
Caliper Minimum Ball Diameter
3-1/2" to 4" 28"
4" to 4-1/2" 30"
4-1/2" to 5" 32"
5" to 5-1/2" 34"
Larger sizes increase proportionally.
2. Minimum Ball Depth:
Ball Diameter Depth
Less than 20" Not less than 75 percent of diameter.
20" to 30" Not less than 65 percent of diameter.
30" to 48" Not less than 60 percent of diameter.
3.07 CROWN PREPARATION
A. Shade and Flowering Trees:
1. Shade Trees: Selectively prune and thin crown to remove approximately one third of
the branches. Preserve the basic shape and form of the tree, eliminate crossbranching
and dead or diseased branches.
2. Hand strip selected species of all leaves following pruning and before moving.
B. Palms: Follow standard procedure for transplantation of palms as specified in Section
02900.
3.08 HAND DIGGING
A. Burlapping is required. Trees that are burlapped for relocation shall comply and be handled
in same manner as new plant material specified in Section 02900.
VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION 02902 – 7
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02902- VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION
3.09 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
A. Multi-Trunk Trees: Relocate multi-trunk tree as one unit. Measure unit by taking the
aggregate total of all DBH measurements.
B. Multi-Trunk Palms: Relocate multi-trunk palms as one unit. Unit shall be measured as
follows:
1. 50 percent of the value in dollars of the largest trunk in the grouping times the number
of trunks in the clump.
C. On/Off-site relocation:
1. Relocation shall include root pruning, canopy pruning, on/off-site transportation, offsite
storage and maintenance, hauling and dumping of debris, and 90-day
maintenance after final planting.
2. If the tree or palm should die within the 90 day maintenance period, remove the tree,
replace the material, and restore the site at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Tree Removal:
1. CERTIFIED ARBORIST TO CUT, TRANSPLANT AND STOCKPILE ALL OAK AND
MESQUITE TREES REMOVED OVER 18" OF CALIPER AT THE PSJA
MAINTENANCE WAREHOUSE. SALVAGED TREES SHALL BE CUT IN LONG
LARGE PIECES FOR RE-USE BY DISTRICT ON TIMBER AND
WOODWORKING PROJECTS.
3.10 CLEANING
CONTACT JAMES RODRIGUEZ WITH PSJA FOR FURTHER INSTRUCTIONS
A. Site Clean-up:
1. Upon completion of each day’s work, thoroughly clean up the project site.
2. Remove equipment, unused materials, deleterious material, and surplus excavated
material.
3. Fine grade all disturbed areas and the areas adjacent to the transplanted material to
provide a neat and uniform site.
4. All damaged or altered existing structures, as a result of the landscape work, shall be
corrected.
END OF SECTION 02902
VEGETATION PROTECTION & RELOCATION 02902 – 8
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02930 – LAWNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: The establishment of a complete and uniform lawn including fine
grading, sodding and/or hydromulching.
B. Related Sections:
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
1. Section 02930-Irrigation
2. Section 02902-Planting
A. Lawn work to be performed by a single firm specializing in commercial landscape work
with a minimum of five (5) years experience on similar type projects. Owner/SSP
Design to review qualifications and approve subcontractor prior to commencing work.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be formatted in a three-ring binder (10 copies) with tabs identifying each
section. Required submittal information for this section shall be included with the overall
landscape submittal and shall be designated ‘Section-20-Lawns/Fertilizer’. The following
submittals are required for this section:
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and application instructions for
fertilizer.
B. Certificates: Inspection certificate from Texas Department of Agriculture
indicating sod has been found free of diseases, insects and larvae.
C. Certificates: Breakdown of seed types, percentages, and mixture composition.
D. Sod Delivery Tickets: One per truckload indicating sod species, nursery
certification, date and time of cutting.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Sod Delivery: Have sod delivered within twenty-fours hours of cutting. Stack
sod with roots to roots, protected from exposure to elements during shipment.
B. Storage: Lay sod as soon a practicable after delivery. If installation is delayed
more than four hours, store sod under shade and keep constantly moist. Sod
must be laid within forty-eight hours of cutting. Do not pile more than two foot
depth of sod. Do not tear, stretch or drop sod. Do not allow soil to break free of
turf roots.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
LAWNS 02930 – 1
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02930 – LAWNS
A. Utility Construction: Do not lay sod or begin hydro-mulching until all underlying utility
work is complete, trenches backfilled, compacted and graded, and topsoil placed
and fine graded.
1.05 MAINTENANCE/WARRANTY
A. Maintenance Service: Maintain the work of this section throughout the construction
period until the Date of Substantial Completion and ninety (90) days thereafter until a
complete and uniform lawn has been established and accepted by the Owner/SSP.
1. Establish hydro-mulched or sodded lawns per planting plans. Reapply hydromulch
or re-sod as necessary until full and uniform coverage is obtained.
2. Mow general lawn areas at least once per week to maintain height of grass
at 2 inches or as directed by Owner/SSP. Mowing of general lawn areas may
be carried out using standard rotary type mowing equipment.
3. Trim/edge all lawn areas adjacent to watering basins, pavements, driveways,
walls, structures, curbs, planting beds, edges and islands.
4. Provide insect and disease control to maintain health of grass.
5. Apply pre and post emergent herbicides as required or directed to control
weed growth throughout the maintenance periods.
6. Fertilize general lawn areas with commercial grade lawn fertilizer until
complete and uniform coverage is obtained.
7. Apply top dressing (clean inorganic sand) to level any divots, depressions or
low spots during the maintenance period.
8. Irrigation:
a) If the irrigation system is operating, program and monitor the system to
provide adequate water for grass.
b) If the irrigation system is not operating, hand water grass.
9. Submit receipts/dates of all maintenance operations to SSP Design for
approval.
B. Warranty: Warranty shall cover all lawn grasses for a period of three months from
the date of substantial completion. Final acceptance will not be approved until full
and uniform lawns are completely established.
LAWNS 02930 – 2
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02930 – LAWNS
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: See Section 02900, Landscaping.
B. Sod: (See schedule for type). Provide premium #1 certified sod grown in a sod
nursery on sandy soil, at least 1 yr. old with a heavy top and a strong, well-knit
root system, and not more than five percent weeds or foreign grasses.
C. Hydro-mulch mixture: (See schedule for type). Lawn seed mixture shall be shall
be fresh, clean new, crop seed. Hydromulch mixture shall be composed of both
hulled and unhulled seed with an appropriate percentage of Rye according to
season of planting. The Contractor shall furnish to the Landscape Designer or
Owner the dealer's guaranteed statement of the composition of the mixture and
the percentage of purity and germination of each variety.
D. Fertilizers:
Initial Application – Scotts Starter Fertilizer (20-27-5) or approved equal.
Grow-in Period – Scotts Turf Builder (12-4-8) or approved equal.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the site and conditions under which this work is
to be performed. Have the installer notify the Contractor in writing, with a copy to
SSP Design, if the site is unsatisfactory. Do not begin the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. Beginning of
work indicates acceptance of the site as satisfactory by the installer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Topsoil: Refer to Section 02900 ‘Landscaping’ for topsoil amendment.
B. Site Preparation: Contractors must visit and review site prior to bidding.
Compacted soils and sub-soils from construction activities must be ripped and
tilled until a loose, friable and free-draining condition is met. All existing weeds,
grass, stabilized sub-base material, rubble, excavated soil and other material shall
be removed from the site and disposed of by the contractor prior to starting any
new landscape work. Soil conditions around entire site must be approved by SSP
Design prior to rough and finished grading operations. Contractor shall not install
any fill or topsoil in landscape areas prior to site condition approval by SSP Design.
LAWNS 02930 – 3
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02930 – LAWNS
3.03 INSTALLATION – HYDROMULCH/SEED
A. All exterior ground within the limit of contract, except surfaces occupied by
structures and paving, except areas indicated to be undisturbed, shall be
seeded, hydromulched or planted as shown on drawings. Furnish topsoil, finish
grading, prepare seed bed, seed, hydromulch and maintain areas as indicated
on the drawings.
B. Lawn Area Preparations - Grade areas to finish grades, filling as needed or
removing surplus material. Float all lawn areas to a smooth, uniform grade as
indicated on engineers grading plans. All lawn areas shall slope to drain away
from structures and planting beds. Where no grades are shown, areas shall
have a smooth and continual grade between existing or fixed controls (such as
walks, curbs, catch basin, elevational steps or structures) and elevations shown
on plans. Contractor to ensure proper drainage around all structures. Adjust
grades as necessary to direct water away from structures and planting beds.
Report any discrepancies on all drainage issues in writing to SSP Design.
C. Roll, scarify, rake and level as necessary to obtain true, even lawn surfaces. All
finish grades shall meet approval of the Landscape Designer, before
seeding/hydromulching operations. Loosen soil to a depth of six inches (3") in
lawn areas by approved method of scarification and grade to remove edges and
depressions. Remove stones or foreign matter over one inch (1") in diameter
from the top two inches (2") of soil. Float lawn areas to approximately finish
grades.
D. Lawn areas should be permitted to settle or should be firmed by rolling before
seeding/hydromulching.
E. Seeding/hydromulching shall not be performed in windy weather.
F. Lawn areas shall be seeded by hydro-mulching evenly with an approved
mechanical hydro-mulcher at the rate of a minimum of three (3) pounds per
1,000 square feet. In areas inaccessible to hydro-mulching equipment, the
seeded ground shall be lightly raked with flexible rakes and rolled with a water
ballast roller. After rolling, seeded areas are to be lightly mulched with wheat
straw or approved material.
G. Lawns shall be maintained by the Contractor for at least 90 days after sodding
and seeding, or as long as is necessary to establish a uniform stand of the
specified grasses, or until substantial completion of the project or until
acceptance of lawns, whichever is later.
H. Water seeded/hydromulched areas twice the first week to a minimum depth of
six inches (6") with a fine spray and once per week thereafter as necessary to
supplement natural rain to the equivalent of one inch (1") or to a six-inch (6")
depth.
LAWNS 02930 – 4
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02930 – LAWNS
I. The surface layer of soil for seeded/hydromulched areas must be kept moist
during the germination period. After first cutting, water as specified above.
J. Make weekly inspections to determine the moisture content of the soil and adjust
the watering schedule established by the irrigation system installer to fit
conditions
K. After grass growth has started, all areas or parts of areas, which fail to show a
uniform stand of grass for any reason whatsoever shall be
reseeded/hydromulched in accordance with the plans and as specified herein.
Such areas and parts of areas shall reseeded, hydromulched or sodded
repeatedly until all area are covered with a satisfactory growth of grass at no
additional cost to the Owner.
L. Watering shall be done in such a manner and as frequently as is deemed
necessary by the Landscape Designer or Owner to assure continued growth of
healthy grass. All areas of the site shall be watered in such a way as to prevent
erosion due to excessive quantities applied over small areas and to avoid
damage to the finished surface due to the watering equipment.
M. Water for the execution and maintenance of this work shall be provided by the
Owner at no expense to the Contractor. The Contractor shall, however, furnish
his own portable tanks, pumps, hose, pipe, connections, nozzles, and any other
equipment required to transport the water from the available outlets and apply it
to the seeded area in an approved manner.
N. Mowing of the seeded, hydromulched or sodded areas shall be initiated when the
grass has attained a height of one and one-half to two inches (1-1/2" to 2").
Grass height shall be maintained between one and one and one-half inches (1'
to 1½") at subsequent cutting depending on the time of year. Not more than one
third (1/3) of the grass leaf shall be removed at any cutting and cutting shall not
occur more than ten (10) days apart.
O. When the amount of grass is heavy, it shall be removed to prevent destruction of
the underlying turf. If weeds or other undesirable vegetation threaten to smother
the planted species, such vegetation shall be mowed or, in the case of rank
growths, shall be uprooted, raked and removed from the area by methods
approved by the Landscape Designer or Owner.
P. Protect seeded/hydromulched areas against trespassing while the grass is
germinating. Furnish and install fences, signs, barriers or any other necessary
temporary protective devices. Damage resulting from trespass, erosion,
washout, settlement or other causes shall be repaired by the Contractor at their
expense.
Q. Remove all fences, signs, barriers or other temporary protective devices after
final acceptable.
LAWNS 02930 – 5
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

SECTION 02930 – LAWNS
3.04 INSTALLATION – SOD
A. Sod shall be installed to all areas as indicated on plans.
B. Sod Bed Preparation - Grade areas to finish grade, filling as needed or removing
surplus dirt, stone, debris, etc. and floating areas to a smooth, uniform grade as
indicated on grading plans. All lawn areas are to slope to drain.
C. Sod shall be cut and laid on site the same day. Only healthy vigorous growing
sod is to be laid.
D. Always lay sod across slope and tightly together so as to make a solid area.
E. Roll or firmly but lightly tamp with suitable wooded or metal tamper all new sod
sufficiently to set or press sod into underlying soil.
F. After sodding has been completed, clean up and thoroughly moisten by sprinkler
newly sodded areas.
3.05 FERTILIZING – GRASS
A. General lawn areas shall have fertilizer applied in two (2) applications with a
thorough watering immediately following application. The first application shall
be one (1) week after the hydro-seeding using a ‘starter fertilizer’ at
manufacturer’s recommended rates. The second application shall be done after
30-60 days with an approved turf builder fertilizer at manufacturer’s
recommended rates.
3.06 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Remove debris from landscaped areas daily and sweep clean adjacent
pavements, if soiled by landscape activities.
B. Provide temporary protection fencing as required to protect lawns from damage,
theft or vandalism until final acceptance.
END OF SECTION 02902
LAWNS 02930 – 6
Catholic War Veterans Memorial
SSP Design, LLC
Mission, Texas February 2013

M.E.P. SPECIFICATIONS

Division
Section Title
Catholic War Veterans Park
Service Center Building Improvements
S. Mayberry & E. 1 st Street Mission, Texas
Table of Content
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13852 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Division
Section Title
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15050 MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15067 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15077 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
15110 VALVES
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
15415 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15485 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
15734 VERTICAL FAN COIL UNITS
15735 CONDITIONING UNITS (5-TON AND BELOW)
15815 METAL DUCTS
15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES
15838 POWER VENTILATORS
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
15950 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Division
Section Title
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
16051 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16140 WIRING DEVICES
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16442 PANELBOARDS
16491 FUSES
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 15000 - MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions,
and Division 1 Specification Section apply to this and other sections of Division 15.
B. Before submitting his proposal, each bidder shall examine all plans and specifications relating to
the work, visit the site(s) of the proposed project, and become fully informed of the extent and
character of the work required.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Perform all Division 15 work in strict accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of
Texas, and County and City codes/ordinances having jurisdiction over the project.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under this Division to avoid conflicts and to attain satisfactory and
complementary systems.
B. Coordinate work under this Division with work under other Divisions to avoid conflicts and to
allow for adequate installation, maintenance, and operating space. Obtain the Architect’s
approval for penetrations of other parts of the Work prior to affecting them.
C. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 1 to a scale of ¼”=1’-0” or larger;
detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in
relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations
where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of
installations are of importance to the efficient flow if the work.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
Specific meanings used in Division 15 (variant forms are inferred):
A. Work: This project, or the reference part.
B. Provide:
1. Furnish and install, complete with necessary appurtenances.
2. “Provide” is implied throughout this Division unless language is specific.
C. Required: Required by the contract Documents.
D. Necessary: Necessary in order to obtain a finished system in satisfactory operating condition,
and meeting all requirements.
E. Furnish: Procure and deliver, ready for installation, necessary and/or required.
F. Install: Receive, place securely, ready for connection to work specified elsewhere, and bring
into satisfactory operating condition, as necessary and/or required.
G. Connect: Connect properly to mechanical work. This includes non-physical “connections” such
as indirect waste drains.
H. Architect, Project Architect or Architect/Engineer Team.
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 1

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work under this Division includes providing complete mechanical systems for the project.
B. All items of labor, material or equipment not required in detail by the specifications or plans, but
incidental to, or necessary for the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of
work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection therewith, shall be furnished as if
called for in detail by the Contract Documents.
1.6 WORKMANSHIP
A. All labor shall be performed in a workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their particular
trades. All installations shall be complete in both effectiveness and appearance whether finally
enclosed or left exposed. The architect reserves the right to direct the removal or replacement
of any item which in his opinion shall not present a reasonable neat or workmanlike
appearance, providing that same can be properly installed in an orderly way.
1.7 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. All equipment and devices shall be installed in accordance with the plans and specifications,
manufacturer’s instructions and applicable codes. Contractor shall obtain written
recommendations of installation and start-up instructions from material vendors and comply,
unless otherwise required. Bring discrepancies between these instructions and project
requirements to the attention of the Architect, and resolve prior to construction. Provide signed
inspection report by manufacturer’s representative at system start-up to verify all is in compliant
for product warranty.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall warranty his work against defective materials and workmanship for a period
of 1-year from date of acceptance of the job.
1.9 TRAINING
A. Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Owner’s representative, provide a
formal training session for the Owner’s operating personnel to include location, operation, and
maintenance of all mechanical equipment and systems.
1.10 PERMITS AND FEES
A. Permits: Obtain special permits necessary for this portion of the Work.
B. Fees: Pay any fees associated with permits, required inspections, and permanent utility
connections to this part of the work.
1.11 LICENSES
A. Work under this Division shall be performed by organizations and individuals holding a current
license to perform such type of work by the authority having jurisdiction. “License” in this sense
means any process, regardless of its appellation, which is normally mandated by the authority in
order to perform such type of work within its jurisdiction. The stipulation of this paragraph
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 2

B. In the event that the licensed organization loses its license or is unable to obtain one, or the
licensed individual performing the work becomes unlicensed or deports the organization, notify
Architect immediately in writing.
1.12 UTILITY COORDINATION
A. Permanent: Provide all ancillary work necessary to obtain utility connections. Pay connection
fees. Arrange for connection in a timely manner. Coordinate time and arrangement of other
work with the serving utility, and comply with utility standards.
B. Temporary: Refer to Division 1.
C. General: The contractor shall verify to his own satisfaction the location, elevation and
availability of all utilities and services required, and shall adequately inform himself as to their
relation to the work. The contractor shall also verify location, conduct all necessary tests,
inspections, coordinate with owner’s representatives and utilities, and check or existing
underground utilities and lines before ditching. Repair of any cut or damaged lines or utilities
shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
1.13 LISTING AND LABELING
Materials required to be listed shall be listed and labeled for the particular service if a listing is
available. Obtain and comply with the terms of listings. Listed material include.
A. NSF: Potable water and sanitary waste systems components.
B. UL: Electrical materials.
C. AMCA: Air moving devices and related accessory items.
D. ARI: HVAC equipment.
E. FM or UL: Hazardous fluid and fire protection system components.
F. FIA, FM or AGA: Fuel gas system components.
1.14 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. All materials and equipment shall be new. Products shall be currently manufactured.
B. All materials and equipment shall be clearly marked, stamped or labeled for identification. Do
not obscure nameplates. Where manufactures nameplates do not meet the requirements of the
mechanical identification specification provide nameplates in accordance with the specification.
C. All products of similar type shall be provided by a single manufacturer throughout the project.
1.15 SUBMITTALS AND REVIEW
A. Contractor shall furnish to the Architect, within a reasonable time after award of contract, and
prior to commencing any work, complete brochures in quadruplicate (plus quantity required by
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 3

B. All data must be checked and any required changes noted thereon by the contractor, signed
and dated prior to furnishing same to the Architect for approval. Contractor’s attention is
directed that it is mandatory that he thoroughly review data prior to furnishing same to assure
that equipment is in accordance with plans and specifications and to assure prompt return of the
data.
C. Deviations: Specifically call to the attention of the Architect every proposed deviation from the
Contract Document requirements. Failure to identify deviations as such constitutes a
representation that all requirements are not met.
D. Review: Review of submittals shall not be constructed as releasing the Contractor from
responsibility, but rather as a means to facilitate coordination of the work and the proper
selection and installation of the products. All work shall be subject to final acceptance by the
Architect at the completion of the project.
E. If above information is not provided complete as specified above and within the allocated time,
all equipment shall be furnished exactly as specified without any substitutions.
1.16 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract.
B. Where one vendor is indicated for a product, it is to establish a level of quality and performance;
provide a product equal to that product in all respects from a vendor of equivalent performance.
C. Where multiple vendors are indicated for a product, any of those vendors meeting the
requirements may be submitted.
D. Some product specifications in this Division are of the Acceptable Manufacturer type. Vendors
listed as Acceptable Manufacturers are acceptable as vendors. However, the product
submitted is subject to review as being fully equivalent in detail to the basis of design.
E. Where multiple vendors are listed with product model numbers, each model and vendor is
acceptable, provide all requirements are met. Model numbers are indicated to the extent
believe necessary to identify a type and are not necessary completely.
F. The architectural/engineering team has designed the facility using requirements of the Basis of
Design equipment. Any substitutions from the basis of design, which will require additional A/E
design and/or coordination, shall include the cost of necessary redesign by professionals
licensed in the respective disciplines and the approval of the professional of record.
1.17 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 4

A. These specifications are accompanied by Drawings. The Drawings and Specifications are
complementary each to the other, and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called
for by both.
B. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic. Lay out work at the site to conform to existing
conditions; architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical conditions; to avoid all
obstructions; and to conform to details of installation as required. Provide an integrated
satisfactorily operating installation. All necessary offsets in piping, fittings, duct, etc., required to
avoid interferences between piping, equipment, architectural, and structural elements shall be
provided by the Contractor. Provide all necessary routing and offsets to avoid conflict.
C. Verify and arrange that sufficient space is provided for the installation of proposed products and
that adequate access will exist for service and maintenance of equipment. For this work,
adequate access shall be defined as meaning that service personnel can access and maintain a
piece of equipment without having to alter permanent construction. Further, for equipment
located above ceilings, access shall be available within 3 feet pf ceiling opening or lay-in ceiling.
1.18 COMPLEMENTARY DOCUMENTS
A. Contract documents are complementary; requirements are not necessarily repetitively stated at
each possible subject; consider that a requirement applies wherever applicable.
B. In the event of conflicting requirements in different parts of the Documents, the more expensive
shall be presumed to apply, unless the Architect clarifies the requirement in a less expensive
manner and waives the more expensive requirement in writing.
Since codes and standards are incorporated by reference, a particular conflict may appear in
that a reference may use language that implies that a particular requirement in the Construction
Documents is waived under the reference. This is not the case, unless specifically so clarified
by the Architect. Generally, the specific Drawings and Specifications take precedence over
waivers in multi-purpose reference documents.
C. Because of licensure and workmanship requirements, persons performing the work are
presumed to be familiar with applicable codes, ordinances, laws, regulations and standards.
Therefore, details of materials, methods, arrangements and size contained in such publications
are not necessarily replicated in the Contract Documents. This in no way deletes the
requirement of the Contractor to comply. In the event of an apparent conflict between such
publications and the Contract Documents, request clarification from the Architect prior to
construction.
1.19 PROTECTION
A. All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times to prevent damage or breakage
either in transit, storage, installation or testing. All openings shall be closed with caps or plugs
during installation. All materials and equipment shall be covered and protected against dirt,
water, chemicals or mechanical injury.
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 5

1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All subcontractors shall notify the General Contractor sufficiently ahead of construction of any
floor, walls, ceiling, roof, etc., of any openings that will be required for his work. All necessary
cutting of walls, floors, partitions, ceilings, etc., as required for the proper installation of the work
under this Contract shall be done at the Subcontractor’s expense in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
1.21 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain and update daily a set of “blueline” prints in the Field
Office for the sole purpose of recording “installed” conditions. Revise the drawings to reflect asbuilt
conditions, including all addenda, change orders, final shop drawing reviews, and field
routing. Underground utilities shall be dimensionally located relative to readily accessible and
identifiable permanent reference points, with accurate slope and elevation indicated. Submit
prints for review. Revise, certify accuracy, and provide two final sets to the Architect.
B. Owner’s Manual: Prior to final acceptance, provide two bound volumes to the Architect. Index
by subject. Include corrected submittals and shop drawings that reflect final review comments;
installation, operation and maintenance instructions, parts lists, wiring diagrams, and piping
diagrams; warranties.
1.22 INSPECTION, OBSERVATION, AND TESTING
A. Cooperate with Architect’s representative and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide complete
access to the work at reasonable times.
B. Cover-up: Prior to covering up work, or conducting observed tests, request observation as
appropriate. Provide adequate advance notice defined as a minimum of five working days. In
some cases the Architect’s representative may waive observation; otherwise arrange for
observed construction and testing prior to cover-up. Should minimize required notice not to be
provided and the contractor covers up work requiring observation, such work shall be
uncovered at contractor’s expense.
C. Pre-Testing: Self-inspect, pre-test, and remedy work prior to performing observed test.
D. Sectional Work: In circumstances where a requirement for phased construction or other
considerations dictate sectional construction and/or testing, notify the Architect when
construction begins on the first section of a system, and when the first section will be ready for
observed testing, as well as subsequent sections. Test in the largest practical sections.
1.23 WORK PERFORMED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS
A. Refer to Division 2 for piped utilities beyond 5 feet from the building.
B. Refer to Division 16 for power wiring systems external to equipment and control panels; starters
in motor centers; safety switches not integral to equipment or starters provided under Division
15.
C. Refer to Division 14 for kitchen, laboratory, medical and like equipment.
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 6

1.24 REFERENCE TO OTHER DIVISIONS
A. Refer to Division 16 for additional material requirements of electrical components provided
under Division 15, such as loose starters, wiring and devices integral to equipment.
B. Refer to Division 2 for additional requirements governing excavation and backfill, supplemental
to the requirements stated in this Division 15.
C. Comply with all requirements applicable to work required under this Division.
1.25 TESTING SERVICES
A. Additional Testing: In addition to any specified testing, the Architect may cause additional
testing to be performed by an independent testing laboratory or any other qualified party. If
such testing reveals deficient work by the Contractor, the Contractor shall pay for both the
testing and remedial work. If such testing does not reveal deficient work by the Contractor, the
Owner shall pay for the testing and the cost of repairing any damage caused by such testing.
B. Specified Testing Services: If independent testing services are specified regarding work under
this Division, cooperate fully with the testing agency. Provide access to the work. Provide test
holes and taps necessary. Remove work that is not tested on site, deliver to testing agency,
and reinstall if undamaged; replace if damaged. Provide utilities, operational capability, and
facilities for on-site testing as necessary.
1.27 WORK BY OWNER
A. The owner will award contracts on work which includes:
1. None.
1.28 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by the Owner.
1. None.
END OF SECTION 15010
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 7

SECTION 15050 - MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement
other Division 15 Sections.
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Concrete base construction requirements.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Mechanical sleeve seals.
7. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
8. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in Division 15
Section "Mechanical Identification."
9. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations.
10. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports.
11. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections.
12. Mechanical demolition.
13. Cutting and patching.
14. Touchup painting and finishing.
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. NP: Nylon plastic.
4. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
2. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Book: Submit product data for all Division 15 items in a single reinforced 3-ring
binder. Organize product data by specification section number. Provide table of contents
showing the following:
1. Specification Section
2. Description of item
3. Submission number (1st submission, 2nd submission, etc.)
4. Submittal status (Approved, Revise and Resubmit, etc.)
B. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and
identification materials and devices.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage
for mechanical materials and equipment.
D. Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.
E. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of mechanical
equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building
components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and
coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the following:
1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem movement.
2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties,
including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
4. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
5. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
6. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
7. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
8. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building
during construction.
9. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings
and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
10. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets,
light fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted
items.
F. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions,
capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors,
bases, and equipment spaces are increased. Additional costs shall be approved in advance by
appropriate Contract Modification for these increases. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies
of equipment are specified, equipment must meet design and commissioning requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for mechanical installations.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning
before closing in building.
E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities
and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8
Section "Access Doors."
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices
are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and
similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 3

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Dielectric Unions:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Co.
c. Eclipse, Inc.; Rockford-Eclipse Div.
d. Epco Sales Inc.
e. Hart Industries International, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
2. Dielectric Flanges:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Co.
c. Epco Sales Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Central Plastics Co.
4. Dielectric Couplings:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
5. Dielectric Nipples:
a. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
b. Perfection Corp.
c. Victaulic Co. of America.
6. Metal, Flexible Connectors:
a. ANAMET Industrial, Inc.
b. Central Sprink, Inc.
c. Flexicraft Industries.
d. Flex-Weld, Inc.
e. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
g. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe; Gustin-Bacon Div.
h. Mercer Rubber Co.
i. Metraflex Co.
j. Proco Products, Inc.
k. Uniflex, Inc.
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 4

7. Rubber, Flexible Connectors:
a. General Rubber Corp.
b. Mercer Rubber Co.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Proco Products, Inc.
e. Red Valve Co., Inc.
f. Uniflex, Inc.
8. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Metraflex Co.
c. Thunderline/Link-Seal.
2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.
1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10
percent lead content.
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum
lead content.
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead
content.
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 5

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.
2. BAg1: Silver alloy.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.
J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel
bolts and nuts.
K. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.
1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.
2. Followers: ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to
prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck
end types and matching piping system materials.
C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
D. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F.
E. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring
type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves,
phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
G. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 6

H. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe
connections. Include 125-psig minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher working
pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following:
1. 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Threaded.
2. 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.
B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze wire
braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to hose.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing
covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.
D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel,
inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges,
welded to hose.
E. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple plies of
NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 125-psig minimum working-pressure
rating at 220 deg F. Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
5. PVC: Manufactured, permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
6. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
7. PE: Manufactured, reusable, tapered, cup shaped, smooth outer surface, with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 7

B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to
conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw.
a. Finish: Rough brass.
b. Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set screw.
a. Finish: Rough brass.
b. Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
5. Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated finish.
6. Stamped Steel: One piece, with spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
7. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-plated finish.
8. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.
9. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with exposed-rivet hinge, set screw, and chrome-plated
finish.
10. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with exposed-rivet hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated
finish.
11. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
2.8 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each
application as referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than one type is specified for
application, selection is Installer's option, but provide one selection for each product category.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped;
permanently fastened to equipment.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating
and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible location.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes complying with
recommendations of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4-
inch- high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4-inch- high letters for access door signs and
similar operational instructions.
1. Material: Fiberboard.
2. Material: Brass.
3. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior-type stenciling enamel; black, unless otherwise
indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.
4. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated for piping systems, comply with ASME A13.1 for colors.
D. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap on, colorcoded,
complying with ASME A13.1.
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 8

E. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive,
color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A13.1.
F. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the
following color code:
1. Green: Cold air.
2. Yellow: Hot air.
3. Yellow/Green or Green: Supply air.
4. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
5. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Nomenclature: Include the following:
a. Direction of airflow.
b. Duct service.
c. Duct origin.
d. Duct destination.
e. Design cubic feet per meter.
G. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resinlaminate
engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine
subcore, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Fabricate in sizes required for message.
2. Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match
equipment identification.
3. Punch for mechanical fastening.
4. Thickness: 1/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Thickness: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Thickness: 1/16 inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches long; 1/8 inch for larger units.
7. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.
H. Plastic Equipment Markers: Color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the following color
code:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.
2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
4. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
5. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any criteria above.
6. For hazardous equipment, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
7. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as
possible:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and rpm.
8. Size: Approximate 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2
by 6 inches for equipment.
I. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
mechanical identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering,
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 9

and wording indicated for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical
systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide
identification that indicates individual system number and service such as "Boiler No. 3,"
"Air Supply No. 1H," or "Standpipe F12."
2.9 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout,
nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psig, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual
Division 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements
were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on
Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping at indicated slope.
D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal
runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 10

M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board
partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chromeplated
finish. Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.
N. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes.
O. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE removable sleeves.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
Q. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.
3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS.
b. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS.
c. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6-inch NPS and larger, penetrating
gypsum-board partitions.
d. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants" for materials.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless
otherwise indicated.
R. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger.
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 11

3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
S. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
T. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer to Division 7
Section "Firestopping" for materials.
U. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
V. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
W. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in
individual piping specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The
Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
4. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The
Soldering of Pipe and Tube."
5. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
6. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe
and Tube."
7. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal
seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry
seal threading is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being
threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
8. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices
and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and
welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
9. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size,
type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 12

gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten
bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.
10. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with
clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
b. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.
c. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.
d. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.
e. PVC Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.
f. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent cement
according to ASTM D 3138.
11. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and manufacturer's
written instructions.
a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
X. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS or smaller threaded pipe
connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in
diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Architect.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.
F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to
equipment shafts if possible.
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 13

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction
of flow.
1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1.
2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for
hot, uninsulated piping.
3. Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms,
and accessible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior
nonconcealed locations:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark
each pipe at branch, if flow pattern is not obvious.
c. Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter nonaccessible
enclosures.
d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced at maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25
feet in congested areas of piping and equipment.
g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major
item of mechanical equipment.
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch- high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches, 1/2-inch- high lettering for distances up to 72 inches, and
proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering twothirds
to three-fourths of size of principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between
multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers; or
provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing duct system service and direction of flow.
1. Location: In each space, if ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system,
locate signs near points where ducts enter into space and at maximum intervals of 50
feet.
D. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished
construction.
3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and application of
paint.
B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over
enamel undercoat and primer.
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 14

2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two
finish coats over galvanized metal primer.
3. Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over
enamel undercoat and primer.
4. Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats
over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two
finish coats over galvanized metal primer.
6. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish
coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates
for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psig, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor
mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.8 DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove Work specified in Division 15 Sections.
B. If pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged
portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.
C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 15

D. Work Abandoned in Place: Cut and remove underground pipe a minimum of 2 inches beyond
face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.
E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from Project site.
F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational
equipment indicated for relocation.
3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for
mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.10 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump
and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 15050
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 16

SECTION 15067 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and
equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Fiberglass pipe hangers.
4. Metal framing systems.
5. Fiberglass strut systems.
6. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
7. Fastener systems.
8. Pipe stands.
9. Equipment supports.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for pipe hangers for fire-protection piping.
3. Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for
vibration isolation devices.
4. Division 15 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and
anchors.
5. Division 15 Section(s) "Metal Ducts” for duct hangers and supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 1

C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Fiberglass pipe hangers.
3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
4. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Fiberglass strut systems. Include Product Data for components.
4. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
5. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code—Steel”
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Available Manufacturers:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 2

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.
2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
5. Empire Industries, Inc.
6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
8. Grinnell Corp.
9. GS Metals Corp.
10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
12. PHS Industries, Inc.
13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
14. Tolco Inc.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.4 FIBERGLASS PIPE HANGERS
A. Clevis-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: Similar to MSS Type 1, steel pipe hanger except hanger
is made of fiberglass and continuous-thread rod and nuts are made of polyurethane or stainless
steel.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Champion Fiberglass, Inc.
c. Cope, T. J., Inc.; Tyco International, Ltd.
d. Seasafe, Inc.
e. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
f. Wesanco, Inc.
B. Strap-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: Made of fiberglass loop with stainless-steel continuousthread
rod, nuts, and support hook.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Plasti-Fab, Inc.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 3

2.5 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels
and other components.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Tolco Inc.
7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.6 FIBERGLASS STRUT SYSTEMS
A. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, similar to MFMA-3, made of
fiberglass channels and other components.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. Champion Fiberglass, Inc.
3. Cope, T. J., Inc.; Tyco International Ltd.
4. Seasafe, Inc.
2.7 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- (690-kPa-) minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in
sheet metal shield.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3. PHS Industries, Inc.
4. Pipe Shields, Inc.
5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 4

G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
2.8 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials where used.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Empire Industries, Inc.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Powers Fasteners.
2.9 PIPE STAND FABRICATION
A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosionresistant
components to support roof-mounted piping.
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped
cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
b. MIRO Industries.
C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof
installation without membrane penetration.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. MIRO Industries.
D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 5

1. Available Manufacturers:
a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
b. MIRO Industries.
c. Portable Pipe Hangers.
2. Base: Stainless steel.
3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuousthread
rods.
4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainlesssteel,
roller-type pipe support.
E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Portable Pipe Hangers.
2. Bases: One or more plastic.
3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structuralsteel
shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof
curb.
2.10 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel
shapes.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 6

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232
deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm)
of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to
DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2 (DN 15 to DN 50).
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to DN 200).
11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN 10 to DN 80).
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to
DN 750).
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100
to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36
(DN 100 to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and
with U-bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900), if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to
DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20 (DN 65 to DN 500), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 7

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to
DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but
vertical adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24 (DN 50
to DN 600), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might
occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be
required in addition to expansion and contraction.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4
to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy
loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 8

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-
1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 9

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Fiberglass Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and
MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
E. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.
F. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
G. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Pipe Stand Installation:
1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on
smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and
mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof
Accessories" for curbs.
I. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
J. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
K. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
L. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 10

M. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)]
and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
N. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
O. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
P. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution
plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution
plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch
(1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch
(1.52 mm) thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch
(1.91 mm) thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch
(2.67 mm) thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 11

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm).
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 15062
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15067 - 12

SECTION 15077 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Pipe labels.
3. Duct labels.
4. Stencils.
5. Valve tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
D. Valve numbering scheme.
E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15077 -1

1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) minimum thickness, and
having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm),
and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary
lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: White.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm),
and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary
lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4)
bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
2.2 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference
of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15077 -2

2.3 DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16
inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering twothirds
to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
2.4 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height
of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for access
panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may
be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless
otherwise indicated.
2.5 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation
and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1. Tag Material: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) minimum thickness, and having
predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15077 -3

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25
feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color
codes:
B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be
provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1
inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location
of required identification.
C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of
50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling
system.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15077 -4

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use
fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
END OF SECTION 15077
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15077 -5

SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for duct, equipment, and pipe, including the
following:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Phenolic Foam.
b. Cellular glass.
c. Flexible elastomeric.
d. Mineral fiber.
2. Fire-rated insulation systems.
3. Insulating cements.
4. Adhesives.
5. Mastics.
6. Lagging adhesives.
7. Sealants.
8. Factory-applied jackets.
9. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
10. Field-applied cloths.
11. Field-applied jackets.
12. Tapes.
13. Securements.
14. Corner angles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Hydronic Distribution" for loose-fill pipe insulation in underground
piping outside the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ASJ: All-service jacket.
B. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper.
C. FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene.
D. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 1

E. SSL: Self-sealing lap.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
3. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation.
4. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.
5. Application of field-applied jackets.
6. Application at linkages of control devices.
7. Field application for each equipment type.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
E. Field quality-control inspection reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 2

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 3

F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Available Products:
a. ACS.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
3. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
4. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Available Products:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket.
Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Available Products:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
I. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For equipment applications, provide insulation
with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Available Products:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
c. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
J. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Available Products:
a. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
b. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation.
c. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 4

ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
2.3 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS
A. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is UL
tested and certified to provide a 1 or 2-hour fire rating, as required.
1. Products:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek.
b. Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap.
c. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap.
d. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products.
2.4 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
2.5 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of
minus 75 to plus 300 deg F (minus 59 to plus 149 deg C).
C. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1. Products:
2.6 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Products:
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 5

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-30.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-25.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil (0.9-
mm) dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.7 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation
materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fireresistant
lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 82 deg C).
3. Color: White.
2.8 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F (Minus 73 to plus 149 deg C).
5. Color: White or gray.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C).
4. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C).
4. Color: White.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 6

2.9 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.10 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. (68 g/sq. m) with a
thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm) for covering
pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Duct and Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd.
(203 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch (2 strands by 2 strands/sq.
mm) for covering equipment.
2.11 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a
minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (271 g/sq. m).
2.12 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; thickness 20 mil; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
2. Color: White.
3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap
and supply covers for lavatories.
4. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
D. Metal Jacket:
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 7

1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or
5005, Temper H-14.
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
b. Thickness: 0.020” Smooth.
c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene
and kraft paper.
d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene
and kraft paper.
e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius
elbows.
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not
available.
2.13 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 6 mils.
3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 500 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 8

1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 5 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
2.14 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
2. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to
accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for
capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated.
2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.
2.15 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to
ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 9

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings,
valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 10

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps
with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer
to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and
at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush
with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 11

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least
2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For
penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves
and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation.
Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.5 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of
horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c.
each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to
hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
3.6 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 50 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 12

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including
contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end
joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on
sides of tanks and vessels as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service
temperature and with substrate.
c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation
end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks
and vessels.
f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band
material compatible with insulation materials.
6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and
where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing
insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make
taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle
around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between
two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around
outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from
the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles
along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this
network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.
8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,
handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.
9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,
joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation
over entire surface of tanks and vessels.
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:
1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box
joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt
flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- diameter fasteners with
wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.
2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.040 inch thick.
3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations.
Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 13

3.7 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric,
install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.
Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing
using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 14

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel
or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.8 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of
same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at
least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 15

2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.9 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness
as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
3.10 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 16

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at
least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of
horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c.
each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to
hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching
staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied
jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 17

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier
seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C)
at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic
applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and
over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal
to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of
horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c.
each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to
hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching
staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied
jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier
seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C)
at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic
applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and
over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal
to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 18

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.11 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end
joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-barrier mastic.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks
and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12
inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.12 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and
supports to maintain a continuous UL-listed fire rating.
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are
specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.13 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:
Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
Paint only those items in exposed, public areas.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 19

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material
and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to perform field inspections
and prepare inspection reports.
B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work.
C. Install new insulation and jackets to replace insulation and jackets removed for inspection.
Repeat inspection procedures after new materials are installed.
3.15 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
3. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.
4. Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space.
5. Indoor, concealed oven and warewash exhaust.
6. Indoor, exposed oven and warewash exhaust.
7. Indoor, concealed exhaust air.
8. Indoor, exposed exhaust air.
9. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.
10. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
B. Items Not Insulated:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Vibration-control devices.
6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.16 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 20

B. Concealed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Concealed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
D. Concealed, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
E. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
F. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
G. Concealed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
H. Concealed, rectangular, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
I. Concealed, return-air plenum insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
J. Exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Double wall insulated duct.
K. Exposed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
2. Insulation not required in conditioned spaces.
L. Exposed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
M. Exposed, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and nominal density.
2. Insulation not required in conditioned spaces.
N. Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
2. For rectangular ducts in public spaces, use double-wall insulated duct.
O. Exposed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and nominal density.
2. Insulation not required in conditioned spaces.
P. Exposed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Q. Exposed, rectangular, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
2. Insulation not required in conditioned spaces.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 21

R. Exposed, return-air plenum insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.17 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Round, flat-oval, and rectangular supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 3 layers, each 1” thick.
C. Round,flat-oval, and rectangular return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 3 layers, each 1” thick.
3.18 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
C. Chillers: Insulate cold surfaces on chillers, including, but not limited to, evaporator bundles,
suction piping, compressor inlets, tube sheets, water boxes, and nozzles with the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
D. Heat-exchanger (water-to-water for cooling service) insulation shall be the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
E. Chilled-water pump insulation shall be the following:
1. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick.
2. Phenolic Foam: 2 inches thick.
F. Condenser-water pump insulation shall be the following:
1. Not applicable.
G. Domestic water pump insulation shall be the following:
1. Not applicable.
H. Heating-hot-water pump insulation shall be the following:
1. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick.
I. Chilled-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
J. Chilled-water air-separator insulation shall be the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
K. Domestic hot-water storage tank insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 4 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 22

L. Thermal storage tank (brine, water, ice) insulation shall be the following:
1. Cellular Glass: 4 inches thick.
3.19 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Fire-suppression piping.
2. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
3. Below-grade piping.
4. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.20 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Cold Water:
1. Insulation shall be the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.
B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
1. Insulation shall be the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
C. Domestic Chilled Water (Potable):
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
D. Stormwater and Overflow:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
2. Insulation required only on horizontal runs.
E. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
F. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick.
G. Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within 10 Feet of Drain Receiving Condensate
and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 23

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
H. Chilled Water and Brine, above 40 Deg F:
1. NPS 4 DN 100 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick.
b. Phenolic Foam: 1 inch thick.
2. NPS 6 (DN 150) to NPS 12 (DN300: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.
b. Phenolic Foam: 1 ½ inches thick.
3. NPS 14 (DN350) and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 2 - ½ inches thick.
b. Phenolic Foam: 2 inches thick.
I. Condenser-Water Supply and Return:
1. No insulation.
J. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below:
1. Insulation shall be the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick.
K. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick.
3.21 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Water Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inches thick.
C. Chilled Water and Brine:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Cellular Glass: Refer to interior schedule for thickness.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 24

. Phenolic Foam: Refer to interior schedule for thickness.
D. Condenser-Water Supply and Return:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation not required.
E. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 ½ inches thick.
F. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
3.22 OUTDOOR, UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Loose-fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution
Sections.
B. Chilled Water, All Sizes: Use pre-insulated pipe system.
C. Condenser-Water Supply and Return, All Sizes: Insulation not required. Provide anti corrosion
coating as specified in Hydronic Piping Specification.
D. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, All Sizes, 200 Deg F and below: Use pre-insulated pipe
system.
3.23 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the fieldapplied
jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:
1. None.
D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed:
1. None.
E. Equipment, Concealed:
1. None.
F. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches:
1. None.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 25

G. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72
Inches:
1. None.
H. Piping, Concealed:
1. ASJ – factory.
I. Piping, Exposed:
1. PVC: 20 mils thick.
3.24 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the fieldapplied
jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:
1. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.020 inch thick.
D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed:
1. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.020 inch thick.
E. Equipment, Concealed:
1. PVC: 20 mils thick.
F. Equipment, Exposed:
1. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.020 inch thick.
G. Piping, Concealed:
1. PVC: 20 mils thick.
H. Piping, Exposed:
1. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.020 inch thick.
3.25 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET
A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over
insulation material.
END OF SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080 - 26

SECTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:
1. Bronze angle valves.
2. Cast-iron angle valves.
3. Copper-alloy ball valves.
4. Ferrous-alloy ball valves.
5. Ferrous-alloy butterfly valves.
6. Bronze check valves.
7. Gray-iron swing check valves.
8. Ferrous-alloy wafer check valves.
9. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
10. Bronze gate valves.
11. Cast-iron gate valves.
12. Bronze globe valves.
13. Cast-iron globe valves.
14. Chainwheel actuators.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction
piping.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts.
3. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
1. CWP: Cold working pressure.
2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
5. SWP: Steam working pressure.
6. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
VALVES 15110 - 1

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve
design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions;
and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated
capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1 for power piping valves andASME B31.9 for building services
piping valves.
1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water, sanitary waste, and storm drainage piping
valves unless referenced.
B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and
design criteria.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
VALVES 15110 - 2

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in the
"Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.
2. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger.
3. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
4. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller, except plug valves.
G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.
1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F (454 deg C) for angle,
check, gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F (216 deg C) for ball valves.
2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.3 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 2, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Crane Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. NIBCO INC.
B. Bronze Angle Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic PTFE or TFE disc.
VALVES 15110 - 3

2.4 CAST-IRON ANGLE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type II, Cast-Iron Angle Valves with Metal Seats:
a. Crane Co.
b. NIBCO INC.
B. Cast-Iron Angle Valves, General: MSS SP-85, Type II.
C. Class 125, Cast-Iron Angle Valves: Bronze mounted with gray-iron body and bronze seats.
2.5 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
b. Crane Co.
c. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Jamesbury, Inc.
f. Kitz Corporation of America.
g. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
h. Milwaukee Valve Company.
i. NIBCO INC.
j. Red-White Valve Corp.
k. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Safety-Exhaust, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. Jamesbury, Inc.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
B. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
C. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated
bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
D. Safety-Exhaust, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Two-piece bronze body with exhaust vent opening,
chrome-plated ball with vent, blowout-proof stem, locking handle, and working pressure rating of
600-psig CWP.
2.6 FERROUS-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
VALVES 15110 - 4

2. Crane Co.
3. Hammond Valve.
4. Jamesbury, Inc.
5. Kitz Corporation of America.
6. Milwaukee Valve Company.
7. NIBCO INC.
B. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-72, with flanged ends.
C. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves: Class 150, full port.
2.7 FERROUS-ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Single-Flange, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves:
a. Bray International, Inc.
b. Crane Co.
c. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Kitz Corporation of America.
f. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
g. Metraflex Co.
h. Milwaukee Valve Company.
i. Mueller.
j. NIBCO INC.
k. Red-White Valve Corp.
l. Tyco International.
m. Watts Industries.
2. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Hammond Valve.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
d. Mueller.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Victaulic Co. of America.
B. Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and
lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Single-Flange, 150-psig (1035-kPa) CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug
type with one- or two-piece stem.
D. Grooved-End, 175-psig (1207-kPa) CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Ductile-iron or
steel body with grooved or shouldered ends.
2.8 BRONZE CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 2, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Crane Co.
VALVES 15110 - 5

2. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Kitz Corporation of America.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
3. Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Crane Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Red-White Valve Corp.
g. Watts Industries.
B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc
and bronze seat.
D. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and
bronze seat.
E. Type 4, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and
bronze seat.
2.9 GRAY-IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type II, Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves with Composition to Metal Seats:
a. Crane Co.
b. Mueller Co.
c. Watts Industries.
2. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Swing Check Valves:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Mueller Co.
c. Victaulic Co. of America.
B. Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP-71.
C. Type II, Class 125, gray-iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats.
D. 175-psig (1207-kPa) CWP Rating, Grooved-End, Swing Check Valves: Ductile-iron body with
grooved or shouldered ends.
2.10 FERROUS-ALLOY WAFER CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
VALVES 15110 - 6

1. Dual-Plate, Ferrous-Alloy, Wafer Check Valves:
a. Crane Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Mueller.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Red-White Valve Corp.
g. Watts Industries.
B. Ferrous-Alloy Wafer Check Valves, General: API 594, spring loaded.
C. Dual-Plate, Class 125 or 150, Ferrous-Alloy, Wafer-Lug Check Valves: Single-flange body.
2.11 SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type II, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Hammond Valve.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. Mueller.
f. NIBCO INC.
2. Type IV, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. Mueller.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Watts Industries.
B. Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring-loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze
or alloy seat.
C. Type II, Class 125, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact-wafer style with cast-iron
shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle.
D. Type IV, Class 150, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and
threaded ends.
2.12 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 2, Bronze, Rising-Stem, Solid-Wedge Gate Valves:
a. Crane Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. Kitz Corporation of America.
VALVES 15110 - 7

e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Red-White Valve Corp.
B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge.
2.13 CAST-IRON GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type I, Cast-Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:
a. Crane Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. Kitz Corporation of America.
e. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
i. Watts Industries.
B. Cast-Iron Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-70, Type I.
C. Class 125, NRS, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim,
nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.
2.14 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 1, Bronze Globe Valves with Metal Disc:
a. Crane Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. Kitz Corporation of America.
e. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
2. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Crane Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. Kitz Corporation of America.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Red-White Valve Corp.
B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
VALVES 15110 - 8

C. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc.
D. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic PTFE or TFE disc.
2.15 CAST-IRON GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type I, Cast-Iron Globe Valves with Metal Seats:
a. Crane Co.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. Kitz Corporation of America.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Red-White Valve Corp.
B. Cast-Iron Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-85.
C. Type I, Class 125, Cast-Iron Globe Valves: Gray-iron body with bronze seats.
2.16 CHAINWHEEL ACTUATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co.
2. Roto Hammer Industries, Inc.
B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.
1. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron, of type and size required for valve. Include
zinc coating on exterior applications.
2. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.
3. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
VALVES 15110 - 9

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,
use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves.
2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Chilled-Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, Class 125, cast iron.
3. Ball Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig (4140-kPa) CWP rating,
copper alloy.
4. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
5. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Single-flange, 150-psig (1035-kPa)
CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with Buta-N liner.
6. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 300-psig
(2070-kPa) CWP rating.
7. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, horizontal or vertical,
bronze.
8. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze.
9. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron.
10. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 175-
psig (1207-kPa) CWP rating.
11. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Dual-plate, wafer, Class 125 or
150 ferrous alloy.
12. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type IV, Class
150.
13. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, Class
125, cast iron.
14. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
15. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 125, NRS, bronze-mounted
cast iron.
16. Globe Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
17. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast
iron.
D. Condenser Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
VALVES 15110 - 10

3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single-flange, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous
alloy, with Buta-N liner.
4. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 300-psig CWP rating.
5. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, horizontal or vertical, bronze.
6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze.
7. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron.
8. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP
rating.
9. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Dual-plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150,
ferrous alloy.
10. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 150.
11. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, cast
iron.
12. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
13. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, NRS, bronze-mounted cast iron.
14. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
15. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast iron.
E. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, cast iron.
3. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
4. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
5. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single-flange, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous
alloy, with EPDM liner.
6. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 300-psig CWP rating.
7. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, horizontal or vertical, bronze.
8. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 125, bronze.
9. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron.
10. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP
rating.
11. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Dual-plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150,
ferrous alloy.
12. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 150.
13. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, cast
iron.
14. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
15. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, NRS, bronze-mounted cast iron.
16. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
17. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast iron.
F. Heating Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, cast iron.
3. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
4. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
5. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single-flange, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous
alloy, with EPDM liner.
6. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 300-psig CWP rating.
7. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, horizontal vertical, bronze.
8. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze.
9. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron.
10. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP
rating.
VALVES 15110 - 11

11. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Dual-plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150,
ferrous alloy.
12. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 150.
13. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, cast
iron.
14. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
15. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, NRS, bronze-mounted cast iron.
16. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
17. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast iron.
G. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
3. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze.
4. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I or II, Class 125, gray iron.
5. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig
minimum CWP rating.
6. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
7. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, NRS, bronze-mounted cast iron.
8. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
9. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, cast iron.
H. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide
valves with threaded ends for heating hot water.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and larger: Flanged ends.
3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and larger: Flanged ends.
5. For Grooved-End, Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved. Do not
use for steam or steam condensate piping.
3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install chainwheel operators on valves and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend
chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation.
G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
VALVES 15110 - 12

3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION 15110
VALVES 15110 - 13

SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water-service piping outside the building from
source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.
2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with
80 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through
9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting
the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be
joined.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized. Include ends
matching joining method.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106,
Schedule 40, galvanized, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.
2. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket,
metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface and female threaded ends.
3. Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern.
4. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
5. Cast-Iron, Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125, galvanized.
6. Steel-Piping, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, galvanized, malleable-iron
casting; ASTM A 106, galvanized steel pipe; or ASTM A 536, galvanized, ductile-iron
casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.
a. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: AWWA C606, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include
ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.
7. Steel-Piping, Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping body
and slip-pipe section. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-plated finish on
slip-pipe sections, and flanged ends.
8. Steel-Piping, Double Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with
telescoping body and two slip-pipe sections. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods,
chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe sections, and flanged ends.
2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A), water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wroughtcopper,
solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wroughtcopper,
solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 2

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
4. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) copper tube or ASTM B 584
bronze castings.
a. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to
AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and
bolts and nuts.
2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Schedule 40 Pipe: ASTM D1785.
1. PVC Schedule 40 Fittings: ASTM D2466, socket type.
2.5 VALVES
A. Bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.
D. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
E. Underground, Water-Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter: Refer to Division 2
Section "Water Distribution."
F. Underground, water-service piping on house side of water meter. Use any of the following
piping materials:
1. PVC Schedule 40 Pipe: ASTM D1785.
a. PVC Schedule 40 Fittings: ASTM D2466, socket type.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 3

2. Soft copper tube, type K (type A); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
G. Under-Building-Slab, Domestic Water Piping on House Side of Water Meter, NPS 4 (DN 100)
and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K (Type A); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
H. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size
range:
1. NPS 3 (DN 80) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure
fittings; and soldered joints.
2. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper
pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
3. NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200): Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B) with grooved
ends; copper grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.
4. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Steel pipe; gray-iron, threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Steel pipe with grooved ends; steel-piping,
grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use
cast-iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Use cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Cast-iron, grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
C. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
D. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge
side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not
stop flow. Calibrated balancing valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Specialties."
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 4

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
B. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance.
E. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Water-pressure regulators
are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
F. Install domestic water piping level and plumb.
G. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end-pipe or grooved-end-tube coupling housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop,
and braze branch tube into collar.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe
rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 5

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).
E. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
2. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
3. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
F. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
7. NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 6

1. Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.
2. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 7

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to
provide flow of hot water in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
(50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm
(200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
END OF SECTION 15140
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 8

SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Special pipe fittings.
3. Encasement for underground metal piping.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Chemical-Waste Piping" for chemical-waste and vent piping
systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sovent Drainage System: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
C. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 1

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and
"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
C. Lead and Oakum: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.
2.3 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant
fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel
corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber
sleeve.
2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainlesssteel
bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
C. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type
mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal
tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,
and vent patterns.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 2

2.5 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Sovent Drainage System Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, cast-iron aerator and
deaerator fittings.
B. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type,
reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined,
and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Sleeve Materials:
a. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
C. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with fulllength,
corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.
D. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s)
with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated.
Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
E. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing
sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and
steel bolts.
F. Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409, PVC drainage-pattern tube and tubular fittings with ends as
required for application.
2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING
A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-inch
(0.10-mm) minimum thickness.
B. Form: tube.
C. Color: Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 3

B. Piping installed in building plenums shall meet requirements of materials within ducts or
plenums (ceiling spaces used as supply or return air plenums) and shall have a flame-spread
index of not more than 25 and a smoke-developed rating of not more than 50 when tested in
accordance with the test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Materials.
C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
D. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
E. Aboveground, vent piping all sizes shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
F. Above and belowground, sovent drainage system with soil, waste, and vent piping materials
indicated.
G. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping all sizes shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, cast-iron couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
3. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 2 Section "Sanitary
Sewerage."
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 4

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be
used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with
common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades
and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint
as completed.
H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100)
and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
I. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if
slab is without membrane waterproofing.
K. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
L. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
C. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 5

D. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
E. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
F. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
B. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves.
2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwater valve.
3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
4. Backwater valve are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install
the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe
rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum
rods.
E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)
rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 6

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
G. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and 5 (DN 100 and 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
H. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 7

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and
vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping
system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in
trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of waterbased
latex paint.
END OF SECTION 15150
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 8

SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs, piping supports, and roof
penetration boots.
2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and methods for
sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through exterior walls.
4. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports and installation
requirements.
5. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying refrigerant
piping.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for thermostatic expansion valves, solenoid
valves, and pressure-regulating valves.
B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
C. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX; "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
C. ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."
D. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing Components
and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."
REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183 - 1

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components with
other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
D. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through
fire and smoke barriers.
E. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:
1. Refrigerants:
a. Allied Signal, Inc./Fluorine Products; Genetron Refrigerants.
b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
c. Elf Atochem North America, Inc.; Fluorocarbon Div.
d. ICI Americas Inc./ICI KLEA; Fluorochemicals Bus.
2. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:
a. Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air
Conditioning Division.
b. Danfoss Electronics, Inc.
c. Emerson Electric Company; Alco Controls Div.
d. Henry Valve Company.
e. Sporlan Valve Company.
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L.
C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver)
REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183 - 2

2.3 VALVES
A. Service Valves: 500-psig (3450-kPa) pressure rating; forged-brass body with copper stubs,
brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, and with solder-end connections.
B. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750; brass body with stainless-steel parts;
thermostatic-adjustable, modulating type; size and operating characteristics as recommended
by manufacturer of evaporator, and factory set for superheat requirements; solder-end
connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass line, and
external equalizer line.
2.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALITIES
A. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500-psig (3450-kPa) maximum working pressure and 200 deg F (93
deg C) operating temperature; all-brass body with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window
with color-coded moisture indicator; with solder-end connections.
B. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers (For Systems Above 12-1/2 Tons): 500-psig (3450-kPa)
maximum working pressure; heavy gage protected with corrosion-resistant-painted steel shell,
flanged ring and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel cap screws; wrought-copper fittings
for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core kit, including gaskets and the following:
1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel support, ARI 730
rated for capacity.
2. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated alumina,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
3. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded, bonded core of activated charcoal and desiccant with
integral gaskets.
C. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 350-psig (2410-kPa) maximum operating pressure and 225 deg F (107
deg C) maximum operating temperature; steel shell and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end
connections; molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, within Building: Type L (Type B) drawn-copper tubing.
B. Belowground for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type K annealed-copper tubing.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of
compressor, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on each side of strainers.
B. Install packed-angle valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve and thermostatic
expansion valve for system charging.
C. (For Systems Above 12-1/2 Tons) Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around each dryer.
REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183 - 3

D. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to evaporator.
1. If refrigerant distributors are used, install them directly on expansion-valve outlet.
2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do
not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
C. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
D. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install
valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit
installation of full-thickness insulation.
F. Belowground, install copper tubing in protective conduit.
G. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed
to mechanical injury.
H. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
I. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, and expansion
valves and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
J. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats,
and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near
expansion valve bulb.
K. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports."
L. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6.0 m)
long.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6.0 m) or longer.
3. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet (6.0 m) or longer, supported by a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183 - 4

M. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4
mm).
2. NPS 5/8 (DN 18): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4
mm).
3. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm).
4. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(9.5 mm).
5. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(9.5 mm).
6. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5
mm).
7. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 108 inches (2700 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(9.5 mm).
8. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
9. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm).
N. Support vertical runs at each floor.
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Braze joints according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent
scale formation.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure.
2. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the
design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of
system.
a. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of
test.
b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution
over joint.
c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa) or higher
as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.
REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183 - 5

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.
3.8 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers
(67 Pa). If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
2. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig (14 kPa).
3. Charge system providing full-operating charge.
END OF SECTION 15183
REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183 - 6

SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."
3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and specialty fixtures
not in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with
disabilities.
B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in
this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts,
drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included
where indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances,
appurtenances, equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions,
construction details, and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 1

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-
336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-187"
about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
F. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for
fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
G. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.
2. Hand Sinks: NSF 2 construction.
3. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.
4. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.
5. Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other Than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M.
6. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
7. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
8. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.
3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
4. Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901.
5. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.
6. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
7. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
8. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
9. NSF Materials: NSF 61.
10. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
11. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
12. Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME A112.18.1M.
J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for bathtub
and shower faucets:
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 2

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASSE 1016.
3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.
4. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
5. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445.
6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
9. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
11. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M.
3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
4. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
5. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.1M.
L. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.
2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M.
3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
4. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
6. Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2.
7. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
8. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be
installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers, the following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 3

2.2 LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. Lavatory Faucet,: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. American Standard.
b. T & S Brass.
c. Kohler.
d. Chicago.
2. Refer to Plumbing Schedule for specification standards.
2.3 FLUSHOMETERS
A. Flushometer: Cast-brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open
feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, and copper or brass tubing, and
polished chrome-plated finish on exposed parts.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sloan, Royal.
b. Zurn, Aquaflush, AT.
2. Refer to Plumbing Schedule for specification standards.
2.4 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seat: Solid plastic.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Church.
b. American Standard.
c. Olsenite.
2. Refer to Plumbing Schedule for specification standards.
2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shielding Guard: Manufactured, plastic covering for hot- and cold-water supplies and
trap and drain piping and complying with ADA requirements.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Plumerer.
b. Truebro.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 4

c. McGuire.
d. Engineered Brass.
B. Urinal Support: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and
fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam.
b. Mifab.
c. Smith.
d. Wade.
e. Zurn.
2. Accessible Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
C. Lavatory Support: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod. Include steel
uprights with feet.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam.
b. Mifab.
c. Smith.
d. Wade.
e. Zurn.
2. Accessible Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
2.6 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets,: Accessible and standard, wall hung and floor mounted, vitreous-china fixture
designed for gravity-type tank, flushometer tank, or flushometer valve operation.
1. Products:
a. American Standard, Inc.
b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
c. Kohler Co.
d. Eljer Plumbingware.
2. Refer to Plumbing Schedule for Specification Standards.
2.7 URINALS
A. Urinals,: Accessible and standard Wall-hanging, bottom-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed
for flushometer valve operation.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 5

1. Products:
a. American Standard.
b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
c. Kohler Co.
d. Eljer Plumbingware.
2. Refer to Plumbing Schedule for Specification Standards.
2.8 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatories: Accessible and standard, Wall-hanging, vitreous-china fixture.
1. Products:
a. American Standard, Inc.
b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
c. Kohler Co.
d. Eljer Plumbingware.
2. Refer to Plumbing Schedule for Specification Standards.
B. Lavatories: Accessible and Standard Counter-mounting, vitreous-china fixture.
1. Products:
a. American Standard, Inc.
b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
c. Kohler Co.
d. Eljer Plumbingware Div.
2. Refer to Plumbing Schedule for Specification Standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water soil and for waste piping systems and supports to verify actual
locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports match those
indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data if roughingin
data are not indicated.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
B. For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C. Install back-outlet, wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 6

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building
substrate.
E. Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall
bracket and onto waste fitting seals.
G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing-in
drawings.
I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage
system.
L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities
to reach.
M. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
N. Install toilet seats on water closets.
O. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
P. Install water-supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
Q. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
R. Install shower, flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
S. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
T. Install disposer in outlet of sinks indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated or in
wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 7

U. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.
V. Set bathtubs, shower receptors, and service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for grout.
W. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.
C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.
D. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies,
stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect to
plumbing piping.
E. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections:
Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping
specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing
piping.
F. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 8

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flushometer valves to produce proper flow
and stream.
C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 9

SECTION 15415 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Drinking fountains.
2. Water coolers.
3. Fixture supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: Fixture that can be approached and used by people with disabilities.
B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.
C. Fixture: Drinking fountain or water cooler, unless one is specifically indicated.
D. Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinking water.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of fixture indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415 - 1

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-
336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about fixtures for people with disabilities.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-187"
about fixtures for people with disabilities.
D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for
fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
E. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-
Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers"
for type and style classifications.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installed to
comply with original design and referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers and their products or manufacturers only, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 WATER COOLERS
A. Water Coolers,: Accessible, ARI 1010, pressure with bubbler fixture.
1. Products:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
b. Halsey Taylor.
c. Haws Corporation.
d. Oasis Corp.
2. Refer to Plumbing Schedule for specification standards.
2.3 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Off-Floor, Plumbing Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M, water-cooler carriers. Include
vertical, steel uprights with feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching
fixture to be supported.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam Co.
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415 - 2

. Smith.
c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Drainage Products Div.
d. Zurn Specifications Drainage Operation.
2. Type I: Hanger-type carrier with two vertical uprights.
3. Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with three vertical uprights.
4. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of
steel pipe uprights.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of
supports match those indicated.
B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-hanging fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use mounting frames for recessed water coolers, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Set freestanding and pedestal drinking fountains on floor.
D. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain
copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-hanging fixtures, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water coolers to
mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install fixtures level and plumb.
D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be
easily reached for operation. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage
system.
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415 - 3

F. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern
escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.
G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,
silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.
C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.
D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Water-Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
C. Report test results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
B. Adjust water-cooler temperature settings.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 15415
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415 - 4

SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:
1. Backflow preventers.
2. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
3. Water regulators.
4. Balancing valves.
5. Thermostatic water mixing valves.
6. Water tempering valves.
7. Strainers.
8. Outlet boxes.
9. Washer-supply outlets.
10. Hose stations.
11. Key-operation hydrants.
12. Wheel-handle wall hydrants.
13. Nondraining nonfreeze post hydrants.
14. Trap seal primer valves.
15. Drain valves.
16. Backwater valves.
17. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
18. Sleeve penetration systems.
19. Flashing materials.
20. Cleanouts.
21. Floor drains.
22. Trench drains.
23. Roof drains.
24. Grease interceptors.
25. Oil interceptors.
26. Solids interceptors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
3. PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 1

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig (860 kPa).
2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
3. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate
materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components;
and piping and wiring connections for the following:
1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.
2. Balancing valves and strainers.
3. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.
4. Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems.
5. Drain valves, hose bibbs, hydrants, and hose stations.
6. Outlet boxes and washer-supply outlets.
7. Backwater valves, cleanouts, floor drains, open receptors, trench drains, and roof drains.
8. Air-admittance valves, vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies.
9. Grease interceptors, oil interceptors, and solids interceptors.
10. Sleeve penetration systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field test reports.
D. Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. Include the
following:
1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.
2. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.
3. Trap seal primer valves and systems.
4. Hose stations and hydrants.
5. Grease interceptors, oil interceptors, and solids interceptors.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of plumbing
specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping materials
and installation.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 2

E. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
domestic water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water
piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1
through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Operating Key Handles: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed for each key-operated
hose bibb and hydrant installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
B. Manufacturers:
1. B & K Industries, Inc.
2. Cla-Val Co.
3. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
4. Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters Div.
5. Park Equipment.
6. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
7. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
C. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with
flanged ends.
a. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow
preventers having cast-iron or steel body.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 3

5. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated.
D. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001, with floating disc and
atmospheric vent.
E. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and
manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to
rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.
F. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1012, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include inlet screen and two independent check valves with intermediate
atmospheric vent.
G. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and
strainer on inlet; test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap
fitting located between two positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
H. Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, suitable for continuous pressure
application. Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and two
positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
I. Antisiphon-Pressure-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1020, suitable for continuous pressure
application. Include shutoff valves, spring-loaded check valve, spring-loaded floating disc, test
cocks, and atmospheric vent.
1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
J. Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1024, suitable for continuous pressure
application. Include union inlet and two independent check valves.
K. Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1032, suitable for continuous pressure
application for carbonated beverage dispensers. Include stainless-steel body; primary and
secondary checks; ball check; intermediate atmospheric-vent port for relieving carbon dioxide;
and threaded ends, NPS 3/8 (DN 10).
L. Laboratory Faucet Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1035, suitable for continuous pressure application
and chrome plated; consisting of primary and secondary checks; intermediate vacuum breaker;
and threaded ends, NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8 (DN 8 or DN 10) as required.
M. Reduced-Pressure Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1047, FM approved or UL
listed, and suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate
valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; pressure-differential relief
valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between two positive-seating check valves;
and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and reduced-pressure backflow
preventer.
1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
N. Double-Check Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1048, FM approved or UL listed,
and suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 4

on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; two positive-seating check valves;
and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and double-check backflow preventer.
1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
O. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1052, suitable for at least 3-gpm (0.19-L/s) flow
and applications with up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure. Include two check
valves; intermediate atmospheric vent; and nonremovable, ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose
threads on outlet.
P. Back-Siphonage Backflow Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1056, suitable for continuous pressure
and backflow applications. Include shutoff valves, check valve, test cocks, and vacuum vent.
2.3 DISHWASHER AIR-GAP FITTINGS
A. Description: ASSE 1021, fitting suitable for use with domestic dishwashers and for deck
mounting; with plastic body, chrome-plated brass cover; and capacity of at least 5 gpm
(0.32 L/s); and inlet pressure of at least 5 psig (35 kPa) at temperature of at least 140 deg F
(60 deg C). Include 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) ID inlet and 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) ID outlet hose
connections.
B. Hoses: Rubber and suitable for temperature of at least 140 deg F (60 deg C).
1. Inlet Hose: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) ID and 48 inches long.
2. Outlet Hose: 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) ID and 48 inches long.
2.4 WATER REGULATORS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Cla-Val Co.
2. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
3. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
4. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
B. General: ASSE 1003, water regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa)
minimum. Include integral factory-installed or separate field-installed, Y-pattern strainer.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. General-Duty Service: Single-seated, direct operated, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Booster Heater Water Supply: Single-seated, direct operated with integral bypass.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends. Include
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating for regulators with cast-iron body.
a. Type: Single-seated, direct operated.
b. Type: Pilot-operated, single- or double-seated, cast-iron-body main valve, with
bronze-body pilot valve.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 5

2.5 BALANCING VALVES
A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with two readout ports and memory setting indicator.
Include manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying
case.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Flow Design, Inc.
c. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob, calibrated
nameplate, and threaded or solder-joint ends.
3. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze, Y-pattern body with adjustment knob and threaded
ends.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, Y-pattern body with bronze disc and flanged
or grooved ends.
B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for
400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard or fullport,
chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, threaded or solder-joint ends, and
vinyl-covered steel handle with memory-stop device.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. Crane Co.
c. Grinnell Corporation.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Red-White Valve Corp.
2.6 THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bradley.
2. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.
3. Leonard Valve Company.
4. Powers.
5. Symmons Industries, Inc.
6. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
B. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze body.
Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-water-supply inlets, adjustable temperature
setting, and thermometer. Refer to plumbing schedules for further information.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 6

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, metal-bellows type with pressurized
metal cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A
through F.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Josam Co.
b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.
B. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, piston type with pressurized metal-tube
cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or
PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Josam Co.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.
e. Zurn Industries, Inc.
C. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASME A112.18.1M for
compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solderjoint
inlet, of design suitable for pressure of at least 125 psig (860 kPa); integral nonremovable,
drainable hose-connection vacuum breaker; and garden-hose threads complying with
ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.
1. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
2. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.
3. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
4. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
5. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
6. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
7. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
8. Include wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
D. Air Vents: Float type for automatic air venting.
1. Bolted Construction: Bronze body with replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal float and
stainless-steel mechanism and seat; threaded NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum inlet; 125-psig
(860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F (60 deg C); and threaded vent outlet.
2. Welded Construction: Stainless-steel body with corrosion-resistant metal float, stainlesssteel
mechanism and seat, threaded NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum inlet, 150-psig (1035-
kPa) minimum pressure rating, and threaded vent outlet.
E. Air-Admittance Valves: Plastic housing with mechanical-operation sealing diaphragm, designed
to admit air into drainage and vent piping and to prevent transmission of sewer gas into building.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. B & K Industries, Inc.
b. IPS Corporation.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 7

c. J & B Products.
d. Oatey.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
2. Stack Vent Valve: ASSE 1050, designed for installation as terminal on soil, waste, and
vent stacks, instead of stack vent extending through roof, in NPS 2 to NPS 4 (DN 50 to
DN 100).
3. Fixture Vent Valve: ASSE 1051, designed for installation on waste piping, instead of vent
connection, for single fixture, in NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50).
F. Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead
flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe with galvanized steel boot
reinforcement, and counterflashing fitting.
1. Available Manufacturers:
2. Manufacturers:
a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.
3. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.
4. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
5. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
G. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron,
soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser
fitting, joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
H. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping
and cleanout trap seal primer valve connection.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water seal.
I. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap
seal primer valve connection.
J. Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: Manufactured cast-iron or bronze drainage fitting with semiopen top with
threads or device to secure drainage inlet piping in top and bottom spigot or threaded outlet
larger than top inlet. Include design complying with ASME A112.1.2 that will provide fixed air
gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.
K. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
L. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented
hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.
M. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop- or field-fabricated, frost-proof assembly
constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide 1-inch (25-mm)
enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with
counterflashing.
N. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve,
packing gland, and packing; of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 8

O. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 48 (ASTM A 48M), gray-iron casting, with NPS 4 (DN 100) outlet;
shop-applied bituminous coating; and inlet size to match downspout.
P. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe.
Q. Conductor Nozzles: Bronze body with threaded inlet for connected conductor size, and bronze
wall flange with mounting holes.
1. Finish: Nickel bronze.
2.8 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. ProSet Systems, Inc.
B. Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly consisting of sleeve and stack
fitting with firestopping plug.
1. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
2. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48 (ASTM A 48M), gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye-branch stack
fitting with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness in
branch. Include PVC protective cap for plug.
a. Special Coating: Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for plastic
chemical waste and vent stacks.
2.9 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152 (ASTM B 152M), of the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness).
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness).
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-
inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip
galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm)
minimum thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 9

F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.10 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor Drains,: Comply with ASME A112.3.1.
1. Application: Floor drain.
2. Manufacturer:
a. Josam Co.
b. MiFab.
c. Smith.
d. Wade Div.
e. Zurn Industries.
3. Refer to Plumbing Schedule for Specification Standards.
2.11 ROOF DRAINS
A. Roof Drains,: Comply with ASME A112.3.1.
1. Application: Roof drain.
2. Manufacturer:
a. Josam Co.
b. Smith.
c. Wade Div.
d. Zurn Industries.
3. Refer to Plumbing Schedule for Specification Standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 10

C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass. Install
pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve.
E. Install draining-type ground and ground post hydrants with 1 cu. yd. of crushed gravel around
drain hole.
1. Set ground hydrants with box flush with grade.
2. Set post hydrants in concrete paving or in 1 cu. ft. of concrete block at grade.
F. Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
G. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck
plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove
valve cover for servicing.
H. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors if indicated.
I. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger
drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller and
100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
J. Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below
floors.
K. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished
wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
L. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors
with waterproof membrane.
M. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
N. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set
with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less
than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not
greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 11

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
O. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
P. Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to authorities
having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.
1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension, if required, with cover flush with
finished floor.
3. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle
supports, with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor.
4. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout
on outlet.
5. Coordinate oil-interceptor storage tank and gravity drain with Division 2 Section "Fuel-Oil
Distribution."
Q. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if
supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.
R. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
S. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing specialties.
T. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or
globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations. Refer
to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves.
U. Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, gate, or globe valve in inlet.
V. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
W. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 12

D. Ground equipment.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
F. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16 Sections.
G. Interceptor Connections: Connect piping, flow-control fittings, and accessories.
1. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and flow-control fitting and vent to
unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit.
2. Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit; flow-control
fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil storage
tank.
3. Solids Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm)
thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch
(1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches
(250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 13

3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or
sign on or near each backflow preventer thermostatic water mixing valve water tempering valve
grease interceptor and oil interceptor.
1. Text: Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements,
indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper
operations, in addition to identifying unit.
2. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Mechanical
Identification" for nameplates and signs.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain equipment. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 15430
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 14

SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following electric water heaters:
1. Flow-control, instantaneous electric water heaters.
2. Light-commercial electric water heaters.
3. Water heater accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial and instantaneous electric water heater,
signed by product manufacturer.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric water heaters to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of electric water heaters through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of electric
water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15485 - 1

D. ASME Compliance: Where indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
E. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through
9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
electric water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 LIGHT-COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Description: Comply with UL 174 for household, storage electric water heaters.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Lochinvar Corporation.
b. Ruud Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.
c. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.
d. State Industries, Inc.
2. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel, vertical arrangement.
a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
3. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15485 - 2

. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.
c. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005.
d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.
e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f. Heat Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water outlet.
g. Heating Elements: Two; electric, screw-in immersion type; wired for simultaneous
operation, unless otherwise indicated.
h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat for each element.
i. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
j. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3 for
combination temperature and pressure relief valves. Include relieving capacity at
least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater
working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into
storage tank.
4. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction with legs for off-floor installation.
2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and
include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves
with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
B. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket
for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.
C. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base
of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
D. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.
E. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Hydrostatically test water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one and one-half
times pressure rating.
B. Prepare test reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15485 - 3

2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater
relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
D. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters
without storage. Extend water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic
water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor
drain.
E. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end
drain valves.
F. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters.
G. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping of household, collector-to-tank, solar-electric
water heaters. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
H. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate,
modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include
shutoff valve, thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each
water heater outlet. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
I. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.
J. Fill water heaters with water.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15485 - 4

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results
in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as
specified above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain electric water heaters. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
END OF SECTION 15485
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15485 - 5

SECTION 15734 - VERTICAL FAN COIL UNITS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary
conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes constant volume, vertical fan coil units for indoor installations.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section Vibration Isolators for vibration isolators not an integral part of vertical
fan coil units specified in this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of vertical fan coil unit indicated, include the following:
1. Complete fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated shall be
tested in an AMCA Registered Chamber.
2. Fan sound power rating shall be tested in an AMCA Registered Chamber.
3. Certified coil performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
4. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor and fan accessories.
5. Material gages and finishes.
B. Field Quality Control Test Reports: From manufacturer.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain vertical fan coil units through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of vertical
fan coil units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section
“Product Requirements.”
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. NFPA Compliance: Vertical fan coil units and components shall be designed, fabricated, and
installed in compliance with NFPA 90A. “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.”
E. Agency Certification: Vertical fan coil units and their components shall be factory tested in
accordance with UL 1995 and shall be sent to ETL for testing.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural steel support members.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: (One) set(s) for each vertical fan coil unit.
2. Fan Belts: (One) set(s) for each vertical fan coil unit.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Greenheck
2. Carrier
3. York
VERTICAL FAN COIL UNITS 15734 - 1

4. Trane
5. McQuay
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Vertical fan coil units shall be factory assembled and consist of fans, motor and drive
assembly, coils, filters, stainless steel condensate pans, and accessories.
2.3 CABINET
A. Materials: Formed double wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to
internal parts and components, with joints between sections gasketed.
6. Outside Casing: 18 gauge, galvanized steel (G90)
7. Inside Casing: 18 gauge, galvanized steel (G90)
8. Utility Lugs: For lifting unit and fastening to permanent structure, 8 gauge, galvanized
steel (G90)
B. Cabinet Insulation: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B
1. Materials: Fiber glass insulation
2. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm)
3. Density: 1-1/2 (3) pounds per cubic foot.
4. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75°F (0.037 at 24°C) mean temperature.
5. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smoke developed
index of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
6. Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.
C. Access Panels: Same materials and finishes as cabinet complete with threaded screw
fasteners and gaskets. Inspection and access panels shall be sized and located to allow
periodic maintenance and inspections. Provide access panels in the following locations:
1. Fan Section: Inspection and access panels
2. Coil Section: Inspection panel
3. Filter Section: Inspection and access panels to allow periodic removal and installation of
filters.
D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of stainless steel sheet complying with
requirements in ASHRAE 62. Fabricate pans with slopes in two planes to collect condensate
from cooling coils (including coil piping connections and return bends) when units are
operating at maximum catalogued face velocity across cooling coil.
1. Double Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with 1 inch, 1-1/2 pound fiber glass
insulation.
2. Drain Connections: Main and auxiliary on same side of fan.
E. Nameplate Mylar: Permanently affixed to cabinet. Include model, make, and serial number
identification.
2.4 FAN SECTION
A. Fan Section Construction: Belt driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,
bearings, motor drive assembly, and support structure and equipped with formed steel
channel base for integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. Mount fan with interior
(spring) vibration isolation.
B. Centrifugal Fan Housings: Formed and reinforced steel panels to make curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun metal inlet bell, and access panels or doors to allow entry
to internal parts and components.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle or channel iron member supports for mounting and supporting
fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.
3. Drive Frame: Rail mounted, heavy gauge steel to allow frame to slide for easy belt
tensioning.
C. Fan Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation
at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.
D. Forward Curved Fan Wheels: Galvanized steel and/or aluminum/painted steel construction
with inlet flange, backplate, and shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of
VERTICAL FAN COIL UNITS 15734 - 2

E. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment
made after installation.
1. Turned, ground, and polished hot rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating
of lubricating oil.
2. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan’s
speed range.
F. Pre-lubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow block type ball bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L 10 of 100,000 hours.
G. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation and with 1.5 service factor based on fan motor.
1. Pulleys: Mechanical cast iron with split, tapered bushing dynamically balanced at factory.
2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, static free
4. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning
H. Fan Section Source Quality Control:
1. Factory test fan performance for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed,
and efficiency. Establish ratings according to AMCA 210, “Laboratory Methods of Testing
Fans for Rating.”
I. Inlet/Outlet duct collars: Galvanized collars at each inlet and outlet of the unit. Flexible duct
connection isolating discharge of scroll from discharge of fan.
2.5 MOTORS
A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section Motors, matched with fan load.
B. Noise Rating: Quiet
C. Maximum Ambient Temperature Rating: 120°F (40°C).
2.6 COILS
A. Design and construct to facilitate removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to
ensure full airflow through coils.
B. Water Coils: (Continuous circuit coil fabricated according to ARI 410) (Self-draining coil
fabricated according to ARI 410).
1. Piping Connections: Sweat
2. Tubes: Copper, .016 inch tube thickness
3. Fins: Aluminum, minimum of .005 inch thickness
4. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond
5. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints
6. Frames: Galvanized steel channel frame
7. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ARI 410
a. Working Pressure Ratings: 250 psig (kPa), 300°F (°C)
8. Source Quality Control: Test to 500 psig (kPa) underwater (2000 psig ultimate strength)
C. Refrigerant Coils: Coil designed for use with R-410a refrigerant, fabricated according to ARI
410. Connected with soldered fittings
1. Capacity Reduction: Circuit for single control
2. Tubes: Copper
3. Fins: Aluminum, minimum of .005 inch thickness
4. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond
5. Suction and Distributor: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints
6. Frames: 16 gauge, galvanized steel channel frame
7. Ratings: Design tested and rated in accordance to UL (UL recognized)
a. Working Pressure Rating: 250 psig
8. Source Quality Control: 500 psig underwater (2000 psig ultimate strength)
E. Electrical Heating Coils, Controls, and Accessories: Comply with UL1995.
VERTICAL FAN COIL UNITS 15734 - 3

1. Casing Assembly: Galvanized steel frame
2. Heating Elements: Open coil resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 2- percent
chromium supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing
openings, fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized steel frame.
3. Over-Temperature Protection: Disk type, automatically resetting thermal cutout, safety
device, serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from duct or unit.
a. Secondary Protection: Load carrying, manually resetting or manually
replaceable, thermal cutouts, factory wired in series with each heater stage.
2.7 FILTER SECTION
A. Filters: Comply with NFPA 90A
B. Filter Section: Provide filter holding frames arranged for vertical orientations, with access
panels on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from both sides.
C. Extended Surface, Disposable Panel Filters: Factory fabricated, dry, extended surface filters
with holding frames.
1. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V shape.
2. Media and Media Grid Frame: Non-Flammable cardboard.
PART 3 – EXECUATION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of steam, hydronic, direct expansion and condensate drainage piping
systems and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install vertical fan coil units with the following vibration control devices. Vibration control
devices are specified in Division 15 Section “Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls.”
1. Units with Internally Isolated Fans: Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete
bases. Mounting units on a neoprene pad will help prevent possible vibration.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around vertical fan coil units for service
and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to vertical fan coil units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible
connectors.
D. Connect condensate drain pans, to drainage piping. Extend to nearest equipment or floor
drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in
direction.
E. Hot and Chilled Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section
“Hydronic Piping.” Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or balancing valve
and union or flange at each connection.
F. Steam and Condensate Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section
“Steam and Condensate Piping.” Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff
valve and union or flange at each connection.
G. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section “Refrigerant
Piping.” Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at
each connection.
H. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.
I. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.
J. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section “Grounding and Bonding.”
VERTICAL FAN COIL UNITS 15734 - 4

K. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque
tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL
486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect
field assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water and test coils and
connections for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new
units, and retest.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Final checks before startup. Perform the following:
1. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices; and that connections to
piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
2. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this section.
3. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify free fan
wheel rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts
and install belt guards.
4. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory recommended
lubricants.
5. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
6. Install clean filters.
7. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected duct systems are in fully open position.
C. Starting procedures for vertical fan coil units include the following:
1. Energize motor, verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan
to indicated rpm.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
Refer to Division 15 Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing” for low profile vertical fan coil
system testing, adjusting and balancing.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean vertical fan coil units internally, on completion of installation, according to
manufacturer’s written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and
construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.
B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing vertical fan coil and
air distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train owner’s maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain vertical fan coil units. Refer to Division 1 Section Closeout
Procedures and Demonstration and Training.
END OF SECTION 15700
VERTICAL FAN COIL UNITS 15734 - 5

SECTION 15735 - CONDITIONING UNITS (5-tons and below)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate evaporator-fan
and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed
mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static
pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system
units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion on compressors.
CONDITIONING UNITS (5-TONS AND BELOW) 15735 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Carrier Air Conditioning.
2. Lennox Industries.
3. McQuay Air Conditioning.
4. Trane Company.
5. York International.
2.2 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS (FIVE TONS AND BELOW)
A. Casing: Galvanized steel, finished with baked enamel in manufacturer-standard color, with
removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in
base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor,
relay, and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Scroll.
2. Rubber vibration isolator mounting.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240. Provide flexible epoxy polymer coating uniformly to coil. Pre-coated fin stock is
not acceptable.
D. Fan: Propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, totally enclosed with integral thermal-overload protection.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- thick, reinforced
concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with
concrete base.
CONDITIONING UNITS (5-TONS AND BELOW) 15735 - 2

D. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.
E. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in
Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmiumplated
fasteners.
F. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static
deflection of 1 inch. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic
Restraints."
G. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install
tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION
CONDITIONING UNITS (5-TONS AND BELOW) 15735 - 3

SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal Ductwork.
2. Nonmetal ductwork.
3. Casing and plenums.
4. Kitchen hood ductwork.
5. Dishwasher exhaust ductwork.
6. Hangers and supports.
B. References:
1. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 1997a.
2. ASTM A 366/A 366M - Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon,
(0.15 Maximum Percent) Cold Rolled; 1997.
3. ASTM A 569/A 569M - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum
Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial; 1998.
4. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 1998.
5. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 1996.
6. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 1996.
7. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations; National Fire Protection Association; 1994.
8. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal
and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; latest Edition.
9. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; 1996.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction,
reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible", latest edition and NFPA 90A.
B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 1

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1. Liners and adhesives.
2. Sealants and gaskets.
3. Duct Construction Standards (DCS) for each pressure class required for this project.
DCS shall include transverse and longitudinal joint type, any internal or external
reinforcement and sheetmetal thickness and size for each pressure class.
4. Flexible duct manufacturer, type and product details.
5. Flexible connection materials and connection types.
6. Fitting fabrication details.
7. Damper details.
8. Description of hanger types and sizes for duct sizes used in this project. Hangers must
comply with the latest edition of SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible". Hanger submittal should include hanger spacing to be used.
B. Coordination Drawings: Provide drawings indicating fabrication, assembly, and installation,
including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. Minimum
scale of ¼” = 1’0”. Coordinate duct location with other trades.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes
in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this
section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Construct with
a radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible, provide a
centerline radius of 1.0 times the width of duct. Where space constraints will not allow a
centerline radius of 1.0 times the width of duct, provide rectangular elbows with double wall
(airfoil) factory fabricated turning vanes installed on vane runner rails. Turning vanes shall not
be used in bends other than 90 degrees.
1. Branch connections shall be 45 degree entry fittings.
C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
2.2 DOUBLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. McGill AirFlow LLC.
2. SPOT
3. SEMCO
B. Rectangular Ducts: Fabricate ducts with indicated dimensions for the inner duct.
C. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. If duct is exposed to the
weather, provide a continuous sheetmetal hat channel over all transverse joints and position
openings in longitudinal seams facing in the direction of possible water flow. Provide a flexible,
adhesive aluminum jacket designed for this application over entire duct surface per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
D. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or
NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K) at 75
deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.
2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without
compressing insulation.
3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating.
4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.
5. Insulation thickness to be 2 inches.
E. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch (0.7-mm) solid sheet steel.
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 3

2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on
indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Lindab Inc.
b. McGill AirFlow LLC.
c. SEMCO Incorporated.
d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
e. SPOT
B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the
round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).
C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 36 Inches (1524 mm) in Diameter: Flanged.
D. Longitudinal Seams: Round and flat oval duct must be spiral seam ductwork. Longitudinal
seam snap-lock duct will not be allowed.
E. Tees, Laterals and Bends: Fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5,
"Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,
duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible."
1. Elbows and bends: Construct with a radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centerline. Where not possible, provide a centerline radius of 1.0 times the width of duct.
Elbows shall be of gored, pleated or stamped construction. 90 degree bends shall be a
minimum of 5-gore. 45 degree bends shall be a minimum of 3 gore. Adjustable elbows
will not be allowed.
2. Branch connections shall be conical, 45 deg. entry or lateral fittings.
2.4 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Lindab Inc.
2. McGill AirFlow LLC.
3. SEMCO Incorporated.
4. SPOT
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 4

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the
round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension) of the inner duct.
C. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round
Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
a. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 36 Inches (1524 mm) in Diameter:
Flanged.
2. Longitudinal Seams: Round and flat oval duct must be spiral seam ductwork.
Longitudinal seam snap-lock duct will not be allowed.
3. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals,"
and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
a. Elbows and bends: Construct with a radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of
duct on centerline. Where not possible, provide a centerline radius of 1.0 times the
width of duct. Elbows shall be of gored, pleated or stamped construction. 90
degree bends shall be a minimum of 5-gore. 45 degree bends shall be a minimum
of 3 gore. Adjustable elbows will not be allowed.
b. Branch connections shall be conical, 45 deg. entry or lateral fittings.
D. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch (0.7-mm) solid sheet steel.
E. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or
NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: [0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K)] at 75
deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.
2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without
compressing insulation.
3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating.
4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.
2.5 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction
methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275).
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 5

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed
ducts.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the
"Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B,
No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.
E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill
finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to
view.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter.
2.6 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with
NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.
b. Johns Manville.
c. Knauf Insulation.
d. Owens Corning.
2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:
a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24
deg C) mean temperature.
b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.033 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24
deg C) mean temperature.
3. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form
the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant
coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered
by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.
4. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with
ASTM C 916.
a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Insulation Pins and Washers:
1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully
annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length
to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbonsteel
washer.
2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-)
thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 6

C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers
of duct liner is prohibited.
2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal
nosing.
3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure buttededge
overlapping.
5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.
6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm
(12.7 m/s).
7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals
not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse
joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.
8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that
have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
a. Fan discharges.
b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than
2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.
9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as
specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform
distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.
a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter, with an overall
open area of 23 percent.
10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning
vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other
buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts,
screws, rivets, or welds.
2.7 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative.
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 7

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
C. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods
with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and
bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.
2.9 Insulated Flexible Ducts
2.10 Kitchen Exhaust Ducts
2.11 Dishwasher Exhaust Ducts
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts
and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings
and Coordination Drawings.
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 8

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed
to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches (38 mm).
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.
Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke
dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,
and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 9

3.3 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal all duct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2. All duct: Seal Class A.
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4,
"Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and
supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each
branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16
feet (5 m).
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,
tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch,
outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 10

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Leakage Tests:
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for
each test.
2. Test the following systems:
a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg (750 Pa): Test representative
duct sections, selected by Engineer from sections installed, totaling no less than
25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.
3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage
testing and for compliance with test requirements.
4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.
5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section
being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum
system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating
pressure.
6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:
1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.
D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:
1. Underground Ducts: Concrete-encased, PVC-coated, galvanized sheet steel.
B. Supply Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive [1-inch wg (250 Pa)]
b. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12
2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg (500 Pa), or round up the ESP listed in the
equipment schedules and provide, whichever is greater.
b. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12
3. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units prior to terminal units:
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 11

a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg (750 Pa)
b. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12
C. Return, toilet exhaust and outside air ducts:
1. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg (250 Pa).
2. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12
3. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12
D. Special Exhaust Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Commercial Kitchen Hoods: Comply with NFPA 96.
a. Exposed to View: Type 304, stainless-steel sheet.
b. Concealed: Type 304, stainless-steel sheet.
c. Welded seams and joints.
d. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 4-inch wg (1000 Pa).
e. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: Welded seams, joints, and penetrations.
f. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3.
g. Minimum 18 gauge or thickness required per local code, whichever is greater
2. Ducts Connected to Dishwasher Hoods:
a. Type 304, stainless-steel sheet.
b. Welded seams and flanged joints with watertight EPDM gaskets.
c. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
d. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: Welded seams, joints, and penetrations.
e. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3.
f. Minimum 18 gauge or thickness required per local code, whichever is greater
E. Duct Exposed to View
1. Supply Air Ducts: shall be double wall spiral round construction with 1” thick insulation in
conditioned spaces and 2” insulation in unconditioned spaces.
2. Return and Exhaust Air Ducts: shall be un-insulated single wall spiral round construction
in conditioned spaces and double wall round construction with 1” insulation in
unconditioned spaces.
END OF SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 12

SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Motorized control dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Smoke dampers.
6. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
7. Turning vanes.
8. Duct-mounting access doors.
9. Flexible connectors.
10. Flexible ducts.
11. Duct accessory hardware.
12. Louvers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Motorized control dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Smoke dampers.
6. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
7. Turning vanes.
8. Duct-mounting access doors.
9. Flexible connectors.
10. Flexible ducts.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Special fittings.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 1

2. Manual-volume damper installations.
3. Motorized-control damper installations.
4. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper installations,
including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations
and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and access doors required
for access to duct accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having
G90 (Z275) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.
D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for
concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 2

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm)
or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. CESCO Products.
2. Greenheck.
3. Ruskin Company.
B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with blades of maximum 6-inch
(150-mm) width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel
ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static
pressure.
C. Frame: 20 gauge, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
D. Blades: 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum.
E. Blade Seals: Vinyl.
F. Blade Axles: Stainless Steel.
G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
H. Basis of Design: Ruskin S3G.
2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. METALAIRE, Inc.
3. Nailor Industries Inc.
4. Ruskin Company.
B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classes of 2-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts
with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as
indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or
vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 22 gauge thick,
with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to
walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Single Skin Steel Blades: 22 gauge, galvanized sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Bearings: Molded synthetic.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 3

5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
6. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
7. Basis of Design: Ruskin MD 15 (rectangular) and MDRS25 (round).
D. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing
assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
E. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-
) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to
suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.5 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. CESCO Products.
2. Greenheck.
3. METALAIRE, Inc.
4. Nailor Industries Inc.
5. Ruskin Company.
B. General Description: AMCA-rated, parallel (return air applications) or opposed (outside air
applications) blade design; minimum of 16 gauge thick, galvanized-steel frames with holes for
duct mounting; minimum of 16 gauge thick, galvanized-steel damper blades with maximum
blade width of 8 inches (203 mm).
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated
hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and
brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at
each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93
deg C).
3. Provide closed-cell neoprene edging rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of
damper area, at differential pressure of 1-inch wg; when tested according to AMCA 500D.
C. Basis of Design: Ruskin CD35.
2.6 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible"
for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, double-vane, curved
blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to
blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces
and fibrous-glass fill.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 4

2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.
B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class 1.
C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to
two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or
0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.
D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the
filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (810 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp and 440 lbf/inch (77 N/mm) in the
filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 45 to plus 121 deg C).
2.8 INSULATED ACOUSTICAL MEDIUM PRESSURE FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Where flexible duct is shown on drawings, provide Flexmaster Type 8M UL 181 Class I Air Duct
or equal.
B. The duct shall be constructed of a CPE fabric supported by helical wound galvanized steel. The
fabric shall be mechanically locked to the steel helix without the use of adhesives or chemicals.
C. The internal working pressure rating shall be at least 6” w.g. positive and 4” w.g. negative with a
bursting pressure of at least 2 ½ time the working pressure
D. The duct shall be rated for a velocity of at lease 4000 feet per minute.
E. The duct must be suitable for continuous operation at a temperature range of -20 F to +250 F.
F. Acoustical performance, when tested by an independent laboratory in accordance with the Air
Diffusion Council’s Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1, Section 3.0, Sound Properties, shall
be as follows:
1. The insertion loss (dB) of a 10 foot length of straight duct when tested in accordance with
ASTM E477, at a velocity of 2500 feet per minute, shall be at least:
Octave
Band
2 3 4 5 6 7
Hz. 12
5
25
0
50
0
100
0
200
0
400
0
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 5

6” diameter
8” diameter
12” diameter
7 31 40 38 40 27
13 29 36 35 38 22
21 28 29 33 26 12
2. The radiated noise reduction (dB) of a 10 foot length of straight duct when tested in
accordance with ASTM E477, at a velocity of 2500 feet per minute, shall be at least:
Octave
Band
2 3 4 5 6 7
Hz. 12
5
25
0
50
0
100
0
200
0
400
0
6” diameter
8” diameter
12” diameter
5 8 7 8 11 15
10 7 7 8 10 13
9 6 6 5 9 13
3. The self generated sound power levels (LW) dB re 10 -12 Watt of a 10 foot length of
straight duct for an empty sheet metal duct when tested in accordance with ASTM E477,
at a velocity of 1000 feet per minute, shall not exceed:
Octave
Band
2 3 4 5 6 7
Hz. 12
5
250 50
0
100
0
200
0
400
0
6” diameter
8” diameter
12” diameter
42 31 23 18 17 21
41 34 27 19 18 21
54 45 38 31 27 23
G. Factory insulate the flexible duct with fiberglass insulation. Provide insulation as required by
ASHRAE 90.1.
H. Cover the insulation with a fire retardant metalized vapor barrier jacket reinforced with
crosshatched scrim having a permeance of not greater than 0.05 perms when tested in
accordance with ASTM #96, Procedure A.
2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct insulation thickness.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 6

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum
accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
D. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths
from branch takeoff.
E. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
F. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved
written instructions.
G. Install duct silencers independent of ducts with flexible duct connectors, lagged with loaded
vinyl sheet on inlets and outlets where indicated.
H. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and
terminal units as follows:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Downstream from volume dampers and equipment.
3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links.
4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum
50-foot (15-m) spacing.
5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
I. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).
6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
J. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter.
2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 7

3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches (460 mm) in diameter.
5. Body Access: 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter.
K. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
L. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
M. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and higher, cover flexible
connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of
flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
O. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with maximum 60-inch (1500-mm)
lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
Q. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing."
END OF SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 8

SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Utility set fans.
2. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
3. Ceiling-mounting ventilators.
4. In-line centrifugal fans.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on sea-level conditions.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturerinstalled
and field-installed wiring.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
rails, and base weights.
POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 1

C. Coordination Drawings: Show roof penetration requirements and reflected ceiling plans drawn
to scale and coordinating roof penetrations and units mounted above ceiling. Show the
following:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
D. Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Utility Set Fans:
a. Cook, Loren Company.
b. Greenheek.
c. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
2. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators:
a. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
b. Cook, Loren Company.
c. Greenheck Fan Corp.
d. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
3. Ceiling-Mounting Ventilators:
a. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc.
b. Carnes Company HVAC.
c. Cook, Loren Company.
d. Greenheck Fan Corp.
e. NuTone Inc.
f. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
4. In-Line Centrifugal Fans:
a. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
b. Cook, Loren Company.
c. Greenheck Fan Corp.
d. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
2.2 UTILITY SET FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor
and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.
B. Housing: Fabricated of galvanized with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or welded
to scroll sheets.
1. Housing Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to eight standard positions.
C. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single inlet; backward inclined aluminum wheel, with hub keyed to
shaft.
1. Blade Materials: Aluminum.
2. Blade Type: Backward inclined.
3. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
D. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 3

E. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings with
ABMA 9, L 50 of 200,000 hours.
F. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.
2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with
motors larger than 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment
range at fan design conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
4. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
G. Accessories:
1. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum
blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
2. Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch-type handles.
3. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with adjustable linkage.
4. Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh.
5. Drain Connections: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded coupling drain connection installed at
lowest point of housing.
6. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive
compartment.
H. Coatings: Powder-baked enamel.
I. Basis of Design: Loren Cook Model “CPA”.
2.3 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward,
with rain drain.
C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
E. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less
than 50 percent for direct drive models.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 4

3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;
factory set to close when fan stops.
F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) thick, rigid,
fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
1. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
2. Overall Height: 13 1/2 inches.
3. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.
2.4 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS
A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line
applications.
B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan
wheel shall be removable for service.
D. Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for
motor plug-in.
F. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less
than 50 percent.
2. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light.
3. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire-rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless-steel
springs, and fusible link.
4. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
G. Basis of Design: Cook “Gemini”
2.5 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Description: In-line, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide
vanes, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, mounting brackets,
and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and
support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Driven Units: Motor encased in housing outside of airstream, factory wired to disconnect
switch located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure
around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of
fan housing.
POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 5

E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories:
1. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch (13- by 25-mm) mesh of galvanized steel in removable
frame. Provide guard for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.
4. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel.
G. Basis of Design: Cook Model “SQN”
2.6 MOTORS
A. Enclosure Type: Guarded dripproof.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Support units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration- and seismiccontrol
devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls."
1. Secure vibration controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base.
C. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 7
Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
E. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure.
F. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers.
Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls."
G. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 6

H. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment.
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Equipment Startup Checks:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
B. Starting Procedures:
1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and
retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 7

H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.
B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain power ventilators.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 8

SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ceiling and wall mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents,
whether or not they are connected to ducts.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control
dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color
finishes.
C. Samples for Verification: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes
to verify color selected.
D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
5. Duct access panels.
E. Source quality-control reports.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Manufacturers:
A.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. METALAIRE, Inc.
b. Price Industries.
c. Titus.
2. Refer to drawings for air device accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final
locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 2

SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Contractual Relationship
1. The scope of the TAB work as defined in this Section is indicated in order that the
Contractor will be advised of the coordination, adjustment, and system modification which
will be required under the project work in order to complete the requirements for final TAB.
The TAB firm will not have a contractual relationship with the Mechanical Contractor, but will
be responsible to the General Contractor for the satisfactory execution of the TAB work.
The General Contractor in his original bid shall include the costs required to cover all
work which may be required in the TAB phases as defined herein and as may be
necessary for the completion of the TAB work as defined by the TAB firm.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation
that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 1

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
D. Certified TAB reports.
E. Sample report forms.
F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1. Instrument type and make.
2. Serial number.
3. Application.
4. Dates of use.
5. Dates of calibration.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.
B. TAB Conference: Meet with Architect & Owner’s representative on approval of the TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the
participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice
of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items:
a. The Contract Documents examination report.
b. The TAB plan.
c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Engineer.
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,
Section 5, "Instrumentation."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 2

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to
verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 15 Section
"Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in
plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all
or part of a system.
2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
K. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 3

L. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's "Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.
1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with
requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 15 Section "HVAC Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 4

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaustair
dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the
total airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heatrecovery
equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus
actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments
to accommodate actual conditions.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 5

6. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated
speed. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Sections for air-handling units for
adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit
performance.
7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fanmotor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling,
full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum
required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and
the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation.
Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number,
and nameplate data.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 6

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C. Record compressor data.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:
1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.9 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.10 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: Prepare progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in
progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in
systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each
building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.11 FINAL REPORT
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 7

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 8

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
j. Number, make, and size of belts.
k. Number, type, and size of filters.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total air flow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
i. Outdoor airflow in cfm (L/s).
j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).
k. Outdoor-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.
F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 9

c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
h. Tube size in NPS (DN).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).
d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C).
o. Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa).
G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
g. Number, make, and size of belts.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 10

. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling-unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Duct size in inches (mm).
f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm (L/s).
h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s).
i. Actual air flow rate in cfm (L/s).
j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).
k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa).
b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm).
d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s).
e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
I. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.12 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and
balance readings documented in the final report.
2. Check the following for each system:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 11

B. Final Inspection:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
c. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
d. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report.
2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the
presence of Construction Manager.
3. Construction Manager shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final
report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total
measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a
normal 8-hour business day.
4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,
proceed as follows:
1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing
device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final
inspection.
2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB
contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the
cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are
being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 12

SECTION 13852 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire-alarm control unit.
2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.
3. System smoke detectors.
4. Nonsystem smoke detectors.
5. Heat detectors.
6. Notification appliances.
7. Magnetic door holders.
8. Addressable interface device.
9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LED: Light-emitting diode.
B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors
and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General Submittal Requirements:
1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to
Architect.
2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.
b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.
c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 1

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.
3. Include battery-size calculations.
4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that
each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity
possible when air-handling system is operating.
5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,
drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them.
Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector
housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
6. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding
schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.
7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and
installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of
detection, complying with NFPA 72.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction and
include the following:
1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter
in NFPA 72.
2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent
Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.
3. Record copy of site-specific software.
4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of
the same name and include the following:
a. Frequency of testing of installed components.
b. Frequency of inspection of installed components.
c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.
5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.
7. Copy of NFPA 25.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 2

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm
Level III technician.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company.
2. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.
3. Silent Knight; a Honeywell company.
4. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company.
2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1. Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Smoke detectors.
4. Duct smoke detectors.
5. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
7. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit.
8. Fire-extinguishing system operation.
9. Fire standpipe system.
B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit.
3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
6. Activate voice/alarm communication system.
7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.
8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system
panel.
9. Activate stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.
10. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
11. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.
12. Activate emergency lighting control.
13. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
14. Record events in the system memory.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 3

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch.
2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.
3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.
4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.
6. Break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.
9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate
at fire-alarm control unit. Record the event on system printer.
2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:
1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with
electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.
a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable
programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through
failure of primary and secondary power supplies.
b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and
printer.
2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.
a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for
adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.
b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity
range of the device.
3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the
programming and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 2 line(s) of 40 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of
smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 4

C. Circuits:
1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.
a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style D.
b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z.
c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 2.
d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.
2. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.
a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style A.
b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style W.
c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 1.
d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.
D. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in
smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.
E. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable
smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change
those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated
changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and
sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted
values on system printer.
F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,
and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
G. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant
microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided in a separate cabinet
located in the fire command center.
1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different
announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use
of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by
an NRTL.
a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, at
same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination.
b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.
c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."
d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by
NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance
circuits of fire-alarm control unit.
2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the
status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.
3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units,
on primary equipment failure.
H. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals shall be
powered by 24-V dc source.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 5

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the powersupply
module rating.
I. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.
J. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass
cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate
response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under
normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be
finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show
visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as
surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the
top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Detectors shall be four-wire type.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a
twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
connection to building wiring.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 6

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with
the supplied detector.
4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific
duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
2.6 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57
deg C) or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
3. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 155 deg F (68 deg C). NRTL listed for
"regular" service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires
twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with
PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts
with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short- circuit wires at the location of elevated
temperature.
2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a
signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections.
B. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.
C. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level
of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464
test protocol.
D. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal
white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in
minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output:
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 7

a. 75 cd.
b. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.
2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined
with guards in place.
4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.
E. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:
1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.
3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.
2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with
matching doorplate.
1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf (111-N) holding force.
2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.
4. Rating: 120-V ac.
B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address
for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator
recall.
2.10 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and
shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from firealarm
control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for
a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be
transmitted. If service on line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate
a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote
alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone
service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter
shall initiate the local trouble signal.
C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the
following:
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 8

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.
2. Programming device.
3. LED display.
4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.
5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.
D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:
1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.
2. Address of the supervisory signal.
3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.
4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power.
5. Low battery.
6. Abnormal test signal.
7. Communication bus failure.
E. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
2.11 DEVICE GUARDS
A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector,
gong, or other device requiring protection.
1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device.
2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.
B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm)
above the finished floor.
C. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:
1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"
Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.
2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"
Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.
3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m).
4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high
ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix Ain NFPA 72.
5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air-supply diffuser or return-air
opening.
6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from any part of
a lighting fixture.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
extend the full width of duct.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 9

E. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler
rating and location.
F. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a
dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the
alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.
G. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler
water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing
position.
H. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.
Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism
concealed behind a grille.
I. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6
inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.
J. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
K. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830
mm) above the finished floor.
L. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished
floor.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in
smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." Connect
hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.
1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this
Section before making connections.
B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and
systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet (1 m) from the device controlled. Make an
addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system
being controlled.
1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter
smoke-control system panel.
2. Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.
3. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.
5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.
6. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
8. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.
9. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 10

3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground
wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system
documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents,
Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire
Alarm Systems" Chapter.
b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of
the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the
"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2
requirements in ANSI S1.4.
4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of
Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm
Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records"
Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or
replaced devices and appliances.
E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 11

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
G. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,
quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
H. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm
system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms
developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
END OF SECTION 13852
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852 - 12

SECTION 16051 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.
3. Sleeve seals.
4. Grout.
5. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce
headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,
masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished
surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section
"Access Doors and Frames."
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 16051 - 1

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and
no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches
(1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm),
thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
2.2 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.
Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
2.3 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 16051 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange
and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with
these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components
of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to
facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways
penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and
raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed
surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable
penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 16051 - 3

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow
for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable
material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop
Systems."
END OF SECTION 16051
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 16051 - 4

SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
1. Overhead-lines grounding.
2. Underground distribution grounding.
3. Common ground bonding with lightning protection system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding
features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1. Ground rods.
2. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals:
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-
5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles:
1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.
2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated fir
or cypress or cedar.
D. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm) in cross
section, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,
with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two
bands of yellow.
D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch (25 mm), minimum, from wall 6 inches (150 mm)
above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top
of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus.
E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 GROUNDING OVERHEAD LINES
A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B. Install 2 parallel ground rods if resistance to ground by a single, ground-rod electrode exceeds
25 ohms.
C. Drive ground rods until tops are 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade in undisturbed earth.
D. Ground-Rod Connections: Install bolted connectors for underground connections and
connections to rods.
E. Lightning Arrester Grounding Conductors: Separate from other grounding conductors.
F. Secondary Neutral and Transformer Enclosure: Interconnect and connect to grounding
conductor.
G. Protect grounding conductors running on surface of wood poles with molding extended from
grade level up to and through communication service and transformer spaces.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 3

3.3 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole
floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If
necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinnedcopper
conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall.
Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressuresensitive
insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6
inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.
C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts,
cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to
ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded,
hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and
fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by
manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.
D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the
pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with
substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinnedcopper
conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding
terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from the foundation.
3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits.
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding
bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar
terminal on busway.
9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment
grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and
power-distribution units.
10. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits
supplying x-ray equipment.
C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,
humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct
and connected metallic piping.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 4

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway
fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a
separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96
when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground
directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service
grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode
conductor, and install in conduit.
C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if
any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length
from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,
and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are
specified in Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures," and shall be at least
12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.
1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated.
Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush
with finished grade or floor.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 5

E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes,
using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using
one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed,
connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor
conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to
bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner
column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.
I. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, using
a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.
1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within base of
foundation.
2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor
bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or
to grounding electrode external to concrete.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
B. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test
wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors
are connected.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 6

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,
and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and
their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena
that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
C. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).
5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
7. ohms.
D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify
Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 7

SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for raceways.
2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground-line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting
provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system
components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
1.5 COORDINATION
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 1

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by
codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high
letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.
D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted,
flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching
wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned,
flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway
or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,
pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized
to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
G. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide
black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that extends full
length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends.
H. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped
legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
I. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet
and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 2

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high
letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.
D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm)
wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2
inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to
stay in place by gripping action.
2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm)
thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2.5 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 3

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and
locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when
exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up
to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
B. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1
inch (25 mm).
2.9 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6
nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7
MPa).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 4

4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,
self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7
MPa).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
4. Color: Black.
C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2
MPa).
3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C).
5. Color: Black.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for paint materials and
application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location
(exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band
shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,
at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals
in congested areas.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 5

G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or
cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below
finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common
trenchexceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for surface
preparation and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-
inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that
extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend
"DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black letters on
20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm) of
a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in
the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install
labels at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull
box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and
system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1. Power.
D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the
phase.
1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed
below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if
authorities having jurisdiction permit.
b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 6

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where
splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent
possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesivebacked
phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.
F. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.
G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.
H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
I. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
J. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in
finished spaces.
K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Bakedenamel
warning signs.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 7

L. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with
approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
M. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high
letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use
labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive,
engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Switchgear.
e. Switchboards.
f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
g. Enclosed switches.
h. Enclosed circuit breakers.
i. Enclosed controllers.
j. Push-button stations.
k. Contactors.
END OF SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 8

SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for cabling used for voice
and data circuits.
2. Division 16 Section "Undercarpet Cables" for flat cables for undercarpet installations.
3. Division 16 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor
cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to
35,000 V.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 1

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they
are constructed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.
2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
3. General Cable Corporation.
4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
5. Southwire Company.
B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN SO.
D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground
wire.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 2

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch
(1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
2.4 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2. Calpico, Inc.
3. Metraflex Co.
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and cable.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.
Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING
METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 3

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-
THWN, single conductors in raceway.
E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
I. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway.
J. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
K. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainlesssteel,
wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
L. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
M. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 4

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.
3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than
16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or
more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch
(3.5 mm).
E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with
approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing
units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and
sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves
to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 5

3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material
and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in
annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical
equipment and services for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 6

SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for exterior ductbanks,
manholes, and underground utility construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.
C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:
a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
b. Frame and cover design.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 1

c. Grounding details.
d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.
e. Joint details.
C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
E. Source quality-control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Alflex Inc.
3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
5. Electri-Flex Co.
6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
7. Maverick Tube Corporation.
8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
9. Wheatland Tube Company.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
D. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
E. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 2

F. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.
2. Fittings for EMT: , set-screw type.
3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch (1 mm),
with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
I. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies,
and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and
enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3. Arnco Corporation.
4. CANTEX Inc.
5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
6. Condux International, Inc.
7. ElecSYS, Inc.
8. Electri-Flex Co.
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.
C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
D. LFNC: UL 1660.
E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
F. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
2.3 OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Arnco Corporation.
2. Endot Industries Inc.
3. IPEX Inc.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 3

4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for plenum installation.
2.4 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman.
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown
straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Hoffman.
2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
B. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on
cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown
straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
2.6 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard
enamel finish in color selected by Architect.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 4

B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with
texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Manufacturing Company; Walker Division.
b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division.
c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.
d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
e. Panduit Corp.
f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
2.7 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. EGS/Appleton Electric.
3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
4. Hoffman.
5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.
6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
E. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, semi-adjustable, rectangular.
F. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.
G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 5

J. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.8 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.
1. Color of Frame and Cover: Green.
2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have integral closed bottom,
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural
load rating consistent with enclosure.
4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, as indicated for each service.
6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts
for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger
shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.
8. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Armorcast Products Company.
b. Carson Industries LLC.
c. CDR Systems Corporation.
d. NewBasis.
B. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded,
fiberglass-reinforced, polyester-resin enclosure joined to polymer-concrete top ring or frame.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Armorcast Products Company.
b. Carson Industries LLC.
c. Christy Concrete Products.
d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast.
C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers
of polymer concrete.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Carson Industries LLC.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 6

. Christy Concrete Products.
c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc.
2.9 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch
(1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance
with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.
1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency.
2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing
agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests
by manufacturer.
3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying
with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes
raceways in the following locations:
a. Loading dock.
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 7

c. Mechanical rooms.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental
Air: EMT.
8. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT.
9. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or
Communications Cable: EMT.
10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic
in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that
material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing
conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
F. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater
pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic
Restraints."
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 8

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising
above the floor.
I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each
end of pull wire.
L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and
nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
1. 3/4-Inch (19-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50
feet (15 m).
2. 1-Inch (25-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet
(23 m).
3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway
unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes
or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these
requirements.
M. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located
where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C), and that has
straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m).
1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and
quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)
temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature
change.
c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125
deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.
e. Insert location and corresponding temperature change.
2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C)
of temperature change.
3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the
time of installation.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 9

N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for
recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall.
P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
Q. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches (150
mm) in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches
(300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout the length of the elbow.
5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through the floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and
encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel
conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment
pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at
equipment.
6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above directburied
conduits, placing them 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Align planks along the width and
along the centerline of conduit.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from
1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent
undisturbed earth.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 10

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of
other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, below grade.
E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and
insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.
Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough
to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.
F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut
wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to
be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side
greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270
mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall
be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and
raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with
approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply
with Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 11

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type
flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size
sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material
and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install
in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements
are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 12

SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2. Twist-locking receptacles.
3. Isolated-ground receptacles.
4. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
5. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
6. Communications outlets.
7. Pendant cord-connector devices.
8. Cord and plug sets.
9. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet
assemblies.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for workstation outlets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates.
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1

C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one
source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and
associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration
5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2

a. Hubbell; CR 5253IG.
b. Leviton; 5362-IG.
c. Pass & Seymour; IG6300.
2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the
green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from
mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent
on removable parts.
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when
device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; GF20.
b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.
C. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; IG5362BLS.
b. Hubbell; IG5362SA.
c. Leviton; 5380-IG.
2. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R. Equipment
grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the
device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be
integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.
2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; L520R.
b. Hubbell; HBL2310.
c. Leviton; 2310.
d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.
B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; IG2310.
b. Leviton; 2310-IG.
2. Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3

2.5 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES
A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6
configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.
1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external
cable grip.
2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire
strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for
corresponding connector.
2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with
green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of
30 percent.
2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
2.7 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).
b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224
(four way).
c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four
way).
d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),
20AC4 (four way).
C. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.
c. Leviton; 1221-2L.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.
2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
D. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use
with mechanically held lighting contactors.
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 4

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 1995.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557.
c. Leviton; 1257.
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.
E. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches,
120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in
lieu of switch handle.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 1995L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557L.
c. Leviton; 1257L.
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.
2.8 WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with
audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with
UL 1472.
C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off
switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.
1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Illuminated
when "OFF."
D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent
dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
2.9 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS
A. Telephone Outlet:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 3560-6.
b. Leviton; 40649.
2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP;
TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.
B. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 3562.
b. Leviton; 40595.
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 5

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1;
complying with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector.
2.10 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic].
4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in "wet locations."
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weatherresistant
thermoplastic with lockable cover.
2.11 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. TVSS Devices: Blue.
3. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided
by riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 6

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show
signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)
in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the
manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Dimmers:
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 7

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.
2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout
or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the
circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or
similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace
with new ones, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 8

SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Enclosures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical
data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
5. Retain subparagraph below if final system short-circuit and coordination studies will be
performed by the designer or will be assigned to an independent consultant. These
curves are also beneficial to Owner for future additions or reevaluations of settings of
overcurrent protective devices. Although some manufacturers no longer offer curves on
translucent graph paper, curves can normally be downloaded from manufacturers' Web
sites or be obtained, in electronic form, from various coordination software vendors as
part of a subscription service. Retain option in subparagraph below only if manufacturers
selected offer
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 1

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
E. Manufacturer's field service report.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
testing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective
devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from
single manufacturer.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed
switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces
and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not
exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment
served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required
clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with
capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 3

2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to
comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
3. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X,.
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D. Install fuses in fusible devices.
E. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 4

C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
E. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and
circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to
portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial
Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to
measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches
and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 5

SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
3. Load centers.
4. Electronic-grade panelboards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D. Field Quality-Control Reports:
PANELBOARDS 16442 - 1

1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load
balancing.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
testing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
PANELBOARDS 16442 - 2

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) to plus
104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt
inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:
Two spares for each panelboard.
3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each
size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
PANELBOARDS 16442 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 16 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
c. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X,.
d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 5.
2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged
trim cover.
3. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with
flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral
with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
5. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after
cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish
consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.
6. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.
D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated
from box.
4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as
suitable for nonlinear loads.
5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.
E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.
4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
PANELBOARDS 16442 - 4

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
current available at terminals.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Plug-in circuit breakers.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:
Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires
mechanical release for removal.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
2.4 ELECTRONIC-GRADE PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
PANELBOARDS 16442 - 5

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; with factory-installed, integral TVSS; labeled by an NRTL for
compliance with UL 67 after installing TVSS.
C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
D. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.
F. Buses:
1. Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs.
2. Copper equipment and isolated ground buses.
2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective
device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.
B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or
have been subjected to water saturation.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal
thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base
and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
PANELBOARDS 16442 - 6

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.
5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
E. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing
load balancing.
J. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;
incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a
computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section"Electrical Identification."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section
"Electrical Identification."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
PANELBOARDS 16442 - 7

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
E. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 16 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination."
C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of
the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax
machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings
before and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard,
is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum
requirement.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 16442
PANELBOARDS 16442 - 8

SECTION 16491 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches.
2. Plug fuses rated 125-V ac and less for use in plug-fuse-type enclosed switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material,
dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include
the following for each fuse type indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to
accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.
a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,
local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.
b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment
calculations are based.
2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, and ratings.
3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.
5. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.
2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
3. Coordination charts and tables and related data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source
from single manufacturer.
FUSES 16491 - 1

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C)
or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment
factors to fuse ratings.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size
and with system short-circuit current levels.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than
two of each size and type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
2. Edison Fuse, Inc.
3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
4. Littelfuse, Inc.
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with
circuit voltages.
2.3 PLUG FUSES
A. Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac.
FUSES 16491 - 2

2.4 PLUG-FUSE ADAPTERS
A. Characteristics: Adapters for using Type S, rejection-base plug fuses in Edison-base
fuseholders or sockets; ampere ratings matching fuse ratings; irremovable once installed.
2.5 SPARE-FUSE CABINET
A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and keycoded
cam lock and pull.
1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity
minimum.
2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high letters on exterior of door.
4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically
damaged.
B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.
C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes
and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to
fuse ratings.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Cartridge Fuses:
1. Service Entrance: Class L, time delay.
2. Feeders: Class L, time delay.
3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.
4. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.
5. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
FUSES 16491 - 3

B. Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure that adapters are
irremovable once installed.
C. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section
"Electrical Identification" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each
fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.
END OF SECTION 16491
FUSES 16491 - 4

SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2. Emergency lighting units.
3. Exit signs.
4. Lighting fixture supports.
5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 13 Section "Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control systems with
low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.
2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent
lamps.
3. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including
time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and
contactors.
4. Division 16 Section "Stage Lighting" for theatrical lighting fixtures and their controls.
5. Division 16 Section "Dimming Controls" for architectural dimming systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BF: Ballast factor.
B. CRI: Color-rendering index.
C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.
D. HID: High-intensity discharge.
E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
G. RCR: Room cavity ratio.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 1

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include
data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
3. Ballast.
4. Energy-efficiency data.
5. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Furnish data
required in "Submittals" Article in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
6. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level
and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in
Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
7. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
8. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture type,
outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting
fixture as applied in this Project.
a. For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified
independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be
certified by the manufacturer.
b. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current
accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions,
weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Lighting fixtures.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.
4. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:
a. Air outlets and inlets.
b. Speakers.
c. Sprinklers.
d. Smoke and fire detectors.
e. Access panels.
5. Perimeter moldings.
D. Samples for Verification: Interior lighting fixtures designated for sample submission in Interior
Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each sample shall include the following:
1. Lamps: Specified units installed.
2. Accessories: Cords and plugs.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 2

E. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed
by product manufacturer.
F. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'
laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program
for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent
agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. FMG Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for
indicated class and division of hazard by FMG.
F. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power
and control connections.
1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.
2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression
system, and partition assemblies.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace
components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 3

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the
remaining nine years.
2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast Batteries: Seven years from date of
Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for
the remaining six years.
B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three years from date of Substantial
Completion.
C. Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to
Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or
workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period
indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish
at least one of each type.
3. Battery and Charger Data: One for each emergency lighting unit.
4. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
5. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
B. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that
introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product
named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 4

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.
E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing
and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different
thickness is indicated.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagneticinterference
as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each
ballast indicated to require a filter.
2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant-start type, unless otherwise indicated,
and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light
output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.
1. Sound Rating: A.
2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 5

5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
6. BF: 0.85 or higher.
7. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
8. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C 82.11 and shall
be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.
B. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and
the following:
1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.
2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
3. Sound Rating: A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.
9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
C. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P,
and having automatic-reset thermal protection.
1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
D. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory-wired with ballast arrangements and
bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in
the field.
2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed
for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless
dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:
1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
3. Sound Rating: A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.
9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.
B. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.
1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens.
2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.
3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and
lamp type indicated.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 6

2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT
A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting
fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100
lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to
fixture ballast.
2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.
3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or
entering ceiling space.
a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operability.
b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer
relay.
6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired
test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is
annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.
B. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more
fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect
unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.
2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixture continuously.
3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.
5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;
bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired
test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is
annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.
2.6 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029.
Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single-lamp
ballasts.
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C).
4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to
minimize audible fixture noise.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 7

B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
2. Sound Rating: A.
3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent.
4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.
6. Power Factor: .90 or higher.
7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
8. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.
9. Retain subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below for bi-level ballasts.
2.7 EXIT SIGNS
A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size,
comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, 2 for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life.
2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained
power pack.
a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored,
relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and
floated on charger.
d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability.
e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit
initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared
receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply,
providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.
g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired
test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is
annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.
4. Master/Remote Sign Configurations:
a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and
provide additional capacity in LED power supply for power connection to remote
unit.
b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except
omit power supply, battery and test features. Arrange to receive full power
requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit
as a unified system.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 8

2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall
yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220
mm), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average
rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm),
1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated
life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
D. T5 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches (1150
mm), 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3000 K, and average
rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature
3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, and suitable for use
with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.
1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).
2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
6. 55 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
2.9 HID LAMPS
A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K,
and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
1. Dual-Arc Tube Lamps: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and,
when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure,
lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output.
B. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
C. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
D. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.
2.10 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount
a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 9

D. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless
steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each
fixture.
B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support
element.
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not
more than 6 inches (150 mm) from lighting fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each
fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or
center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch
(20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting
fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor
of 3.
C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
D. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
E. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 10

END OF SECTION 16511END OF SECTION 16511
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 11